Founder ElecRoc™

An Integrated JDF/PDF Pre-press Workflow System

Version 6

User Guide

Beijing Founder Electronics Co., Ltd.

The software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of the
agreement.

Copyright Notice
Copyright © Beijing Founder Electronics Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Any technical documentation that is made available by the Beijing Founder Electronics Co., Ltd. is the copyrighted work of the Beijing
Founder Electronics Co., Ltd. and is owned by the Beijing Founder Electronics Co., Ltd.

NO WARRANTY. The technical documentation is being delivered to you AS-IS and the Beijing Founder Electronics Co., Ltd. makes no
warranty as to its accuracy or use. Any use of the technical documentation or the information contained therein is at the risk of the user.
Documentation may include technical or other inaccuracies or typographical errors. Founder reserves the right to make changes
without prior notice. No part of this publication may be copied without the express written permission of the Beijing Founder
Electronics Co., Ltd., No.9, The Fifth Street, Shangdi Information Industry Base, Haidian District, Beijing 100085, People’s Republic of
China.

Trademarks
Founder and Founder logo are registered trademarks of Founder Group Corporation. ElecRoc is a registered trademark of the Beijing
Founder Electronics Co., Ltd.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2016, Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 8 and
Windows 10 are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Adobe, Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated and PostScript 3 is a
trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
Other products, fonts and company names and logos in this Manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders
and are hereby acknowledged.
This manual provides a complete introduction to all the functions and features of Founder ElecRoc Workflow Management System.
However, some of them are available upon additional payment, the user interface and functions may vary accordingly. For more
information, contact Founder’s sales personnel.

Printed in the People’s Republic of China

 Contents

Contents
CONTENTS ............................................................................................ I

PART 1 USING ELECROC SERVER ..........................................................1

Chapter 1 Server UI ..........................................................................1
Chapter 2 Using ElecRoc Server ........................................................3
2.1 Processor control .......................................................................... 3
2.1.1 Start processor ............................................................................ 3
2.1.2 Stop processor............................................................................. 3
2.1.3 Delete processor .......................................................................... 3
2.1.4 Configure PDF Generator ............................................................... 3
2.2 Font Setting ................................................................................. 4
2.2.1 View Font .................................................................................... 4
2.2.2 Install Font .................................................................................. 4
2.2.3 Reset Font ................................................................................... 5
2.2.4 Delete Font ................................................................................. 5
2.3 System Settings............................................................................ 5
2.3.1 General Setting ............................................................................ 5
2.3.2 Database Cleanup ........................................................................ 7
2.3.3 Authorization ............................................................................... 7
2.3.4 Space Alert ................................................................................. 9
2.3.5 Backup ....................................................................................... 9
2.3.6 Restore ....................................................................................... 9
2.4 License Information ....................................................................... 9
2.5 Configuration Tools ...................................................................... 10
2.5.1 ElecRoc License Management ....................................................... 11
2.5.2 Processor Configuration .............................................................. 12
2.5.3 Disconnect Remote Desktop ........................................................ 13
Chapter 3 Using Console .................................................................14
3.1 Processor Control ........................................................................ 14
3.1.1 Start Processor .......................................................................... 14
3.1.2 Stop Processor ........................................................................... 15
3.1.3 Terminate processor ................................................................... 15
3.2 Processor Properties .................................................................... 15
3.2.1 Most processors ......................................................................... 15
3.2.2 Printer processors ...................................................................... 15
3.2.3 PDF Rasterizer ........................................................................... 16
3.2.4 Winprint .................................................................................... 16
3.3 Create a print template ................................................................ 17

PART 2 USING ELECROC CLIENT .........................................................19

Chapter 1 ElecRoc Client .................................................................19
1.1 Client Login ................................................................................ 19
1.2 Main Interface ............................................................................ 21
1.3 Main Menu ................................................................................. 22
1.3.1 Backup Manager ........................................................................ 23

i
 User Guide

1.3.2 System Preferences .................................................................... 29

1.3.3 Alert ......................................................................................... 31
Chapter 2 Administrative Tools .......................................................32
2.1 Users Management ...................................................................... 32
2.1.1 User Management ...................................................................... 33
2.1.2 Group Management .................................................................... 35
2.2 Processor Management ................................................................ 36
2.2.1 View Processors ......................................................................... 36
2.2.2 Start or Stop ............................................................................. 36
2.2.3 Define Default Parameter Setup ................................................... 37
2.2.4 Authorize .................................................................................. 37
2.2.5 Proof ........................................................................................ 38
2.2.6 Load Balancing .......................................................................... 38
2.3 Archive Management ................................................................... 38
2.3.1 Archive ..................................................................................... 39
2.3.2 Upload ...................................................................................... 39
2.4 Client Management...................................................................... 40
2.5 Profile Resource .......................................................................... 41
2.5.1 Preflight .................................................................................... 41
2.5.2 Trap ......................................................................................... 42
2.5.3 ICC .......................................................................................... 43
2.5.4 Spot Color Table ......................................................................... 43
2.5.5 EcoInk ...................................................................................... 47
2.6 Imposer Template ....................................................................... 49
2.6.1 Imposer .................................................................................... 49
2.6.2 Preps ........................................................................................ 50
2.6.3 Composer ................................................................................. 50
2.7 Digital Proof ............................................................................... 50
2.7.1 CMF Correction .......................................................................... 51
2.7.2 Color Tune ................................................................................. 52
2.8 Traditional Press.......................................................................... 54
2.8.1 Linear Curve .............................................................................. 54
2.8.2 Color Tune ................................................................................. 56
2.8.3 Press Curve ............................................................................... 56
2.9 Job Ticket .................................................................................. 57
2.10 Ink Amount .............................................................................. 57
Chapter 3 Workflow ........................................................................60
3.1 Create a Job ............................................................................... 60
3.1.1 About Job .................................................................................. 60
3.1.2 Job Management ........................................................................ 60
3.1.3 Job Window ............................................................................... 63
3.2 Create a Workflow ....................................................................... 64
3.2.1 Create a new workflow ............................................................... 64
3.2.2 Manage Workflow ....................................................................... 66
3.2.3 Share Workflow ......................................................................... 67
3.3 Run and Monitor ......................................................................... 68
3.3.1 Select Source Files ..................................................................... 68
3.3.2 Submit Files .............................................................................. 70
3.3.3 Process Files .............................................................................. 70

ii
 Contents

3.3.4 Run List .................................................................................... 71

3.3.5 Status Monitor ........................................................................... 72
3.4 Manage Job Resource .................................................................. 73
3.4.1 Files ......................................................................................... 74
3.4.2 Pages ....................................................................................... 74
3.4.3 Files and Pages .......................................................................... 75
3.4.4 Signatures ................................................................................ 75
3.4.5 Job Resource Clearing ................................................................. 75
3.4.6 View Control .............................................................................. 75
3.5 File Process ................................................................................ 76
3.5.1 Source File Process..................................................................... 76
3.5.2 PDF Process .............................................................................. 77
3.5.3 Signature Process ...................................................................... 96
3.5.4 Tiff Process ............................................................................... 98
Chapter 4 Processor Parameter Setup...........................................106
4.1 How to Configure ...................................................................... 106
4.2 PDF Generator .......................................................................... 107
4.2.1 Parameters .............................................................................. 108
4.2.2 Fonts ...................................................................................... 111
4.2.3 PS .......................................................................................... 113
4.2.4 Advanced ................................................................................ 114
4.3 PDF Processors ......................................................................... 116
4.3.1 Margin Adjustment ................................................................... 116
4.3.2 Page Clipper ............................................................................ 117
4.3.3 PDF Tools ................................................................................ 122
4.3.4 Double Burn ............................................................................ 124
4.3.5 PDF Merger ............................................................................. 129
4.3.6 PDF CMS ................................................................................. 130
4.3.7 Ink Convert ............................................................................. 133
4.3.8 EcoInk .................................................................................... 134
4.3.9 3rd Party Preflight ..................................................................... 135
4.3.10 Ganging ................................................................................ 136
4.4 Output Processors ..................................................................... 139
4.4.1 PDF Export .............................................................................. 139
4.4.2 PDF Rasterizer ......................................................................... 140
4.4.3 1-Bit TIFF Export...................................................................... 149
4.4.4 8-Bit TIFF Export...................................................................... 150
4.4.5 Mono Printer ............................................................................ 151
4.4.6 Color Printer ............................................................................ 156
4.4.7 Pre-RIP Proof ........................................................................... 156
4.4.8 Post-RIP Proof ......................................................................... 162
4.4.9 Barcode .................................................................................. 163
4.4.10 Ink Control Export .................................................................. 165
4.5 Preflight ................................................................................... 167
4.5.1 Use Preflight ............................................................................ 167
4.5.2 Preflight Checklist .................................................................... 169
4.6 Trap ........................................................................................ 182
4.6.1 Overview ................................................................................ 182
4.6.2 Trap Basics .............................................................................. 182
4.6.3 Trap Parameter Setup ............................................................... 185
4.7 Hot Folder ................................................................................ 195

iii
 User Guide

Chapter 5 Imposer ........................................................................198

5.1 Imposer Parameter Setup........................................................... 198
5.1.1 Parameters .............................................................................. 198
5.1.2 Templates ............................................................................... 200
5.1.3 Name ..................................................................................... 203
5.2 Create Imposer Template ........................................................... 203
5.2.1 Quick Start .............................................................................. 203
5.2.2 Create Template....................................................................... 210
5.2.3 Create Sheet ........................................................................... 213
5.2.4 Create Layout .......................................................................... 218
5.2.5 Add Page ................................................................................ 231
5.2.6 Add Mark ................................................................................ 234
5.2.7 Sheet Object Operations ........................................................... 241
5.2.8 More Features .......................................................................... 245
5.3 Terms ...................................................................................... 258
Chapter 6 Composer ......................................................................260
6.1 Quick Start............................................................................... 260
6.1.1 Preparation ............................................................................. 260
6.1.2 Create Signature ...................................................................... 261
6.1.3 Add Pages ............................................................................... 262
6.1.4 Add Marks ............................................................................... 266
6.1.5 Ganging on Back Side ............................................................... 267
6.1.6 Submit Signature ..................................................................... 268
6.2 Create Signature ....................................................................... 268
6.2.1 About Signature ....................................................................... 268
6.2.2 Create New Signature ............................................................... 269
6.2.3 Signature Properties ................................................................. 269
6.2.4 Signature Operations ................................................................ 273
6.3 Add Pages ................................................................................ 276
6.3.1 Ganging Modes ........................................................................ 276
6.3.2 Add Pages ............................................................................... 278
6.3.3 Page Positioning ....................................................................... 280
6.3.4 Page Properties ........................................................................ 284
6.3.5 Page Content ........................................................................... 286
6.3.6 Page Operations ....................................................................... 289
6.4 Add Marks ................................................................................ 294
6.4.1 Mark Type ............................................................................... 294
6.4.2 Smart Marks ............................................................................ 294
6.4.3 System and Custom Marks ........................................................ 298
6.4.4 Mark Properties........................................................................ 298
6.4.5 Edit Marks ............................................................................... 299
6.5 Use Ganging Template ............................................................... 300
6.5.1 Extract Template ...................................................................... 300
6.5.2 Create Template....................................................................... 300
6.5.3 Create Layout .......................................................................... 303
6.5.4 Configure the Layout ................................................................ 306
6.5.5 Manage Templates.................................................................... 307
6.5.6 Apply the Template .................................................................. 308
6.6 More Features........................................................................... 309
6.6.1 About the User Interface ........................................................... 309

iv
 Contents

6.6.2 Define Papers .......................................................................... 314

6.6.3 Define Plates ........................................................................... 315
6.6.4 Define Marks ........................................................................... 316
6.6.5 Auxiliary Tools ......................................................................... 317
6.6.6 Resource Explorer .................................................................... 318
6.6.7 Preference ............................................................................... 319

PART 3 APPENDIXES.........................................................................323
Appendix A: Working Principle of ElecRoc .....................................323
Appendix B: Open Formats of ElecRoc ...........................................324
Appendix C: Acrobat Plug-Ins .......................................................325
C.1 Install Acrobat Plug-ins .............................................................. 325
C.1.1 For ElecRoc Client in Mac .......................................................... 325
C.1.2 For ElecRoc Client in PC ............................................................ 326
C.2 Preflight Plug-in ........................................................................ 328
C.2.1 Positioning .............................................................................. 329
C.2.2 Setting ................................................................................... 331
C.3 Trap Plug-in.............................................................................. 332
C.3.1 View Traps .............................................................................. 332
C.3.2 Trap Zones .............................................................................. 333
C.3.3 Trap Setting ............................................................................ 335
C.3.4 Trap Preferences ...................................................................... 336
C.3.5 Ink Settings ............................................................................ 337
C.4 Screen Plug-in .......................................................................... 338
C.4.1 Use Zone screening .................................................................. 338
C.4.2 Use the Plug-in ........................................................................ 339
Appendix D: Tools and Options .....................................................347
D.1 1 Bit Tiff to PDF ........................................................................ 347
D.1.1 Install the tool ......................................................................... 347
D.1.2 About the tiff files .................................................................... 352
D.1.3 Start the tool .......................................................................... 352
D.1.4 Submit tiff files ........................................................................ 353
D.1.5 Output PDF file ........................................................................ 356
D.1.6 System Preferences ................................................................. 359
D.2 Load Balancing Tool ................................................................... 360
D.3 Unzip Manager ......................................................................... 362
Appendix E: Glossary of Terms ..........................................364

v
 Using ElecRoc Server

Part 1 Using ElecRoc Server

Chapter 1 Server UI
The server-side control program can be started by choosing Start > All Programs >

Founder ElecRoc > ElecRoc Server, or by double-clicking the program icon on

your desktop. The main interface then appears.

Figure 1-1
Main menu: provides commands for you to control and configure the ElecRoc Server.
Toolbar: represents part of the menu commands, for you to quickly perform some
common operations and configurations.
Processor list: lists all the processors in your ElecRoc system, displaying related
information such as ID, name, type, version, host, and status.
Status bar: shows the status of your selected item in processor or font list.

The table below shows the main menu commands and their functions:

1
 User Guide

Menu Item Function

Start Processors Start all the processors in the list.
Operation Stop Processors Stop all the processors in the list.
Exit Exit the server, and stop all the processors.
Configure ElecRoc’s system directories, input directories,
General
and image path.
Automatically cleanup the process record in the database
Database
prior to specified days.
Control the authorities for Clients to access the Server and
Settings Authorization those for ElecRoc users to access the shared folders on the
server.
Space Alert Alert when free disk space is less than specified value.
Backup Backup all settings of server.
Restore Restore the backup settings to the server.
Create PPD file specific to certain device, for PC or MAC
Resources PPD Creator
platform.
Font List List all fonts installed in ElecRoc system.
Add Font File Install fonts into ElecRoc.
Delete Fonts Delete unneeded fonts in ElecRoc.
Font
Check the fonts installed, and update the font configuration
Reset Fonts
in ElecRoc.
Start/Stop
Install fonts into ElecRoc.
Installing Fonts
Refresh Refresh the processor status.
View Toolbar Show or hide the toolbar.
Status bar Show or hide the status bar.
Cascade Arrange all opened windows in cascade.
Window Horizontal Tiling Arrange all opened windows in horizontal tiles.
Arrange Icons Arrange the minimal icons when all windows are minimized.
About Founder
View the version and copyright information about ElecRoc.
ElecRoc
Help
ElecRoc License
View the license information.
Information
Table -1

The icons and their functions in the toolbar from left to right: start
processors, stop processors, font list, add font file, delete fonts, reset fonts, and
refresh.

2
 Using ElecRoc Server

Chapter 2 Using ElecRoc Server

2.1 Processor control
2.1.1 Start processor
By default, all the processors are offline after the Server is started. At this moment, you
can login ElecRoc, but cannot run the processors to process files. Before you can run the
processors, you must start them.
Choose Operation > Start Processors from the main menu, you can start all the
processors. If you want to start only one or some of the processors, choose these
processors in the list, then right-click and choose Start. The Shift or Ctrl key helps you to
choose more than one processor one time. If the processor is installed on a different
computer, make sure the computer is powered on.

2.1.2 Stop processor

Choose Operation > Stop Processors from the main menu, you can stop all the
processors. If you want to stop only one or some of the processors, choose these
processors in the list, right-click and choose Stop.

2.1.3 Delete processor

With the right-click menu item Delete, you can remove unneeded processor from the
list.

2.1.4 Configure PDF Generator

PDF Generator is one of the core processors in ElecRoc, required in each job. Its
processing speed influences the overall efficiency of ElecRoc workflow. To improve this
speed, especially its parallel processing speed, ElecRoc enables you to configure multiple
synchronous sub-processors. Theoretically speaking, more sub-processors enable higher
speed, as long as your machine provides sufficient computing capacities.
Choose PDF Generator, right-click and choose Configuration.

Figure 1-2

By default, each PDF Generator is composed of two sub-processors, Normalizer and

NCPreview. The former is designed to generate PDF (i.e. converts standard PDF, or
non-PDF such as PS, EPS, Tiff, to PDF), the latter is used to generate thumbnail image for

3
 User Guide

preview. You can base on the quantity your license permits, the computer’s capacity, and
your actual production needs, to re-configure the quantity of the two sub-processors.
Click Config. Input the quantity separately in the Normalizer and GenPreview edit boxes.

Figure 1-3

Return to the configuration window. You can use the Enable/Disable button to
individually enable or disable each of the sub-processors. And you can use the Up and
Down button to change their priority. The Delete button is used for deleting unneeded
sub-processor.
The configuration takes effect after you reboot the PDF Generator.

2.2 Font Setting

When a file itself doesn’t provide the fonts it uses, you must install these fonts in ElecRoc,
so as to output the file correctly with the fonts it asks. ElecRoc supports three types of
fonts: 1) Founder-developed CID fonts; 2) Third party PostScript fonts including Type1
font on Macintosh, developed by other font vendors; 3) TrueType fonts available in your
operating system. ElecRoc provides 35 basic fonts by default.
Operations below are available only when you stop and choose PDF Generator, and can
be performed by using either the menu items, or toolbar icons, or right-click menu items.

2.2.1 View Font

Choose Font > Font List from the main menu to view all the fonts installed in ElecRoc.

Figure 1-4

2.2.2 Install Font

Choose Font > Add Font File if the font is provided in PS file. In the pop-up dialog box,

4
 Using ElecRoc Server

browse and open the PS file, ElecRoc will then automatically complete the installation.
Choose Font > Start Installing Fonts if the font is provided via CD. Then insert the CD
into CD-ROM drive. And then ElecRoc starts the install program to install the fonts. After
the installation, choose Font > Stop Installing Fonts.
Reset the fonts after the installation.

2.2.3 Reset Font

Perform this operation after you install or delete a font. It will check all the fonts installed,
and update the font configuration in ElecRoc. Choose Font > Reset Fonts to perform.
Reset TrueType fonts: It pops up the following dialogue before the resetting. Click Yes
to add the TrueType fonts from your operating system to ElecRoc, otherwise, click No.

Figure 1-5

2.2.4 Delete Font

Choose Font > Delete Fonts to delete unneeded font from the font list.

2.3 System Settings

2.3.1 General Setting
You can choose Settings > General from the main menu to configure ElecRoc’s system
directory, input directory and image paths.

1. ElecRoc Directory

Figure 1-6

5
 User Guide

Upload: Refers to a location where you can upload source files. The default location is a
shared folder on the server, named Upload. ElecRoc users can access it via the path
\\Servername\Upload, and upload source files in it.
Jobs: A directory that stores job data. Be cautions in changing this directory since it may
result in loss of all the job data. If needed, we strongly recommend you to change it at
the very beginning, even before the first job, and never change it from then on.
Ink Key: This directory stores ink control files.
To change above directories, click the button to open a dialog box, and then specify
new directory, either local directory on the Server or network directory over the LAN
(network directory must be a shared one available for users to write).

2. Input Directory
It refers to a directory that stores source files, and the source files are files that can enter
into ElecRoc workflow for being processed. At the time you submit files manually at the
PDF Generator node, or automatically by way of a hot folder, you need to look for source
files under a certain directory. The Upload mentioned above is just one of the input
directories. It requires the user to upload the source files in advance. If you don’t want to
upload, you can provide only the path for the source files, instead.
Click Add to add a path. Input the path in the pop-up dialog box appeared later on. The
Delete button enables you to delete a selected path.

Figure 1-7

3. Image Path
Here you provide the options for PDF Generator’s Image Path parameter. With the
image path, ElecRoc can correctly locate the images the source file contains. In case that
the source file and the images it contains are stored together (not including composite PS
file that contains DCS images), you do not need to specify image path.

6
 Using ElecRoc Server

Figure 1-8

2.3.2 Database Cleanup

ElecRoc uses a database to store process data. To prevent the stored data from lowering
the overall efficiency after a long time running, ElecRoc can automatically clean up the
earlier data for you. By default, it cleans up the data 3 days ago. You can choose
Settings > Database from the main menu to specify another.

Figure 1-9

2.3.3 Authorization
Choose Settings > Authorization from the main menu. Here you can control if a Client
can login the Server, and if an ElecRoc user can access the shared folders on the server.

7
 User Guide

Figure 1-10

Under the Client tab, you can control the authorities for the Clients to login the Server.
Only Clients having been authorized can log on the Server. To authorize, input the client
name (not IP address) into the edit box, and click Add to include it into the Authorized
Computer List, and then click Apply. The Delete and Clear buttons are used to remove
the authorities. Click Apply after the deletion or clearing.
Under the Shared Folder tab, you can control the authorities for ElecRoc users to access
the shared folders on the Server. Only users having been authorized can access the
shared folders. Methods for authorizing and un-authorizing are the same as above. By
default, there is an Everyone in the Authorized Users list, indicating that everyone is
authorized to access the shared folders. For reasons of security, you may need to restrict
this authority. For this, you can click Delete to delete Everyone, and then input the user
name into the edit box, click Add and then Apply.

Figure 1-11

8
 Using ElecRoc Server

2.3.4 Space Alert

Choose Settings > Space Alert from the main menu. Here you can specify a threshold.
ElecRoc will alert you when the free disk space is less than this threshold.

Figure 1-12

2.3.5 Backup
Choose Settings > Backup from the main menu. Here you can backup all settings of
server.

2.3.6 Restore
Choose Settings > Restore from the main menu. Here you can restore the backup
setting to the server.

2.4 License Information

Choose Help > ElecRoc License Information from the main menu to open the license
information window.
In this window, you can view the license information, such as serial number, expiration
date, whether the processors are licensed, the quantity of PDF Generators and Clients
allowed, and the quantity and levels as to print and proof.
If needed, you can choose File > Print to print out the above information. Before you
print, you can configure the print setup.

9
 User Guide

Figure 1-13

2.5 Configuration Tools

On ElecRoc server, choose Start > All Programs > Founder ElecRoc > Configuration
Tools, and there you can see such menu items as ElecRoc License Management,
Processor Configuration and Disconnect Remote Desktop, their functions are as
follows.

10
 Using ElecRoc Server

2.5.1 ElecRoc License Management

Figure 1-14

1. Activate License
The above user interface automatically appears during the installation if you chose
License Code to activate your system. Input your serial number (please contact your
sales representative for that), and then click Activate License. In the pop-up window,
see the figure below, choose Online, and then click Activate.

Figure 1-15
If the serial number is correct, it returns a success prompt. (Offline activation is also
supported, please follow the instruction on the window to perform.)
Note: If the server is located in the local area network (LAN), please return to the
previous window, choose the menu item Operation > Configuration, to enable the
proxy server: check the option Enable Proxy Server, and then input the address, port,
user and password according to your actual network environments.

11
 User Guide

Figure 1-16

2. Update License
You may need to update your license in case that you want to extend your license at the
expiration or in case that you want to add more value-added modules. In such cases,
after you have contacted your sales representative for the license extension or for the
module addition or deletion, click the button Update License to enter into a window,
similar with the above activation window, and then click Update.

3. Release License
You may need to release your license in case that you want to migrate your ElecRoc
system from one server machine to another. In this case, on the old machine, click the
button Release License to enter into a window, similar with the above activation
window, and then click Release. After that, re-install your ElecRoc system on the new
server, and activate it with your license over again.

4. View History
By clicking the button History, open a window and view all licenses you have used on the
computer. The listed licenses can be activated, updated, released or removed.

Figure 1-17

2.5.2 Processor Configuration

On ElecRoc server, choose Start > All Programs > Founder ElecRoc > Configuration
Tools, select Processor Configuration, the next window will appear, all processors in
the license code will be listed, select the processors which you want to add, click Next

12
 Using ElecRoc Server

button, the processors will be added to the server.

2.5.3 Disconnect Remote Desktop

By using Windows’ Remote Desktop Connection, you can remotely control and use
ElecRoc’s server machine from a network connected computer. At the time when you exit
the remote desktop connection, after you have done your operations on the server,
please choose Start > All Programs > Founder ElecRoc > Configuration Tools >
Disconnect Remote Desktop to exit, instead of simply clicking the Close icon
on the Remote Desktop Connection window.
This can avoid a potential problem occurring at the moment you select source files (see
section 3.3.1 in part 2). If you simply click the Close icon to exit, your ElecRoc Client
users may NOT normally browse some of the available source files.

13
 User Guide

Chapter 3 Using Console

When you have installed one or more ElecRoc processors with the Server install program,
regardless of locally or non-locally, you will see a shortcut icon named ElecRoc Console
appearing on the computer desktop. By double-clicking this icon, you can open the
ElecRoc’s Console window shown as follows. From this window, you can start or stop the
processors you have installed into ElecRoc system, and configure such processor
properties as the frame bitmap storage directory, and RIP temporary storage directory.
Moreover, as to the proof processors, here you can perform the color-related operations,
including color solution making, spot color measuring, Delta E comparing, re-calibrating,
and remote calibrating.

Figure 1-18
The Server edit box displays the server that the processors belong to. Once you input
the server name here, the table below will list all processors you have installed into this
server. Click the Refresh button, and you can display the processors’ latest status.

3.1 Processor Control

3.1.1 Start Processor
Choose a processor in Offline status from the processor list, and then click Start at the
right of the list, and the processor will be started, with the status turning to Online. A
processor can be used to process files only when it has been started.
A process can be started from ElecRoc Server as well. The Server control program
manages all the processors in your ElecRoc system, not only the local ones residing on
the server, but also the non-local ones installed from other connected computers. The
console manages only the processors installed from the current computer. In other words,
a processor can be started from both ElecRoc Server and the console. If you have started
it from the Server, you can see the status change on the console; in reverse, if you start
it from the console, you can see the status change on the Server.
The Refresh button enables you to know the latest processor status.

14
 Using ElecRoc Server

3.1.2 Stop Processor

Choose a processor in Online status from the processor list, and then click Stop at the
right of the list, and the processor will be stopped, with the status turning to Offline. A
processor can also be stopped from ElecRoc Server.

3.1.3 Terminate processor

In case that a processor cannot be stopped for some reason, you can click Terminate to
forcibly stop it. Perform this operation with caution, for it may result in unexpected error.

3.2 Processor Properties

Choose a processor in the Console window, then click Properties, and you can open the
property setup window for this processor, configuring parameters like frame bitmap
storage directory and RIP temporary storage directory. Such property window for the
proof processor provides also buttons for you to access the color tools.

3.2.1 Most processors

The properties for most processors, including PDF Generator, Imposer, Ganging, Preflight,
Trap, PDF Export and 8 Bit TIFF Export, are inalterable. If you choose one of them and
click Properties, ElecRoc will pop up message, hinting that properties are not editable.

3.2.2 Printer processors

Include mono and color printers.

Figure 1-19
Frame bitmap storage directory: Under this directory, ElecRoc stores the frame
bitmap files generated in printing. You can click the button at the right to choose another.
RIP temporary storage directory: The storage directory for temporary files in RIP
process.
Printer: It is the actual printing device used by the processor. Options in the dropdown
list are the printers installed in your current computer, including those shared printers
from other connected computers.

15
 User Guide

3.2.3 PDF Rasterizer

Generate Thumbnail: If checked, during the rasterizing process, this processor will
generate a thumbnail image for you to preview the bitmap.

Figure 1-20

3.2.4 Winprint
If you open the property window for a Winprint post-RIP proof processor, you can see an
Advanced button. With it, you can open the device’s advanced parameter setup window.

Figure 1-21

16
 Using ElecRoc Server

The advanced parameters are specific to the device, i.e. those for another Winprint
device may be significantly different. Take Epson 9908 as example, here you can not only
configure such general parameters as paper size, paper source, type, copies, direction,
and color mode, but also perform adjustments like nozzle check, printing head cleaning,
printing head calibration, and etc. For details, refer to the instructions attached to the
device.

3.3 Create a print template

Template here refers to the device parameter template for use by the mono printer
processor. In the ElecRoc’s Console window, click PrinterSet to open the following
window.

Figure 1-22

Steps for creating a device parameter template:

1. Choose a printer. Choose the actual printer used by the current processor from
Choose Printer list. This list includes all the printers installed in current computer.
2. Choose a paper. Click the button GenPaperLst at the bottom of the window to
generate paper sizes that can be supported by current printer in Paper Type Full. And
then choose a paper you want to use from the list.
3. Configure print template. This template refers to the printer device parameter
template configured at Printer Setting dropdown list.
1) Create new template. Click AddNewSetting to open the printer’s device parameter
setup window, and define the properties such as if to enable bi-directional print, the
paper tray, paper size, direction and copies.
After that, click OK to enter in the following dialog box. Input the name of the print
template, by default, it is named with the paper size.
And then click OK to finish. The newly-created template then appears in Printer Setting
list. In case that you have added more than one template as per the above method into
the list, make sure that you have chosen the right template in the list.

17
 User Guide

2) Check template. You can click CheckSetting to view the parameter settings of the
currently-selected template in Printer Setting list.
3) DelSettingFile: This button is used only when you want to delete the
currently-selected template in the Printer Setting list.
4. Specify the server path. If the current computer is not the ElecRoc server, please use
the format \\LocalServer\Elecroc\Sysdata, LocalServer referring to the actual server
name. If the current computer is the ElecRoc server, use the format such as
D:\Founder\ELECROC\SERVER\Sysdata, D:\Founder referring the actual disk partition
and root directory where your ElecRoc is located.
5. Generate template file. Click GenSettingIni to open a dialog box.
There would be more than one mono printer processor on the server; in this case, you
need to specify the one with ID number. Input the ID and click OK to complete the
creation of the device parameter template.

After you have created a device parameter template for the mono printer processor, you
can start the Client, enter in the Administrator > Processor Management or a job
window, to open the mono printer’s processor or node parameter setup window, and then
find out the Media parameter under the Print tab, you can see an option named Use
device template. Checking it, and then you can see in the above dropdown list the
created device parameter template. If your template is selected, the size and the device
parameters it defines will then be applied in the file printing.

Figure 1-23

18
 Using ElecRoc Client

Part 2 Using ElecRoc Client

Chapter 1 ElecRoc Client

1.1 Client Login
Start up ElecRoc Client, and the login interface appears:

Figure 2-1

Enter correctly the server name (or IP address, or choose a server name from the
dropdown list), the user name and password, and then click OK. If successfully, the main
interface of ElecRoc Client then appears.
Exceptions or other responses during the login may include:
1) If you enter an invalid or incorrect server name, or user name, or password, ElecRoc
will display corresponding message, such as Cannot connect to the selected server
or Incorrect username or password. Enter a valid one to retry.
2) If the Client is not authorized, it displays This machine has no authority to access
the server, in this case, authorize the Client on the Server (main menu Settings >
Authorization).
3) If you cannot use a Mac Client to connect the Server, you can try to run the command
in Terminal: sudo scutil -set HostName xxx.local, xxx refers to the computer name. And
use this xxx.local as computer name to authorize (from the Server, choose Settings >
Authorization > Client).
4) If the ElecRoc Server is installed and running on Windows 7, when you start up a Client
to login, your Windows Firewall will pop up a dialog box asking whether to block or
unblock ElecRoc. When your client system is Windows XP or 2003, choose Unblock in the
pop-up dialog box; when it is Mac OSX, choose Always Allow;

19
 User Guide

Figure 2-2

and when it is Windows 7, in case that you are in a domain network, check Domain
networks …, in case that you are NOT in the domain, you need to check the other two
options Private networks … and Public networks ….

Figure 2-3

5) If you still cannot login when you have excluded the above reasons, you can click the
button Check on the login interface, and perform an overall checkup, such as the
computer and network configuration, so as to find out the reason why you cannot login.

20
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-4

The window displays the check items at the left, including local machine’s configuration,
the server’s status and configuration. Click Start to begin the checkup, and you can then
see the result at the right of the window. According to the result, you can easily know the
reason why you cannot login.
A click on Reset can clean the result. The server in checklist item Check server
hostname, and the user name and password in the item Check the user name and
password, refer to the server, user, and password currently input in the login interface.

1.2 Main Interface

Main interface of the Client is composed of three parts:
Main menu: at upper-right, provides menu items for you to control/configure the Client.
Navigator: below the main menu, contains five icons, Jobs, Status, Resources,
Administrator, and Statistics.
Workplace: the body of the interface is the operating area of the module you select in
the Navigator area. The default operating interface every time when you login is that of
the module Jobs.

21
 User Guide

Figure 2-5

1.3 Main Menu

The main menu contains the following commands:
Menu Item Function
Change
Change or create the password for current user.
Password
System Switch User Log off the current user, and return to the login dialog box.
Exit Log off and exit the Client.
Backup
Completely backup all or some of the jobs.
Manager
Tools
Configure system preference specific to current user, such as
Preferences
appearance, unit, scale and preferences.
Open the Alert information dialog box, in which you can view the
Alerting Info
alter information existing in system, and open the abnormal job.
Dialog
Here you can also clear the alert information.
Display If checked, a twinkling alert icon appears at the navigator
Alerting Icon when exception or error occurs during the job process.
Alert Pop Alerting If checked, ElecRoc pops up the Alert information dialog box
Info Dialog when exception or error occurs during the job process.
Sound If checked, ElecRoc issues sound alert when exception or error
Alerting occurs during the job process.
Alerting Configure to which job, processor, user the alert is applied, and
Option define the alert sound.
Topics Get the user guide of ElecRoc.
About Display the version number and copyright information.
Help
Open the readme file, in which you can find out the introduction to
Readme ElecRoc, description of the new & key features, and content
summary on the installation DVD.
Table -2

22
 Using ElecRoc Client

1.3.1 Backup Manager

Choose Tools > Backup Manager. Here you can completely backup all or some of the
jobs in ElecRoc, including nodes, node parameter setup, files the job contains, and
resources applied in the job such as color solution and profiles.
The backup manager not only provides all the capacities that the archive management
(Administrator > Archive Management) does, but also enables you to backup Tiff
resource, as well as information about users, user groups and processors. But the
archive management brings more flexibility when it comes to the selection of jobs and
profile resource, and more ease for you to upgrade. Note that the upgrade from lower to
higher version with backup manager or archive management does not recover the node
parameter setup.

1. Backup
Perform under the Backup tab, as follows:
1. Choose backup mode. Full Backup enables you to backup all jobs currently existing
in system, while Selective Backup backups only the selected one(s). Here we take
selective backup as example. And then, click Next.

Figure 2-6

2. Choose the jobs. In the next window, you can see all the jobs existing in system. Check
the jobs from the Backup column. At the PDF & Signature and the 1-bit TIFF columns,
you can further decide whether to backup the PDFs and signatures, and 1-bit tiff files
available in the job. And then click Next.

23
 User Guide

Figure 2-7

3. ElecRoc calculates and displays the disk space needed for the backup. Reserve enough
free disk space and click Next.

Figure 2-8
4. Specify the location for the backup file.

24
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-9

5. ElecRoc starts to backup, and displays the progress with a bar.

Figure 2-10

6. When the bar reaches 100%, it displays Backup has completed.

25
 User Guide

Figure 2-11

2. Restore
Switch to the Restore tab. Here you can restore the backup resource to ElecRoc.
1. Choose the backup file. The table lists the backups made on current Client. The
Refresh button is used to update the table, and the Add button to add more backup files
to the table. Click Next when you have chosen a backup file.

Figure 2-12

2. If more than one processor of same type exists in current system, you need to link the

26
 Using ElecRoc Client

old processor with one of the current processors in the follow-up table.

Figure 2-13

At the time you backup jobs, whether in full or selective backup mode, ElecRoc backups
also the resource files applied in processors. Therefore, at the time they are being
restored, you should assign corresponding processors for these resource files. If more
than one processor of same type exists in system, click the corresponding cell in the
Current JTP column and choose a processor. Click Next after the assignment.
3. Determine whether to replace or remain jobs with same name in system.

Figure 2-14

27
 User Guide

4. ElecRoc starts to restore, and displays the progress.

Figure 2-15

5. When the bar reaches 100%, it displays Restore has completed.

Figure 2-16

28
 Using ElecRoc Client

1.3.2 System Preferences

Choose Tools > Preferences. Here you can configure the system setting related to the
appearance, unit, scale, and preference specific to the current user.

Figure 2-17

 Appearance
The Client user interface employs three sorts of fonts: Big Font, Default Font and Small
Font. Here you can specify the type, style and size for each font. You can apply the fonts
installed in your operating system to display the Client.
 Units
ElecRoc supports three length units: mm, inch and point.
 Scale
It refers to the initial scale for the page and surface previews.
Preview display border: If checked, the border of the preview image will be displayed
when you preview any PDF page or surface.
 Preference
Retain previous settings after submitting: If checked, when you submit files from
current node to another node in job window, ElecRoc remains displaying the current node
and its files.
Change JTP to new settings after submitting: If checked, when you submit files
from current node to another node, ElecRoc switches to display the new node and its
files.

29
 User Guide

Pop out run information dialog when submitting: If checked, ElecRoc pops up the
job process window once the job is submitted. Otherwise, the window will not
automatically appear.
Pop out confirming dialog when submitting: If checked, at the time you submit files
in job window by clicking the Run icon , ElecRoc pops up a dialog for you to confirm the
submission.
Disable magnification in processor list when mouse moves on processor: When
you move the mouse onto the processor list at the left of the job window, you may see an
animated visual effect. It is designed to highlight the processor that your cursor rests on.
If needed, you can check this option to disable this effect.
Pop out processor setup dialog when submitting manually: If checked, when you
submit files to the processor, the setup windows of the processor will popped out, you can
change the parameters of the processor, ElecRoc will process the files with the modified
parameters. The parameter in node will be kept.
Default priority of Hot Folders: The default priority for jobs submitted by way of hot
folder.
 Search Setting
This setting is designed for you to specify the table columns that are to be used when you
quickly position your job in the job list. In quick positioning, input a keyword, and ElecRoc
will then search for the jobs that contain this keyword, from the columns that you have
specified here. The columns that can be specified include job id, job name, customer,
creator, time created, order number, bill number, plan end time, description, and order
detail. When you specify the columns, you can use the button Select All or Clear to
select or unselect all the columns at one time, or you can also use the button Restore to
restore the setting to its default state.
 Network
Network Config parameters are available only for ElecRoc Client running on Mac
computer. You need to configure them before you want to use the preflight and trap
plug-ins and open the PDF page files.

Figure 2-18

Domain or Workgroup Name: The name of the domain or workgroup where your
ElecRoc system is deployed.
User Name: Any user with whom you can access your ElecRoc server on server
computer.
Password: The password for the user defined above, if any.

30
 Using ElecRoc Client

1.3.3 Alert
ElecRoc provides you with many means to inform the exception or error occurred during
the process, including the alert information dialog, alert icon, and alert sound. The alert
information dialog employs a table to display the errors and exceptions. With the buttons
in the dialog, you can open a job’s process information window to view detailed alert
information, and you can also open a job’s operating window. Besides, you can clear the
alert information. The alert icon here refers to an icon twinkling at the navigator.
From the main menu, choose Alert > Alerting Option. Here you can specify not only
the job, JTP and user that the alerting is applied to, but also the alert sound to be issued.

Figure 2-19

Job: If you choose All Jobs, ElecRoc alerts once exception or error occurs in any job. If
you choose Current opened jobs, ElecRoc alerts only when exception or error occurs in
currently opened jobs. In addition, you can choose specific jobs from the job list below.
JTP: If you choose All JTPs, ElecRoc alerts once exception or error occurs at any
processor node. Here you can also choose specific node from the node list below.
User: If you choose All Users, ElecRoc alerts all the users login on ElecRoc. If you
choose Current User, ElecRoc alerts only to the current user. In addition, you can
choose specific users from the user list in the below.
Ignore alert information: If checked, ElecRoc ignores the process information in pink,
and alerts only when information in red appears. If not, ElecRoc always alerts as long as
the information appears, regardless of whether it is in pink or red.
Sound File: Here you can customize a .wav audio as the alter sound.

31
 User Guide

Chapter 2 Administrative Tools

Administrative tools as a whole refer to the tools for administrator to manage ElecRoc
system, and they are classified under three navigator modules, i.e. Resources,
Administrator, and Statistics.

Figure 2-20

Resources Administrator Statistics

Profile Resource User Management Ink Amount
Imposer Template Processor Management
Digital Proof Archive Management
Traditional Press Client Management
Job Ticket
Table -3

2.1 Users Management

In the module Administrator > Users Management, you can create, edit or delete a
user or user group, and control its authority to use the modules of ElecRoc.

32
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-21

2.1.1 User Management

1. View Users
You can view all users in your ElecRoc system, learning its name, description, time
created, group it belongs to, and the status. The administrator is the system-defined
user to administer ElecRoc.
The Refresh button enables you to manually update the information in real time.

2. Create a User
Click New to open the New User dialog box, see the left figure below.

Figure 2-22

Input the user name, and if needed, the description and password. And then click OK.
Note that the upper and lower case letters are distinct for the user name, for example,
User1 and user1 are two different names.

33
 User Guide

3. Edit a User
To add a user into one or more user groups, or to modify its description, double-click the
user in the user list, or choose it and click Edit. The Edit User dialog box then appears.
See the right figure above.
At the left lists all the user groups in your ElecRoc system; at the right shows the group(s)
the user belongs to. Choose a group from the left and click the arrow , the group will be
added to the right. Choose a group from the right and click the arrow , the group will be
removed from the right.
You can modify the description in the Description edit box.

4. Authorize a User
To manage the user’s authority for using ElecRoc’s functional modules, click Authorize.

Figure 2-23

The left column shows all the groups and users in ElecRoc, the right list displays ElecRoc’s
modules. Choose a user or group at the left, and you can see at the right the authority the
user or group has. The modules authorized are checked. Some checked modules may not
be canceled; this must be that the user belongs to a group and the group has been
authorized for these modules. You can cancel these modules when you choose the group
at the left.
To re-define the user or group’s authority, you can check or uncheck the modules as
needed. And then click OK to confirm.
Modules that can be authorized include:

PDF Management They represent the administrative modules

Proof Management under the three navigator icons Resources,
Output Management Administrator and Statistics. If checked, the
Digital Management user can access corresponding modules. E.g., if
Ticket Management you leave the box Processor Management
Users Management unchecked, after the user logins ElecRoc he or
Groups Management she cannot see and use the module

34
 Using ElecRoc Client

Processor Management Administrator > Processor Management.

Archive Management
Ink Statistic Management
It controls if the user can see and use the
administrative module Resources > Imposer
Ganging Resource Management Template, and if the user can see and use the
Composer modules, including the tabs Plate,
Paper, Template and the resource explorer.
It controls if the user can access the item
Backup Manager under the Tools menu. Only
Backup Management
the user who has been authorized can see and
execute this menu item.
Jobs Management It controls if the user can open and delete jobs.
It controls if the user can delete the resource in
jobs. In case that this module is NOT checked
but the user has been authorized for modifying
Jobs Resource Deletion jobs in job authorization, the user can not delete
the resource in the jobs created by other users,
but can still delete the resource in the job
created by him or her.
It controls if the user can use the Substitution
Page Replace function when he or she uses the Page Compare/
Substitution module in the job.
It controls if the user can perform operations in
ElecRoc Client’s Status monitor. The user who
has not been authorized for this module cannot
control any other user’s jobs, such as to stop
Status Monitor Management jobs submitted by other user, however, he or she
can still view all other users’ operations.
Irrespective of whether the user has been
authorized or not for this item, he or she can
always control his or her own jobs.
It controls if the user can use the template
Imposer Template Management
module in Imposer.
It controls if the user can use the VDP (variable
Inx Management
data print) module in the job.
Table -4

5. Change Password
Here the administrator can reset other user’s password.

6. Delete a User
Choose a user from the list and click Delete, if you want to remove it from ElecRoc
system.

2.1.2 Group Management

The group management is the same as the user management on the whole.
A little difference lies in that you should specify the users the group contains. In the New

35
 User Guide

Group or Edit Group dialog box, choose the user(s) from the left and click the arrow
to add the user(s) into the group. Choose the user(s) from the right, and then click the
arrow to delete the user(s) from the group. In addition, as to the group authorizing,
note that the authorized modules are available for all the users the group contains.

Figure 2-24

2.2 Processor Management

In the module Administrator > Processor Management, you can view all the
processors available in your ElecRoc, start or stop their running, define their default
parameter setting, and control if ElecRoc users can use them.

2.2.1 View Processors

You can view what processors are installed in your ElecRoc, their names, types, versions,
servers, and status. The Refresh button enables you to manually update the processor
information.

2.2.2 Start or Stop

Click the button Start, and you can start all the processors. The processors can be used
to process files only when they have been started. Click the button Stop, and you can
stop all the processors. If you want to start or stop only one of the processors, please
choose the processor and right-click your mouse, and then choose the item Start or
Stop from the pop-up menu.

36
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-25

2.2.3 Define Default Parameter Setup

Double-click a processor in the list, or choose it and click Open, to open its parameter
setup window, and then configure the parameters as needed. After the configuration,
click Apply to save the setting as the global parameter setup, i.e. the default parameter
setup for this processor when you add it as a node into a job. For details, refer to Chapter
4 Processor Parameter Setup.

2.2.4 Authorize
Choose a processor and click Authorize. In the pop-up window you can control the
authorities for ElecRoc users to use the processor, view and modify its parameter setup.

Figure 2-26

37
 User Guide

At the top displays the name of the current processor. The left are ElecRoc users, and the
right lists authorized users or user groups. To authorize, choose one or more users or
user groups at the left, and click the button , adding it to the right list. And after that,
you can control the specific authorities of an authorized user by way of the View, Use
and Modify checkboxes, i.e. whether the user can view its parameter setup in the job,
use it in the job, and modify the parameter setup.
To cancel the authority, choose one or more users or user groups at the right, and click
the button .

2.2.5 Proof
This function is applied to digital proof processors, color digital printing devices, and
inkjet printing devices. It can start up the Color Tools, with which you can create the CMF
file for selected processor or printing device, so as to ensure the color consistency and
improve the quality for your output.
To create a CMF file, choose an applied processor and click the button Proof, and you can
see that ElecRoc will automatically create a job and put in related processor nodes in that
job. Here we take the proof processor as example, the auto-created job will then contain
a proof node. Double-click the proof node to open its parameter setup window, and then
define related proof parameters, and after that click the Proof button in the parameter
setup window. The Color Tools will then be started up.
For details about the Color Tools, see the manual Color Tools User Guide.

2.2.6 Load Balancing

This function is designed to balance the workload among the processors of same type,
with an aim to avoid overload. It’s applied to such types of processors as PDF Generator,
Margin Adjustment, Preflight, EcoInk, PDF Export, PDF Rasterizer, 1 bit TIFF Export,
Printer, and Proof. When there are two or more than two processors of same type existing
in your ElecRoc system, you can open the following dialog box by choosing one of the
processors and clicking the button Load Balancing.

Figure 2-27
Check the box Enable and choose a processor in the dropdown list. The overload on the
current processor (if any) will then be assigned automatically to your chosen processor
here, to realize the workload balancing.

2.3 Archive Management

The module Administrator > Archive Management enables you to archive the job

38
 Using ElecRoc Client

resource, such as nodes, node parameter setup, pages, signatures, and the system
resource, including user-defined marks, preflight and trap profiles, proof color solutions,
curves, and spot color tables, to media like local hard disk. You can also upload the
archived resource into ElecRoc.

Figure 2-28

2.3.1 Archive
Under the Archive tab lists all the resources currently in system that can be archived,
classified into two types: Job and Resource, as in the Archive File dropdown list.
Choose specific resource to be archived (use the right-click menu item View Info to view
the resource size), the Shift or Ctrl key helps you to choose more than one job or
resource one time, and then click the Archive button. After you specify the name and
location for the archive file in the popup dialog box, ElecRoc will start the archiving. A bar
appears, showing the progress. The archiving completes when the bar reaches 100%.
Archive files for jobs and resources are suffixed respectively with .arc1 and .arc2. The
archived files are all displayed under the Resume tab. At the time you specify the name
and location for the archive file, if found an archive file with same name existing under
the specified location, ElecRoc will prompt you whether to overwrite the file. In addition,
do not perform other operations while the archiving is under way, such as modifying
parameter setup, processing files, for these operations may slow down the archiving
speed, and may result in unexpected error.

2.3.2 Upload
Switch to the Resume tab. Here lists all the archived resources, accordingly in two types:
Job and Resource, as in the Archived File dropdown list.

39
 User Guide

Figure 2-29

To upload the archived resource into ElecRoc system, choose the archive file, the Shift or
Ctrl key helps you to choose more than one job or resource one time, and click Restore
(or right-click and choose Restore). If the archive file you want to upload is not listed
here, you can click Add to add it into the list.
If found a job or resource file with same name existing in system, ElecRoc will prompt you
whether to overwrite the job or file. The uploading progress is shown with a bar. You can
cancel the uploading when the bar doesn’t reach 100%.
The Add and Delete buttons under the Resume tab are used to add and delete archive
resources into or from the list. Refresh can update the list. Restore, Add, Delete are
also available in right-click menu.

2.4 Client Management

In the module Administrator > Client Management, you can view what clients are
connecting your ElecRoc server. The information includes computer name, IP address,
and the latest login time. The Refresh button enables you to manually refresh the
information in real time. And if needed, you can forcibly disconnect any of the clients. To
do this operation, please choose the client you want to disconnect, and then click the
button Force Disconnect.

40
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-30

2.5 Profile Resource

In the module Resources > Profile Resource, you can manage the resource applied in
PDF process, including preflight profiles, trap profiles, ICC profiles, spot color tables, and
EcoInk solutions, for use by processor nodes like 3rd Party Preflight, Trap, PDF CMS, PDF
Rasterizer, and EcoInk in your job.

Figure 2-31

2.5.1 Preflight
ElecRoc integrates with the preflight module from the third-party Enfocus. Here you can

41
 User Guide

view, import, export or delete the preflight profiles and action files used by this preflight.
To import these two types of files into ElecRoc, click Import. Enfocus preflight profiles
have the file extension of .ppp, while action files have an extension of .eal. To export for
some reasons e.g. backup, click Export. And click Delete to remove unneeded files.
Enfocus preflight profile and action file are available at Enfocus’ website:
http://www.enfocus.com/contentpage.php?id=918
http://www.enfocus.com/contentpage.php?id=929

2.5.2 Trap
Here you can create, edit, delete, import or export the ink profiles used by the Trap
processor.
At the time you configure the ink setting in the Trap processor parameter setup window,
you need to apply an ink profile. This profile defines the separations in job files, the ink
densities and ink types.

Figure 2-32

In each ink profile, the four basic separations, C, M, Y and K, are absolutely necessary.
They cannot be renamed or deleted, their ink types are fixed to normal, and only their ink
densities can be edited. The spot colors can be added or deleted without limit. Their ink
densities, ink types and trap sequence can all be edited. There are four ink types for spot
color, normal, transparent, opaque, and ignore opaque. For details on ink density, ink
type and trap sequence, refer to Chapter 4.6 Trap.
The window for creating an ink profile can be opened by clicking the New button. The
adding, deleting and sequence adjusting of spot colors can be performed with the
buttons , , and . The window for editing an ink profile is the same, which can be
opened by double-clicking the profile, or by clicking Edit.
In addition, you can export the ink profiles from ElecRoc to a specified location, or import
ink profiles into ElecRoc. Before exporting, you can choose one profile, or more than one
profile, at the same time.

42
 Using ElecRoc Client

2.5.3 ICC
Here you can import or export various types of ICC profiles that can be used later when
you configure the color management parameters for the PDF CMS or PDF Rasterizer node,
or when you make an EcoInk solution.
The ICC Type dropdown box lists 7 ICC profile types, CMYK, CMYKLink, RGB, RGBLink,
Gray, GrayLink and DeviceN. Among them, xxxLink refers to Device Link, and DeviceN
refers to the optional ICC profiles when the output mode is set to HiFi in PDF CMS’s
processor parameter setup.

Figure 2-33

2.5.4 Spot Color Table

Spot color table is used to control the output color value for each spot color when it is
output by way of CMYK simulation. Classified into two types, Custom and System, the
spot color tables are widely used in digital proof, rasterizing, and digital printing.

43
 User Guide

Figure 2-34

Here you can create, edit, delete, import and export the user-defined spot color tables,
which can be used later in configuring the color parameters for digital proof, the PDF
Rasterizer parameters, or the color parameters for the digital printing devices.
Here you can also view the system-provided spot color tables.

1. Create spot color table

Switch the type to Custom Spot Color, and click New, spot color table supports CMYK
and Lab color spaces, click the CMYK/LAB button to switch.

Figure 2-35

44
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-36
First, input the table name in the Spot Color Table Name edit box.
Then, click New to add spot color. You need to specify the spot color name and its CMYK
values. After you add a spot color, you can click Edit to modify the values, or Delete to
remove unneeded spot color. You can also click Import to import spot colors from other
spot color tables.
And then, click OK to save the table.

2. System spot color table

This table collects the system-provided spot colors that aren’t allowed to be edited or
deleted.
You can import the system spot color to a specified custom spot color table. Open the
system spot color table and choose any spot color, then right-click and choose Import to
custom spot color table.

3. Apply spot color table

For digital proof, please perform as follows:
1. Create a custom spot color table according to the introduction above (you can also
directly use the system-built-in spot color table Default).
2. Submit your file to PDF Generator in your job. After PDF Generator’s processing,
choose the generated PDF page, right-click and choose Page Info, and then you will see
all the spot colors contained in your file. Composite file usually contains complete spot
color names and color values, while separation file usually doesn’t. In case that the
source file doesn’t contain detailed spot color values, by default, ElecRoc will define the
values as C=M=Y=0 K=100.

45
 User Guide

Figure 2-37

3. Confirm if the color values are exactly the ones you want the spot colors to be output
with. If not, please click the values to modify. This step is especially necessary for
separation file that hasn’t defined the spot color values.

Figure 2-38

4. At the Custom spot color table dropdown list, choose the table that you want to use.
And then choose the modified job spot color(s), and click the button to add them into
the table.

Figure 2-39

5. Repeat the operations above to examine the spot colors on other pages. Modify their

46
 Using ElecRoc Client

values if needed, and then add them to the spot color table.
6. At the time when you modify the output values for the spot colors, you can also first
add the spot colors into the spot color table, and then switch to the module Resources >
Profile Resource > Spot Color Table, to modify the color values.
7. Double-click the proof node or digital printing device node in your job, find out the
parameter Color > Spot Color Table, or Color Calibration > Spot Color Replace,
and then choose your spot color table.
8. Rules for ElecRoc to process the spot colors when you have applied a spot color table:
1) if you have applied a CMF file and have defined the spot colors within the applied CMF
file, ElecRoc will first use the color values defined within the CMF file to output spot colors;
otherwise 2) use the values defined in spot color table to output spot colors, but as to
spot colors with same name, if the color values pre-defined in source file are different
from those defined in the spot color table, ElecRoc will still use those defined in the table
to output spot colors; 3) in case that you haven’t added spot colors into your spot color
table, ElecRoc uses the values pre-defined in the source file to output spot colors.
For PDF rasterizing:
The steps to apply a spot color table are similar to those above. When you have added the
spot colors from the source page to your spot color table, double-click the PDF Rasterizer
node in your job, and under the Screen tab, click to import the spot colors from the
spot color table. After the importing, you can configure the output mode, color values,
and screen setting for the spot colors, and after the configuration, you can click to save
the modified color information, including color name and values, back into the table.

2.5.5 EcoInk
Here you can create, edit, delete, import and export EcoInk solutions, which can be used
when you configure the parameter EcoInk Solution for the processor EcoInk.
To create a new solution, click New. Define the parameters in the pop-up window,
including the solution name, and then click OK.

Figure 2-40

47
 User Guide

 Solution Name
The name of EcoInk solution. It becomes non-editable when you edit the solution.
 Profile
EcoInk process changes color values, and therefore, you need to provide the input and
target ICC profiles, to ensure the color quality and consistency. ElecRoc builds in a few
ICC profiles for you to choose, some of them are industry standard ICC profiles. You can
also use custom profiles, but need to import them into ElecRoc beforehand, under the
module Resources > Profile Resource > ICC.
 Rendering Intent
You can separately configure the rendering intent for CMYK and RGB. There are 4 options,
Perceptual, Saturation, Relative, and Absolute.
 Set the Parameters
CMYK Total Ink Amount: To limit the total amount of CMYK inks to the value specified
here. This limit can maximize the ink saving, but if the value is set too low, it may reduce
the color space, resulting in color loss.
Black Max: The maximum amount of black ink.
Black Start: It controls from which point the black substitution starts, and it determines
the shape of the black substitution curve. The start point for black substitution in the tone
is also called GCR start point. The range of black substitution is from the start point to the
darkest in the shadow. The bigger this value, the less the GCR is applied to the gray in
high light.
Chromatic Zone: It controls the range of CMY chroma space. Bigger value enables
wider range.
Chromatic Level: 0-100, the bigger the value, the higher the level will be, and the more
the color inks remain, less ink is thus saved.
EcoInk Level: The higher the level, the more the black ink can be used for CMY. The
default value is 50.
 Color Purity
During the EcoInk process, you can keep the purity of some colors unchanged. These
colors may include:
C-M-Y-K Retain: only one of CMYK is unequal to 0, the rest three all equal 0.
CM-MY-CY-CK-MK-YK Retain Color Purity: any two of CMYK are unequal to 0, the
rest two both equal 0.
CMK-CYK-MYK Retain: any three of CMYK are unequal to 0, the rest one equals 0.
100% Retain Solid: i.e. the color value for at least one separation is 100%.
Here ElecRoc also supports you to import or export the EcoInk solutions. You can export
a selected EcoInk solution as a ZIP file from ElecRoc to your specified location, such as
local hard disk, for backup or for use in upgrade. And you can import an EcoInk solution
from an outside source into ElecRoc. When you import, you can choose whether or not to
import the original ICC profiles at the same time, i.e. ICC profiles applied in the solution.
Note that, if you choose to import the profile, you may replace existing profile with same
name in your ElecRoc system, if any.

48
 Using ElecRoc Client

2.6 Imposer Template

In the module Resources > Imposer Template, you can create, edit or modify the
imposer templates and composer templates that can be used by all ElecRoc clients.

Figure 2-41
Note: We will no longer provide the old imposer module and related maintenance since
ElecRoc 6. For both our new and old customers, we strongly recommend the new imposer
integrated in 6, i.e. the formerly named Imposer in v5.x. For our old customers using the
old imposer, although we will remain this module for you during the upgrade, so as to
ensure the consistency between original and renewed publications after the upgrade, we
still strongly recommend you to use the new imposer to handle your new jobs. Old
imposer templates can be converted to the format that the new imposer supports.

2.6.1 Imposer
The operating window is shown above. The imposer templates refer to the templates
used by ElecRoc Imposer processor. They are classified into system ones and job-level
ones. System templates can be used in any job, by any user, on any Client, while the
job-level templates are available only to one or more specific jobs.
Templates listed here are system ones. As shown at the left of the window, they are
sorted and managed under a template directory, in which the Imposition Template is the
root directory. Under this root directory, you can directly store your templates (by default,
system built-in templates are stored under this directory), or you can create
sub-directory. Click the icon aside, and you can expand a shortcut menu, and by using
the items therein, you can create, delete, or rename a subdirectory.

Figure 2-42

49
 User Guide

Choose one directory, and you will see all the templates under that directory at the right
of the window, where you can view detailed information about the templates, including
template names, time created, creator, page count, and comment.
The Preview area shows the preview image of your selected template.
Here you can create, edit, delete, import, export and convert templates, by using the
buttons above the template list.
New, Edit: By clicking the button New, you can start up the imposer template editing
program. After the editing, you can upload it to ElecRoc server. A click on Edit also starts
the editing program, and in this case, you can edit selected template.
Import, Export: The exported file is suffixed with .tplxz, named as outputTplx.tplxz by
default. You can customize the file name, and you can export more than one templates at
one time.

2.6.2 Preps
ElecRoc imposer also supports you to use Preps templates.
Here you can create, delete, import, and export Preps templates. By clicking the button
New, you can start up the Preps program. Make sure that you have installed the Preps
software in your computer, or ElecRoc will report an error after you click New.

2.6.3 Composer
Templates here refer to the templates used by ElecRoc Composer processor.
Same as imposer templates, the composer templates are also sorted and managed
under a template directory, in which you can create, delete and rename subdirectory.
Choose a directory, and you can see all the templates under that directory. Information
displayed about the templates includes template name, time created, creator, page count,
and comment. Choose any template, and you can see its preview image. And by using
the buttons above the template list, you can create, edit, delete, import, export, and
refresh the templates.

2.7 Digital Proof

In the module Resources > Digital Proof, you can manage two types of resource
involved in pre/post-RIP proof: CMF calibration files and color tune curves. Among them,
the CMF files can be made by the Color Tools, while the color tune curves can be created
here.

50
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-43

2.7.1 CMF Correction

A color calibration solution refers to a set of color management parameters, used for the
user to proof with ease and efficiency. ElecRoc provides many built-in color solutions for
each proof device model it supports. They are designed for the diverse environments the
user may encounter, and can effectively meet their demands.

1. View Color Solution

Under the CMF Correction tab, choose a proof device from the Device Mode dropdown
list, and then you can see in the below all the color solutions available for the device,
including the system-defined ones and user-added ones. Double-click a solution, or
choose it and click Param, to view its detailed information, such as applicable devices,
color mode, resolution, ink type, media type, total ink, and etc.

Figure 2-44

51
 User Guide

2. Remote Proof
Remote proof is designed to employ a time-saving and effort-saving method, to ensure
your proof devices, of same model but from different locations, able to output proof
samples consistent with each other. The general steps for remote proof are as follows:
1. Enter in Resources > Digital Proof > CMF Correction, choose a solution and then
click Export Remote.
2. Send the exported solution file to your nonlocal colleague or customer.
3. Receive the solution at the remote location, then enter in Resources > Digital
Proof > CMF Correction, choose Import Remote, importing the solution into ElecRoc.
4. Enter in Administrator > Processor Management, choose the processor and start
up the Color Tools. Use it to perform a re-calibration on the solution. The solution can
then be used as a formal and local solution after the calibration.

2.7.2 Color Tune

Curves here are applied to digital proof, and can be used when you configure the proof
parameter Color > Color Tune. Operations on curves like creating, editing, deleting,
importing and exporting are all supported.

Figure 2-45

Steps for you to create a new curve:

1. Click New in the window to open the curve setup window.

52
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-46

2. Input a name in the Curve Name edit box.

3. Choose a color separation in the Separation dropdown list. By default, options include
CMYK, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black. If you need to define curve for spot color, click
Add, and then in the pop-up dialog box, choose spot color from spot color table existing
in your ElecRoc system. In case that you haven’t added the spot color into ElecRoc
system, please switch to Profile Resource > Spot Color Table, to add the spot color.

Figure 2-47

Note: If you have defined a common curve for CMYK and meanwhile have also defined
a curve separately for each separation, C, M, Y and K. At the time ElecRoc outputs, it will
apply the separately-defined curve to output the corresponding separation, and only
apply the common curve to those separations that you haven’t separately define a curve.
4. And now define the curve. You can drag any point on the curve to make a rough
adjustment, or base on a print sample or even a measurement, to type accurate output
values into the percentage boxes. The Reset button enables you to restore the default
curve shape.
5. Click OK to save the curve.

53
 User Guide

2.8 Traditional Press

With the tool Resources > Traditional Press, you can manage resource related to the
traditional printing, such as the linear curves, color tune curves, intended and actual
press curves, all of which can be used in PDF rasterizing. Managing operations include
create, save as, edit, import, export, delete, and recalibration.

Figure 2-48

2.8.1 Linear Curve

It refers to the calibration curve in PDF Rasterizer processor parameters, sorted into two
modes, CMYK and Gray.

1. Create a curve
As indicated by the options in the Color Mode dropdown list, linear curves are sorted in
two modes, CMYK and Gray. Before you perform curve operations like viewing, creating,
editing, or importing and exporting, you need first to choose a proper color mode.
Click New to open the following dialog box, define the parameters and then click OK.

54
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-49

Curve Name: Here you can specify the curve name.

Curve setting: Totally there are 24 pairs of checkboxes and edit boxes. The percentage
at checkbox represents original dot density, while value in edit box represents actual dot
density. The actual dot percentage can be measured with a photometer on printed
linearization chart. Tick the checkbox to activate corresponding edit box.
Separation: You can define a curve for each separation. In CMYK mode, the default
separations include Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black and Default Separation. The former
four are process color separations, and the latter represents spot color. The curve defined
for Default Separation is the default curve for all spot colors. In Gray mode, the default
separations include Gray and Default Separation. The latter is the same as above.
Add/Delete: In addition to the default separations, you can also add a specific spot color
separation to define a curve for it. The spot color separation can be deleted, but the
process color separations and the Default Separation cannot be deleted.
Reset: To reset the curve for the currently-elected separation to original curve shape.
Use same data for all separations: If checked, apply current curve to all the other
separations.
Flexo Curve: If checked, the curve created will be optimized automatically and thus can
be applied for Flexo printing.
Direct Curve: If checked, ElecRoc will directly use the data entered by the user, without
RIP calculation. For example, if you want 10% area to be output 8%, check this option,
and then input 8 in the 10% edit box.
Negative: Check this option in case that the printed linearization chart for you to
measure the actual dot percentage is negative.
Resolution: Here you can label the applicable screen resolution of your curve.
Dot Shape: Here you can label the applicable screen dot shape.
Frequency: Here you can label the applicable screen frequency.

55
 User Guide

2. Save As
Return to the main interface of the Linear Curve tool. Choose a curve and click Save As.
In the follow-up dialog box, input the curve name and click OK. In this way, you can save
the curve with another name and another location.

3. Recalibration
Recalibration aims to update a curve, making it adapt to the latest change in the proof
environment. Choose a curve and click Recalibration to open the recalibration window.
The window is same as that for creating or editing a linear curve.

Figure 2-50

First, apply the curve to print out a chart and measure it. Then, input the measured
values into corresponding dot percentage edit boxes in the recalibration window. And
then, you can apply the calibrated curve to print out the chart again, to check the
calibration effect. Repeat the printing and measuring till you get satisfactory result.

2.8.2 Color Tune

The tool Traditional Press > Color Tune helps you to manage the color tune curves
that can be used by PDF Rasterizer. It supports you to create, save as, edit, delete,
import, and export the curves.
Please see the introductions above for the operations and parameter settings, for they
are similar to the linear curve. When you create or edit a tune curve, you will see a
parameter named Use same data for all separations, if you check it, you can apply
the current curve to all the rest separations.

2.8.3 Press Curve

The tool Traditional Press > Press Curve helps you to manage the intended and actual
press curves that can be used by PDF Rasterizer. It supports you to create, save as, edit,
delete, recalibrate, import, and export the curves.

56
 Using ElecRoc Client

Please see the introductions above for the operations and parameter settings, for they
are similar to the linear curve.

2.9 Job Ticket

In the module Resources > Job Ticket, you can manage the job tickets in your ElecRoc
system. Job ticket can be generated in the job window, by clicking the icon from the
top toolbar. It stores all the nodes and their parameter settings in your job as a template,
for ease in later re-use.
Here you can delete, import, and export these job tickets.

Figure 2-51
Delete job ticket: Choose the job ticket(s) that you want to delete, and then click Delete.
Export job ticket: Choose the job ticket(s) that you want to export, and then click Export.
Specify the destination and file name in the pop-up dialog box. The file is saved with a
suffix .jt.
Import job ticket: Click Import, and then choose the .jt file from the pop-up dialog box.
In case that it finds out a job ticket with same name existing in your system, it will ask
you whether or not to overwrite it.

2.10 Ink Amount

In the module Statistics > Ink Amount, you can obtain the ink-saving data across a
specified time period, in all the jobs, from the files processed by the processor Ink Save
Report.
The only thing you need to do is to specify the starting and ending time at the Time From
and To dropdown-lists, and after that, it automatically displays the ink-saving data. The
icon can help you to choose a frequently-used time period, such as latest week, latest
two weeks, latest month, and etc.

57
 User Guide

Figure 2-52

The statistic data comes from the system database, therefore, even if you may have
deleted some of the files processed by the node Ink Save Report in your job, or you may
even have deleted the node Ink Save Report, but as long as you haven’t deleted the
corresponding ink-saving data in the system database, you will still get the data as usual.
If needed, you can click the button Export Excel to export the statistic data as an Excel
datasheet. The datasheet shows the detailed data comparison for each file before and
after the ink-saving.
If needed, you can click the button Delete Data to delete unneeded ink-saving data of a
specified time period from the system database. A dialog box will pop up, asking you to
specify the time period.
Ink-saving statistic can also be carried out in your job, so as to obtain the ink-saving data
for one or more files in your job.
1. Add the nodes PDF Rasterizer and Ink Save Report into your job, the latter node can
be directly connected behind the former.

Figure 2-53

2. At the PDF Rasterizer’s processor parameter ICC > Screen EcoInk Solution, you
need to choose an EcoInk solution.
3. Submit your file for rasterizing, and after that, continue to submit for ink saving. The
process on big and complex file may take a relatively longer time, please wait a little
while till the process ends up.

58
 Using ElecRoc Client

4. Choose the Ink Save Report node, and you can see that there is only an input file
queue under the node. Choose one or more files, then right-click and choose Ink Save
Report Result.
5. A window pops up, showing the statistic result, including the number of files being
counted, the ink data before and after the ink-saving, and the ink-saving percentages.

Figure 2-54

59
 User Guide

Chapter 3 Workflow
Founder ElecRoc is a digital workflow management application. The ElecRoc workflow
enables various pre-press and printing processes or procedures to work smoothly and
efficiently, as in a pipeline.

3.1 Create a Job

3.1.1 About Job
The processes on files in ElecRoc, such as imposing, composing, rasterizing, proofing, are
all implemented by way of a job. Job, or called job ticket, is the platform to build a
pre-press and printing file process workflow. It defines the specific procedures
constituting the workflow, the sequence of the procedures, each procedure’s processing
manner, and enables the user to submit, process, monitor and output files, and manage
the input and output files of each procedure.
Here the procedures, or processes, are performed by ElecRoc processors, or called JTP.
Each processor independently takes responsibility for a specific procedure. ElecRoc
processor family grows to a lot of members in years of innovation and development, such
as PDF Generator, Imposer, Composer, Preflight, Trap, Rasterizer, Proof, Digital Printing,
Inkjet Printing, with the total number coming close to 30, covering the various aspects in
pre-press and printing. These processors in a detailed job are called processor nodes, or
nodes. They can produce very flexible combination and connection, forming various
workflows to meet diverse business requirements.
In the job window, each job is composed of one or more processor nodes. These nodes
can not only link each other, but can also exist independently. The quantity of jobs is not
limited in ElecRoc, so you can create more than one job as needed, and you can manage
the authority for ElecRoc users to access or control each of the jobs, so as to enhance the
security of your critical business data.

3.1.2 Job Management

The job creation and management are performed in ElecRoc’s Jobs window. After you
login to ElecRoc from the Client, by default, you will enter in this user interface.

Figure 2-55

60
 Using ElecRoc Client

1. Job list
Job list displays all the jobs in ElecRoc, providing job information such as job ID, job
name, customer, creator, time created, bill No. and description. By clicking the head of
the table on any column, you can sort the list in ascending or descending order.
Job ID: ElecRoc assigns an ID once a job is created. It is unique and non-editable.
Job Name: The job name is specified at the time you crate the job. It cannot be edited
once specified.
Customer: The customer name filled in by the user when the job is created.
Creator: The name of the user who created the job.
Time Created: The time when the job is created.
Bill No.: The bill number filled in by the user when the job is created. It can be edited.
Description: The description filled in by the user when the job is created. It can be
edited.
Order No.: The number of online order, auto-produced by the online print system.
Plan End Time: The date on which you plan to end the tasks of the order.
Order Detail: Only the online order comes with an icon in the job list, and by clicking on
this icon, you can view the details on the order, including the printing requirement,
distribution information, and charge summary.

2. Create a job
Click New on top of the job list to open a pop-up dialog box.

Figure 2-56
Job Name is a required item, thus cannot be empty, and cannot be the same with an
existing job. Other items are optional. Click OK when you complete the filling-in. The
job’s operating window then appears automatically.
If needed, you can base on a job ticket to create your job, in this case, please choose a
suitable ticket in the Job Ticket dropdown list. See section 3.2.3 for details on how to
create and apply a job ticket.

61
 User Guide

After you have created a job, choose the job in the job list and then click Edit, you can
edit the job’s bill number, description, order number, plan end time, and etc.

3. Open a job
To open a job and enter into its operating window, double-click the job in the job list, or
choose the job and then click Open. An icon appears at the upper-right corner of the
job window when you have opened a job. With this icon, you can close the opened job.
You cannot open a job in case that the access to the job is limited and you are not
authorized.

4. Authorize a job
Choose a job in the job list and click Authorize. Here you can configure the authority for
ElecRoc users to access the job.

Figure 2-57

At the top of the dialog box is the name of the job you want to authorize, at the left are
ElecRoc users, and at the right are authorized users. Choose a user or user group at the
left, and then click the arrow to add it into the right list. The added user or user group
now can use the nodes in the job to process files. The Modify box controls if the user or
user group can modify the nodes’ parameter setup.
To cancel the authorization, choose the user or user group at the right, and then click the
arrow .
Note: Choose the directory User or Group at the left, and then click , you can
add all users or user groups to the right, in a batch.

5. Search Job
In case that there are too many jobs in your ElecRoc system, you can use the search
combo box to quickly find out your job.

Figure 2-58

The Search combo box is located on top of the job list. First you should check the box at
the leftmost, then type a keyword behind, and specify a period of time. If the job ID,
name, customer name, bill number or description (i.e. the search scope) contains the

62
 Using ElecRoc Client

keyword, and the job is created in the specified time period, such jobs will be displayed
in the job list.
You can click the icon to define the search scope. If you limit the scope to specific
columns, e.g., Job Name only, ElecRoc will only search the jobs whose names contain
the keyword. The icon at the right-most enables you to choose a frequently-used
time period, such as latest week, latest two weeks, latest month, and etc.
Make sure that you have specified proper time period. If you don’t specify, the end date
can update itself. ElecRoc can help you remember the search conditions and the time
period. You can see the latest search configuration if you reboot the Client. Therefore, in
case that you don’t see your job in the job list, please take a look at the Search combo
box, to see if your job has been filtered.

6、Rapid Positioning
Press key combination Ctrl + F while you have chosen a job in the job list, and you can
see an activated Rapid position control. Input a keyword that has something to do with
the job you want to position, such as the job name, full name or part of the name,
starting with the first character, and then you can immediately see the job in the job list,
being highlighted by ElecRoc.

Figure 2-59

In case that the job list contains more than one qualified job, you can press the direction
key ↓and ↑ to switch over.

7. Other operations
Delete job: Choose the job(s) you want to delete, and click Delete. This operation
deletes all data related to the job(s) from your ElecRoc system.
Refresh job list: The job list can be updated manually if you click Refresh.

3.1.3 Job Window

As shown in the below, the job window is composed of three parts.
At the left displays the processor list and shared resource list. The former contains all
processors installed in your ElecRoc system. If the processor is online, i.e. has been
started on the Server, it appears in color. In this case, if you add it into a job and submit
files, it can immediately process the files. If the processor is offline, i.e. has not been
started or has been stopped, it appears in gray. If you add it into a job and submit files,
it cannot process the files immediately. The shared resource refers to shared processor
nodes and workflows.
The upper-right area is used for you to create and manage the workflow. It may contain
one or more independent or connected nodes. ElecRoc provides a toolbar and right-click
menu in this area, for you to perform workflow-related operations.

63
 User Guide

Figure 2-60

The lower-right area is designed for you to manage and process node-specific files. It can
display each node’s input and output files, and also can display all the files in the
workflow of a specific file format, such as all the source files, all the PDF pages, and all
the signatures. The management and operation on these files, such as submitting,
previewing, downloading, can also be performed with the toolbar icons on the top and the
right-click menu items.
You can freely adjust the sizes of the three areas above, and hide or expand them with
the icons , , and .

3.2 Create a Workflow

3.2.1 Create a new workflow
You can create a workflow in the job window now that you have created a job. This
operation can be divided into three steps. 1, add the nodes, i.e. to specify the procedures
constituting the workflow; 2, connect the nodes, i.e. to determine the sequence of the
procedures; 3, configure the node parameter setup, i.e. to define how each procedure
processes. For processor parameter setup, refer to Chapter 4.

1. Add Nodes
A node represents a procedure. A processor can be added into the job as a node in two
ways. 1) Choose a processor in the processor list (just place the cursor over the
processor), and then drag it into the upper-right area. 2) Right-click any place in the
upper-right area and choose New, and then choose a node from the node list.
You can add more than one node of same type into the job, e.g. more than one PDF
Generator. In this case, ElecRoc will automatically add an ID in the node name to identify
the nodes of the same type. The added node can be dragged anywhere in the job window.
If you choose more than one node, you can drag them together. You can also change the
node position, making them appear in order, with the Align and Auto Arrange
commands from the right-click menu.

64
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-61

2. Connect nodes
Connect the added nodes in sequence, so as to form a workflow like a pipeline. In this
way, when a node finishes its task, it can automatically send the processed files to the
next node in the workflow, till all the nodes in the workflow finish their tasks. Workflow
enables fully-automated processes, and improves the production efficiency.

Figure 2-62

Method 1, choose the Connect tool in the toolbar, place the cursor on the beginning
node, click and hold your left mouse button, and then drag the cursor to the node you
want to connect. If the two nodes can connect, an arrow appears between them, showing
the process sequence. If not, ElecRoc pops up warning message.
Method 2, at the time you add a node, drag the node to an existing node. If they can
connect, ElecRoc can automatically add the node behind the existing node after you
release your mouse.
Method 3, choose an added node, right-click and choose New. Now ElecRoc will list all
the nodes that can be added behind the node. Choose any of them as needed.
It’s flexible for you to create workflow. You can connect all or part of the nodes, or you
can also make all or part of them independent. ElecRoc builds in powerful logic to judge
if two nodes can connect or not, and it will pop up warning in time for the user to avoid
error.
We call the node before a node in the workflow as parent node, and the node behind it as
child node. The first node in the workflow is called root node. Each node can have only

65
 User Guide

one parent node in front, but may have more than one child node behind. The root node
has no parent node.

3.2.2 Manage Workflow

You may make some management or control to the workflow after you have created it.

1. Toolbar
There is a toolbar on top of the workflow. The icons and their functions are as follows:

Icon Function
Refresh manually the processing status of the nodes in current job, and the
online/offline status of the processors displayed at the left of the job
window.
Open the Run List window to view the running information of the nodes in
current job.

View the page substitution record.

It lists the latest jobs opened by current user for a fast switch-over among
Job list
them.
When checked, you can choose, move one or more nodes in the workflow
freely.
Used for connecting nodes. Double-clicking any blank place in the workflow
area switches to the tool.
Lock the node in the job window. Click this icon once again to cancel the
locking.

Save the workflow as a job ticket, for public use in ElecRoc system.

Table -5

2. Node right-click menu

A shortcut menu is available when you right-click a node in the workflow. It contains the
following menu items.

Item Function
Used for selecting the source files you want to process, this item appears
Select File only when you right-click the node PDF Generator. It will then open the
Select Files dialog box, see section 3.3.1 for details.
Automatically list all the nodes that can be connected behind. By simply
New choosing one from the list, you can add the node into the job and make it
connected behind the current one.
Stop processing the files automatically-submitted by the preceding node in
Hold
the workflow.
Open the processor parameter setup window to view or modify the node’s
Parameters
parameter setting.
Delete the currently selected node from the workflow. This operation
deletes the input and output files under the node, or even the input files
Remove
under the next node, as well. ElecRoc pops up message for you to confirm
before the deletion.
Re-define the name of the node. There may be more than one node with
Rename
same name and of same type in your job.

66
 Using ElecRoc Client

Disconnect
Disconnect the parent node.
with Parent
Disconnect
Disconnect the child node.
with Child
Replace by Replace the current node with another node of same type.
Stop the current node running the files you submitted last time. ElecRoc
Stop allows you to submit one or more than one file at one time. If you have
Running submitted more than one file last time, this item will stop running all the
files you submitted that time.
Stop All Stop the current node running all the files you submitted, i.e. all the running
Process files and all the waiting files under the current node.
Table -6

3. Right-click Menu
Right-click any blank place in the workflow area, you will get a shortcut menu. It contains
the following menu items.

Item Function
It lists all the available nodes in your ElecRoc system at this moment. You
New
can choose any of them to add it into the job.
Empty Delete all the nodes and the files they will or did process in current job.
Refresh Refresh the nodes and their status in the job.
Align Automatically align the out-of-order nodes.
Auto
Automatically arrange the nodes in the job as per workflow, or type.
Arrange
Table -7

4. Interrupt
It’s necessary to interrupt the workflow at a specific point, in case that you want to check
and confirm the process result of a certain node before it submits the result to the next
node. If interrupted, the node will not automatically process the files from its preceding
node, after these files enter in its input file queue. At this moment, you can check and
confirm the result of the preceding node timely. After this, you can manually submit the
files to the current node for process.
To interrupt at a certain node in the workflow, choose this node, right-click and choose
Hold. An interrupted node is shown with a sign . Right-click the node and choose
Resume to cancel the interruption.

3.2.3 Share Workflow

You can share the workflow by way of job ticket. The ticket can refer to an aggregation of
one or more nodes and their parameter setup. It defines the process workflow that the
files will go through and the process manner, helping the user to batch process files of
same type.
Click the toolbar icon Export Job Ticket , input the ticket name in the pop-up dialog
box, and then click OK. Except the input and output files, this operation will fully export
the nodes, node sequence, node parameter setup, even the space between them in the
job window.

67
 User Guide

Figure 2-63

To import one of the shared workflows into the job, please switch to Resource Share >
Job Tickets at the left of the job window, choose the shared job ticket and then directly
drag it into your job.
Note: In the administrative module Resources > Job Ticket, you can perform
managing operations to all the job tickets in your ElecRoc system, such as deleting,
importing and exporting.

3.3 Run and Monitor

3.3.1 Select Source Files
It refers to the operation of providing source files to ElecRoc. ElecRoc supports various
types of files, including PDF, PS, EPS, TIFF, PRN files. These files can get into ElecRoc
workflow in two ways: the Select Files interface of PDF Generator, and the hot folder.

1. PDF Generator
Choose the PDF Generator node to activate the icon Select Files in the toolbar below.
Click this icon to open the Select Files dialog box.

68
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-64
 Select Files
Choose the files under certain directory, and let them get into ElecRoc workflow system.
Here the optional directories must be specified beforehand on the Server (main menu
Settings > General). The Upload directory is the default folder shared on the server for
public use. You can upload the source files into this folder. Other directories are those
defined at General Settings > Input Directory.
To add source files into ElecRoc system, double-click the files under some directory, or
select the files and then click Select. The files you choose will then enter into the input
file queue under the PDF Generator node.
The File Type dropdown box lists the file types ElecRoc supports. When a file type is
selected, the dialog box will only display the files of that type. The Refresh button
enables you to refresh the files under the current directory in real time.
 Auto Submit
This is an important option. If checked, ElecRoc will automatically submit the source files
to PDF Generator for process, once you have chosen the source files and closed the
current dialog box. If not, after the source files enter into the input file queue of the PDF
Generator node, ElecRoc will not automatically submit them for process. By default, this
option is checked.
 Common directories
You can save your commonly-used source file directories into a dropdown list, which can
be triggered with the triangle icon at the right-most of the Location column. To save
the current directory into the list, click and then choose add to often-used directory
list. Click once again, and you will see the current directory in the list. Next time you
can quickly open this directory to choose source files. If you want to delete a directory

69
 User Guide

from the list, or change its position in the list, choose manage often-used directories.

2. Hot Folder
When you use a hot folder as the root node of your workflow, you can upload the source
files into the folder specified by your Hot Folder node. ElecRoc can automatically detect
the folder, and if it finds new files, it will automatically submit the files to the next node
connected with the hot folder node, such as PDF Generator.

3.3.2 Submit Files

1. Auto Submit
As to the source files, those entering into the hot folder will automatically be submitted
to the next connected node behind the hot folder. Those chosen from the Select Files
dialog box from the PDF Generator node, when the Auto Submit option is checked, can
also be submitted automatically to the PDF Generator for process.
In your workflow, if you don’t Hold any node, each node can automatically submit the
files after its process, to the next connected node.

2. Manual Submit
When the Auto Submit option is NOT checked, after you have chosen the source files,
you need to manually submit them under the PDF Generator node, so that the generator
can start the process. There are three ways to submit.
1) Click the toolbar icon . All the source files under the node will be submitted.
2) Choose the files in the source file queue, right-click and choose Submit. Only those
files you choose will be submitted.
3) Choose the files you want to submit, and then drag to the PDF Generator node.
Manual submit is also applied to cases when some node is held, or when your job
contains independent nodes, or when files need to be processed cross nodes, or
re-processed. In such cases, you can also use the toolbar icon or right-click menu item
Submit, to submit all or part of the input files under any node to itself for process. You
can also choose the input files or output files under any node, and then drag them to
current node or any other node in the workflow for process.

3.3.3 Process Files

The node starts the process once the files are submitted. The process information
window now appears.

70
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-65

1) You can learn the progress from the color changes on the node icons, or from the
messages displayed in the below.
2) You can use the Stop button to interrupt the ongoing process at any time. You can also
right-click the node and choose the item Stop Running or Stop All Process to interrupt.
The former item stops the files submitted last time, while the latter stops all the ongoing
files submitted many times.
3) You may see that the node icon turns to red, or that the messages turn to pink or red,
or that a warning window pops up, or even that the process is terminated, if some
exception or error occurs during the process.
4) In general, the error of a single file has no influence on the rest of other files
simultaneously-submitted, but the error file will NOT be submitted automatically to the
next node in your workflow.
5) You can send an email to Founder technician for support in case that an exception or
error occurs during the process. Click Send Error Report to email.

3.3.4 Run List

The run list is designed for you to monitor the processes of the nodes in current job. On
top of the workflow area, click the toolbar icon Run List to open the Run List window.

71
 User Guide

Figure 2-66

Here you can view each process’s status. There are 6 types of statuses: waiting, running,
finished, cancelled, error, and abnormal. In running or waiting status, you can click Stop
to terminate the node’s process.
Choose any row of information and then double-click or click Open to view the detailed
process information. The Refresh button enables you to manually update the list. The
Open, Refresh and Close operations can also be performed with right-click menu items.

3.3.5 Status Monitor

The status monitor enables you to fully monitor the processes of all the jobs in your
ElecRoc system. You can not only view the process information, such as the overall job
progress, the node status, the resource involved in the process, but also can control
these processes, such as to adjust the priority of a waiting process, to cancel a waiting or
running process.

1. Monitor Process Information

Figure 2-67

72
 Using ElecRoc Client

1) Process list
The list displays processes performed by single node at one time, unrelated with the file
quantity. For example, if you submit a batch of files to a workflow like PDF Generator 
PDF Rasterizer, although the two nodes are connected and you submit once, here ElecRoc
would display it as two processes in the list: one is PDF Generator  PDF Rasterizer, and
the other is a single PDF Rasterizer.
The displayed process-related information includes job ID, job name, submitted time,
finished time, priority, status and the user submitting the files. You can click the head of
any column to sort the whole table in ascending or descending order. The Refresh button
is used to manually update the progress and status of all the processes.
The displayed processes in the process list are results that meet certain search conditions.
You can define the search conditions on top of the list. The processes can be searched as
per name, processor, status, user and type. Among them, the status is divided into all,
waiting, running, finished, cancelled, error, and abnormal, and the type is classified into
current and history.
2) View process information
Double-click any row in the process list to open its process information window, in which
you can view the detailed process information.
3) Progress and resource
Choose any record in the process list, and then you will see the progress and status of all
the nodes involved in the process, in the Processing Status area at the bottom of the
monitor window. The Resource area will then list all the files involved in the process.

2. Control the Processes

1) Change priority
Priority controls the order of the waiting processes. As to processes in waiting status, the
one with a higher priority will be processed prior to the one with a lower priority. To
change a waiting process’ priority, choose it in the process list and click Priority, then
input a new value in the pop-up dialog box, and then click OK. The value range is 1-100.
Higher value represents higher priority. For processes with same priority, the order is
sorted by the submitted time.
2) Stop a process
Choose one or more running processes in the process list and click Stop.
3) Backup, restore and repair
The Backup button enables you to back up the process information. The Restore button
enables you to restore the backup information into the monitor. And the Repair button is
used for you to clean up the processes that are not normally ended.

3.4 Manage Job Resource

The lower-right area of the job window is designed for you to view and manage the job
files, and to perform various processes on these files. This area is composed of a toolbar
and files of various types. Its appearance is specific to the toolbar icon and the job node
you currently select.

73
 User Guide

Figure 2-68

Processes on the files, both the input and output files, are mainly implemented with the
toolbar icons and the right-click menu items.

3.4.1 Files
When the Files icon in the toolbar is selected, you can view all the source files in the
current job, i.e. the input files under the PDF Generator and Hot Folder nodes.

Figure 2-69

3.4.2 Pages
When the Pages icon in the toolbar is selected, you can see all the PDF page files in
the current job, i.e. the output files under such nodes as PDF Generator, Preflight, and
Trap.

Figure 2-70

74
 Using ElecRoc Client

3.4.3 Files and Pages

When the Files and Pages icon in the toolbar is selected, you can see all the source
files and PDF page files in the current job.

Figure 2-71

3.4.4 Signatures
When selected, the Signatures icon in the toolbar enables you to view all the
signature files in the current job, i.e. the output files from the Imposer, Composer and
Ganging nodes.

Figure 2-72

3.4.5 Job Resource Clearing

All the input and output files in your job can be cleared off if you click the toolbar icon
Clear Resources . Be careful to perform this operation. Before the clearing, you need
to stop all the ongoing processes (if any), and ElecRoc will ask you to confirm.

3.4.6 View Control

A status indicator and a thumbnail image appear in front of each file if you have the
Thumbnail icon in the toolbar selected. The sign indicates the file has been
submitted to the node for process, while indicates it has NOT been submitted.
The file name can be simplified in the display if the Toggle File Name icon is selected.
If needed, you can click the Refresh icon to manually update the job resources.

75
 User Guide

3.5 File Process

3.5.1 Source File Process
Under the PDF Generator node, or when the Files icon in the toolbar is selected, you
can use the right-click menu items to perform a series of processes to the source files.

Item Function
File Information Learn information on the file location.
Submit the selected files to current node
Submit
for process.
Copy Copy the selected files.
Paste the copied files under the current
Paste
node.
Delete Delete the selected files.
Empty Delete all the source files under the node.
Sort Auto-arrange the files in the list.
By Name Sort files by file name.
By Type Sort files by file type.
Sort files by date modified, starting from
By Time Up
the earliest.
Sort files by date modified, starting from
By Time Down
the latest.
Sort files by the reverse order of input
Reverse
order.
Refresh the file status, such as whether it
Refresh
has been submitted.
Select more than one file at the same time
Select File
from the list.
Select more than one file in the odd
Select File By Odd
positions at the same time from the list.
Select more than one file in the even
Select File By Even
positions at the same time from the list.
Table -8

1. Learn File Information

Learn the current file’s name and location.

Figure 2-73

76
 Using ElecRoc Client

2. Submit Files
Submit the selected files to the current node for process. You can select more than one
file each time.

3. Adjust File Process Sequence

If file priorities are equal, ElecRoc processes your submitted files in the sequence as they
are in the file list. To change the file sequence in the file list under PDF Generator node,
choose one or more files and then click the icon or .

4. Refresh, Copy, Paste, Delete, Empty

Refresh: Manually refresh the source file status, i.e. submitted or not.
Copy, Paste: You can carry out the copy & paste operation across nodes, or even across
jobs. First, under the node PDF Generator A, choose one or more source files and use the
right-click menu item Copy. Then, switch to the node PDF Generator B, right-click in the
source file area and choose Paste. In this way, you copy source files from node A to node
B. The two nodes may belong to two different jobs.
Delete: Delete the selected files.
Empty: Delete all the source files.

5. Sort Files
You can direct ElecRoc to auto-arrange the file positions in the list by file name, or by file
type, or by date modified. With this operation, you can view the files more clearly. But
note that it changes the file process sequence. If file priorities are equal, ElecRoc
processes your submitted files in the sequence as they are in the file list. Therefore, this
operation may change the process sequence of the source files.

6. Select Files
Select more than one source file in the file list at the same time. Select File By Odd
enables you to select all the files that are in the odd positions, while Select File By Even
enables you to select all the files that are in the even positions.

3.5.2 PDF Process

Processes to single-page or multi-page PDF files are also performed with right-click menu
items. The PDF files here may be the PDF pages generated by PDF Generator, also may
be the files in PDF format that result from a further process on such PDF pages. Therefore,
the processes introduced in the below and are enabled
with right-click menu items, are available to files such as:
the output files under PDF Generator; the PDF pages
displayed when the Pages toolbar icon is selected;
the input and output files under other PDF nodes like
Preflight, Trap, PDF CMS, and even the input files under
PDF Rasterizer.
The following command table and figure at the left are
only an example of the right-click menu on PDF
Generator’s output PDF page file. For more PDF
operation commands and their functions, please see the
introductions in the sections behind the table.

77
 User Guide

Item Function
Page Info Learn page size, file size and spot colors.
Preview Preview PDF pages.
Add a page as a mark that can be used in Imposer and
Add as Mark
Composer.
Separation Adjust Adjust the logic page numbers of a separation file.
Download Download the PDF files to local disk.
Copy Copy the selected files.
PDF Compare Compare two PDF files to find out their difference.
Set as page before
Set the file as the old file in the comparison.
modification
Set as page after
Set the file as the new file in the comparison.
modification
Page Compare
Compare two files for page substitution.
/Substitution
Mark the file as the finished file in the comparison and
Mark as finished
substitution.
Mark the file as the modified file in the comparison and
Mark as modified
substitution.
Change color Change the color mode to gray or color.
Delete Delete the selected files.
Empty Delete all the files in the current queue.
Auto-arrange the files in the list by file name, or by date
Sort
modified, or by page type.
By Name Sort files by file name.
By Time Up Sort files by date modified, starting from the earliest.
By Time Down Sort files by date modified, starting from the latest.
Reverse Sort files in reverse order.
By Page Type Sort files by page type.
Select File Select more than one file at the same time.
Select File By Odd Select the files in odd position at the same time.
Select File By Even Select the files in even position at the same time.
Refresh Refresh manually the file status.
Update Preview Update the thumbnail image of the selected file.
Table -9

1. Preview Pages
1) Normal Preview
You can open an independent window to preview the PDF pages generated by PDF
Generator, or PDF pages output by other PDF processors.

78
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-74

Enable preview: The PDF Generator parameter Parameters > Enable Preview
controls if ElecRoc generates a thumbnail image for preview purpose during the PDF
Generator process. If unchecked, the preview becomes unavailable. Besides, in case that
the file name contains invalid characters, the preview may become unavailable either.
Preview image resolution: The resolution is controlled by the PDF Generator
parameter Parameters > Thumbnail Parameters > Resolution.
Refresh preview image: Click the icon in the preview window to manually refresh in
case that the page is changed during the preview.
Zoom display: Fixed zoom options include Suitable, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%, 200%,
300%, 500%, and 800%. The default is Suitable. You can also zoom in and out by
dragging with the right mouse button.
Switch previews: The page list at the left shows all the pages under current node,
providing you with ease to switch among the previews of these pages.
2) Fast Preview
Under the PDF Generator node or any other PDF node in the job window, you can fast
preview the PDF pages by holding down the left mouse button on the thumbnail image
located at the lower-right corner of the window. A zoomed-in thumbnail image will then
immediately spread out on the window. Like the normal preview mode, you need also to
check the PDF Generator parameter Parameters > Enable Preview before the PDF
Generator process, and can also control the thumbnail image resolution through the PDF
Generator parameter Parameters > Thumbnail Parameters > Resolution.
In addition, you can customize the zoom percentage of the pop-up thumbnail image. To
do this, right-click on the thumbnail image located at the lower-right corner of the

79
 User Guide

window, and then choose a proper zoom option from the pop-up list. Options include
25%, 50%, 100%, 150%, 200%, and 300%.

Figure 2-75

3) 3D Preview
This capability requires you to install .NET Framework 3.5 or later version in your client.
Under the Imposer node, choose one or more PDF pages (may include blank page) from
the input file queue, click the toolbar icon , or right-click and then choose 3D Preview.
The follow-up preview window differs for Clients running on MAC and PC platforms.
 On PC Client
As shown in the below, the 3D Preview window displays the PDF pages in the sequence as
they are in the input file queue, two pages each time. To simply turn pages backward,
click on the right page; to turn pages forward, click on the left page. Or place the cursor
on the left corners of the left page or the right corners of the right page to roll up a page
corner, then hold down the left mouse button and drag in any direction (left, right,
upward, or downward), and then release, and in this way you can gain an experience like
you are turning pages with fingers.

80
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-76
The icons at the bottom are designed to help you turn the pages.

Icon Function
Show the page size, define the bleed size to show the actual
Size result.

Auto Turn Turn all the pages automatically for you to preview.

Cover Turn to the first page.

Back Cover Turn to the last page.

Previous Turn a page forward.

Next Turn a page backward.

Go to Turn to a specified page.

Full Screen Display the preview window in full screen mode.
Table -10

Icons are also seen at the top of the 3D Preview window, including:
Exit: To close the 3D preview window.
Zoom: You can choose a commonly-used zoom option from the dropdown list, or you can
also hold down and drag the right mouse button to zoom in and out the pages.
3D Preview: To open an independent window, as shown in the below (the left figure), in
which you can drag the page (always the first and last pages separately on the front and
back sides) in any direction, at any angle, to produce the 3D preview effect. The page can
be zoomed in and out by holding down and dragging the right mouse button.

81
 User Guide

Figure 2-77

Setting: To open a pop-up dialog box to make the setting as follows (the right figure).
Time Interval refers to the time interval between two page turns in auto turning.
Background of the 3D Preview window can be a Pure color (the Color 1), a Gradient
(Color 1 and Color 2), or a Photo (three optional background patterns are available, or
you can click More to specify other photo). The Turn setting provides two turning modes,
in Turn page mode, you turn the pages fore and back; in Turn over mode, you turn
pages up and down.
Navigation: If checked, a navigator appears at the upper-left corner of the window,
showing a thumbnail image of the pages being previewed. Click on this thumbnail, and
you can quickly navigate on the zoomed-in pages.
 On Mac Client
The preview window is shown as follows.

82
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-78
You can also manually click to turn the pages forward and backward, or hold down and
drag the pages to roll up and turn. The toolbar icons at the upper-left corner
help you to turn pages forward and backward as well. And with the icon AutoFlip , the
pages can be automatically turned.
4) Remote 3D Preview
This capability is based on the 3D preview, enabling 3D preview outside ElecRoc system.
With it, you can save your PDF pages as a single or a series of .zip files, and then email
them to a remote user. After receiving these .zip files, the remote user can use a separate
tool to unzip them, and then the user can do the 3D preview as that on ElecRoc Client.
Under the Imposer node, choose one or more PDF pages (may include blank page) from
the input file queue, right-click and then choose Remote 3D Preview. Specify the file
name and path for the .zip file, and then click Save.

Figure 2-79

83
 User Guide

Now you can email the .zip files to a remote user.

The remote user can then unzip and do the 3D preview. For details on the unzip tool, refer
to Appendix C.6.

2. Page Information
PDF Generator can read such page information as page size, separation color, and spot
color, during its process. You can learn such information in the PDF page information
window, which can be opened with the right-click menu item Page Info. And in this
window, you can also import the spot colors found in the page into a spot color table.

Figure 2-80

1) PDF Page Information

Source File: The full path of the source file.
Page ID: The page number of the page in the source file.
File Size: The size of the PDF file.
Page Size: The size of the PDF page.
Date Modified: The latest time the PDF page was processed.
2) Spot Color Information
ElecRoc displays the spot colors contained in the page. You can see the spot color name
and its cmyk values. In general, if the source file is a composite file, you can get the full

84
 Using ElecRoc Client

information, but if it is a separation one, you may only get the spot color name, its color
value is assigned by default as K=100.
3) Spot Color Process
You can not only view the spot colors in the page, but also can import them into any trap
ink profile or spot color table, for use in the later-on spot color processes.
Before you perform such operation, you can change the spot color value. Double-click
any of the CMYK value to activate an edit box for this change. If you check Update all
Pages, the change on the color value will apply to all the rest pages generated from the
same source file.
1) Import to spot color table: Choose a table in the Custom spot color table
dropdown box (displaying the colors with same name in the below, if any), and then
choose the spot colors in the page at the left, click the arrow . Color substitution occurs
if such color with same name exists in the table (a message pops up for you to confirm
prior to the substitution). If you choose spot colors in the table and then click the arrow ,
you can substitute for the page spot colors conversely.
2) Import as system spot color: To import the spot colors into the system spot color
table, choose all or part of the spot colors (choose color name) in the page, right-click
and choose Import to system spot.
3) Import to trap ink profile: Choose the spot colors in the page, click the first icon
in the below, or right-click and choose Import to trap ink. And then, choose a trap ink
profile in the pop-up dialog box, click Add.
4) Copy spot color name: Choose one spot color in the page, click the third icon in
the below, or right-click and choose Copy Spot Name. In this way, you can copy the
name of the spot color into clipboard, for you to paste anywhere later-on as needed, e.g.,
as the name of new spot color in spot color table, or in Windows’ notepad.

3. Define Page Type

Under the PDF Generator node, after files are processed in multiple-page mode, choose
a page of any file in the output file queue, then right-click and choose Custom page
type.
Now you can define a book page type for the currently selected page. There are four such
types here, Cover, Preface, Text and Illustration. The File option refers to the pages apart
from these four types. All the PDF pages in ElecRoc are of this type by default. After you
define the page type, please further define the page number of the page under the
specified type, with the Start page No. parameter.

Figure 2-81

When you have defined proper page types, you can then submit them to Page Compare
/Substitution for the intelligent compare.

85
 User Guide

In addition, you can sort such pages by page type. As you can see the following figure,
the left list shows pages that you have NOT defined page type, sorted by name; the
middle shows pages that you have defined page type, sorted by name; the right shows
pages that you have defined page type, but sorted by page type, i.e. arranged according
to a sequence of Cover, Preface, Text and Illustration.

Figure 2-82

4. PDF Compare
ElecRoc enables you to compare two PDF files, each of which may consist of more than
one page, so as to find out their difference. It’s useful especially when you want to
compare a revised PDF to an earlier one, in order to know the change made in the file
modification.
To use this feature, you need to install Adobe Acrobat 9.0 or higher version and
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 or later version in your computer.
1) Objects and Range for Comparison
The objects applicable for the comparison must be PDF files that have been processed at
least by PDF Generator, regardless of single-page or multiple-page mode, and their full
names can NOT be the same.
You must specify the two PDF files before the comparison. Separately choose two files,
then right-click and choose PDF Compare > Set as page before modification or Set
as page after modification. The comparison is based on the old file (i.e. before
modification), with an aim to check the modification on the new file (i.e. after
modification).
Click the toolbar icon PDF Compare above the file queues to open the setup window.

86
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-83
The window shows the old and new files for you to confirm. The page range parameters
are designed for you to specify the pages to compare. E.g. you can compare the first
page from the old file with the second page from the new file. The page range can be
freely specified, but note that each range must be continuous, and the value shall be no
more than the actual total page number.
2) Comparing Option
ElecRoc classifies the PDF files into three categories: 1) Reports, spreadsheets, magazine
layouts, 2) Presentation decks, drawings or illustrations, 3) Scanned Documents. Please
choose a category that best describes your files.
3) Comparing Report
After comparing the two PDF files, ElecRoc shows the result in the form of a compare
report. In the above window, you can choose if you want to immediately view the report,
or to save it in a specified path, such as a folder in your local disk.
The compare report is shown as follows:

87
 User Guide

Figure 2-84

The first page is the summary of the compare result. The rest are pages from the new file,
with annotations indicating the changes. ElecRoc also adds marks to show the change,
the deleted content, the pages that were altered, and the pages that were removed.
On the Compare panel at the left, you can do any of the following:
To hide the annotations, click Hide Results. To define the display setting, click Show
Options. You can specify the type of changes to display, the color scheme, and opacity
of the annotations. To return to the page thumbnails, click Hide Options.
The Options menu provides more commands, including Show/Hide Results and
Show/Hide Options. To show each of the documents in its own window, choose Show
Documents Tiled or Show Documents Side By Side. To synchronize the relevant
pages while showing the documents in their own windows, choose Synchronize Pages.
Click a page thumbnail to go to that page. To change the size of the page thumbnails,
choose Thumbnail Size > [option] from the Options menu . Drag the splitter bar
at the bottom of the Compare panel up to show thumbnails of the old document. Click a
thumbnail from the old document to open it in a new window.

5. Page Compare/Substitution
This manager enables you to substitute one page for another, and before the substitution,
it can compare the pages for the difference, so as to help you avoid any substitution error.
1) Choose Pages
Before the comparison and substitution, you need to specify the finished pages, or old
pages, i.e. those that are finished already, and the modified pages, or new pages, i.e.

88
 Using ElecRoc Client

those that are modified.

To specify the finished pages, switch to the output file queue under PDF Generator node,
or the PDF file queue under any other node, choose one or more pages or files, regardless
of single-page or multiple-page, then right-click and choose Page Compare
/Substitution > Mark as finished. To specify the modified pages, choose Mark as
modified.
You can add in batches more PDF pages from other nodes as the finished or modified
pages. The quantity of the finished and modified pages is not limited. Note that, all such
specifying will be cleaned after you reboot the Client.
2) Compare Pages
Click the toolbar icon Page Compare/Substitution located above the file queue to
open the compare & substitution window.

Figure 2-85

The compare operation is performed under the Compare tab.

 Sequence Compare
Compare page by page according to the page sequence in the Finished Pages/
Modified Pages lists.
In this mode, the page sequence in the two lists plays a critical role. You must ensure that
the finished and modified pages are corresponding to each other in the two lists. The
page sequence can be adjusted with the icons and , or the right-click menu items Sort
and Move To. And you can choose more than one continuous or discontinuous pages at
the same time to adjust. But note that, in case that the pages are from multiple-page file,
their sequence in the list can NOT be adjusted. The icons and menu items mentioned

89
 User Guide

above would be grayed.

When the leftmost icon in the toolbar is displayed as , the finished and modified pages
become related according to the sequence. In this case, if you choose or move a page in
one list, you will see that the page with the same sequence number in the other list will
be chosen or moved at the same time. E.g. if you move down the second finished page by
1 row, meanwhile the second modified page will be moved down by 1 row as well, vice
versa. Click to turn it to , then you can separately choose and move the pages in the
two lists, to adjust their sequence in the list.
You can use proper right-click menu items as you determine the pages and their
sequence. You can use Page Info to view the page size, file size, spot colors and
separation colors; or use Download to open the page with Acrobat, or use Delete or
Delete All to remove unneeded pages from the lists.
Click the Sequence Compare toolbar icon to compare. The result is shown as
follows:

Figure 2-86

Two signs appear in front of the pages. The sign indicates no difference, while
indicates difference. Blank indicates that the page has NOT been compared. Click the
toolbar icon and choose in the follow-up dropdown list the items Difference
Resource, Same Resource, Did not deal with, to display only one type of the pages
at one time.
Choose a page with difference, then click the toolbar icon Flat Differences and
choose a color in the pop-up dropdown list. Rectangles in your chosen color then appear
on the thumbnails at the right, showing the contents with difference. With the options
from the toolbar icon , you can redefine the line width of these rectangles. The Scale

90
 Using ElecRoc Client

tool enables you to zoom in or out the thumbnails.

 Intelligent Compare
This feature (when the toolbar icon is selected) is applied only to the PDF pages which
are from the output file queue of the PDF Generator node, and for which you have defined
page types, such as cover, preface, text, and illustration.
In this compare mode, ElecRoc compares page by page according to the page type,
regardless of the page sequence in the two lists, and it compares only the pages that
have been defined page types. E.g. the first Text page from the finished page list will
therefore be compared with the first Text page from the modified page list, and the
second Cover page from the finished page list will therefore be compared with the second
Cover page from the modified page list.
 Perspective Differences
This operation can be performed before or after the comparing. Choose a finished and
modified page, and then click the toolbar icon .

Figure 2-87

If the Highlight status (showing the icon ) is enabled, ElecRoc applies the color
specified with Different Color (click ) to highlight the contents with difference. If you
move the Transparency button to the left, you can see more content from the finished
page; if you move it to the right, and you can see more content from the modified page.
During the process of moving this button, you can visually check their difference.
 Compare Accuracy
Click the Setting icon in the toolbar to define the compare accuracy.

91
 User Guide

Area: ElecRoc divides the page into many equal areas for the comparing. The area
quantity can be defined with five levels: 10, 20, 30, 50, and 100. The smaller the value,
the less the quantity would be. If you want to gain the highest accuracy, choose 100.
Dissimilarity Number: In each of the areas divided as above, if the quantity of the
pixels that are different is bigger than the number specified here, ElecRoc will consider
such area as an area with difference. The range is 1-100. The less the value, the higher
the accuracy is.
3) Page Substitution
The substitution is performed under the Substitution tab.

Figure 2-88

Choose a finished page and a modified page, and then click the Substitution icon in
the toolbar to build a replace relation. Such relations are all displayed at the bottom of
the window. If you want to cancel any relation, choose it and then click .
Click when you have determined all the relations.
Return to the file queue under the job node. The pages substituted are shown in pink. You
can also check such substitutions in the Page Substitution Record window (click the
toolbar icon on top of the job workflow area.

6. Download PDF
By choosing the right-click menu item Download, you open a dialog that contains three
options: Open, Save and Cancel.
Open: Use Acrobat to open the PDF page immediately.
Save: Save the PDF page to your specified location, such as local disk.

92
 Using ElecRoc Client

7. Separation Adjust
The logical page numbers for some separation files may be special, and thus can NOT be
normally identified by PDF Generator. ElecRoc provides this feature for you to manually
solve the problem.

Figure 2-89
Separation List: Located at the left of the window, and composed of ID and separation
names, this list displays all the color separations from a same source file in current job.
You can double-click the separation name to edit it.
Sibling Separation Space: A page may consist of 1 to N separations. The sibling
separation space refers to the space difference between two sibling separations, i.e. from
separation 1 to separation 2, from separation 2 to separation 3, from separation N to
separation N+1… For example, if the separations are “cyan, cyan, magenta, magenta…”
here you can input “2”.
Separation per Page: The number of separations per page.
When you configure Sibling Separation Space and Separation per Page, make sure
that 1) each separation name is unique in each page; 2) separation numbers per page
are equal for all pages; 3) the separation sequence is the same for all pages.
Prefix of Adjusted File: The file name prefix for the new page file generated after the
adjustment. We recommend you to specify a prefix different from that of the current file.
Blank Separation Setting: To insert a blank separation before a separation in the
separation list, choose the separation and then click . You can also input the insert
position in the edit box behind. To delete one separation from the list, choose this
separation and then click .

93
 User Guide

Example A: see the left figure below, if you set Separation per Page is 5, Sibling
Separation Space to 1, you will get two new pages after the adjustment, with each in
such separation sequence as Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, New Color Swatch.
Example B: see the left figure below, if you set Separation per Page is 5, Sibling
Separation Space to 2, you will get two new pages as well, with each in such separation
sequence as Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, New Color Swatch.

Figure 2-90

Example C: see the left figure below, if you set Separation per Page is 4, Sibling
Separation Space to 1, you will get two new pages, but with different separation
sequences. The separation sequence for the first page is as Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black.
That for the second is as Cyan, Yellow, Black. In this case, you may need to insert a blank
separation between the fifth and sixth separations, i.e. the Magenta separation.

Figure 2-91

If the adjustment fails, ElecRoc pops up error message. If succeeds, it generates new
page files in the PDF page file queue.

8. Change Color
This feature is generally used in digital printing. With this feature, you can easily change
the color mode of the PDF pages before the printing. When the toolbar icon is
selected, each PDF page in the input and output file queues will appear with an icon
indicating its color mode: icon refers to color while icon refers to gray.
Choose one or more pages, right-click and then choose Change color. If the color mode

94
 Using ElecRoc Client

was color, by choosing this menu item, you will change it to gray; if it was gray, you will
change it to color.

9. Add as Mark
You can add the currently selected PDF page into ElecRoc system, as a custom mark for
Imposer and Composer to use. This feature is available only to single-page PDF pages.

Figure 2-92

10. Readiness for Imposing & Ganging

You can perform the following operations or configurations to the PDF pages from the
input file queue under the Imposer, Composer and Ganging nodes.
Start: This box is used for you to specify the starting sequence number for the pages in
the left file queue. Input proper number in the box, as needed, and then press Enter key.
Sequence adjustment: When your imposer or ganging template defines page numbers,
the page file sequence in the input file queue will directly determine the page sequence
on the signature. In addition to the right-click menu item Sort, you can also use the icons
and above the input file list, and the right-click menu items Move To, Top, and
Bottom to adjust the page file sequence.
Define as part: Choose one or more pages, right-click and choose Part > Custom part,
and then you will open a dialog box, in which you can specify a part, for use in imposing.
If you need to cancel the part specification, you can choose the page, right-click and then
choose Part > Clean part.

Figure 2-93

Insert blank page: Before you start the Imposer process, you can insert blank pages as
needed in the input file queue to substitute for missing pages, so as to prevent the
missing pages from affecting the positions of the rest pages on the signature. To do this,
click the icon above the input file list, and then specify the position and quantity of the
blank pages in the follow-up dialog box.

95
 User Guide

Figure 2-94

11. Submit, Copy, Paste, Delete, Empty, Sort, Refresh, Select File
Submit: submit the selected PDF pages to the current node for process.
Copy, Paste: Copy the PDF pages or PDF files (multi-page mode) currently selected. The
paste operation can be performed across nodes and jobs. E.g. you can copy the PDF
pages under the PDF Generator node in job A, and then paste them under the Preflight
node in job B. Please note that, if you delete the original file being copied, you will
meanwhile delete the copy file, i.e. in the previous example, if you delete the copied PDF
pages under the node PDF Generator in job A, you will meanwhile delete the copy PDF
pages under the Preflight node in job B.
Note: When you have copied one or more PDF pages, if you switch to the output file
queue under the PDF Generator node, right-click and then you will see a menu item
Paste File. It also enables you to paste the copied file into the queue where you
right-clicked, but the difference from the Paste menu item lies on that, the copy would
not be deleted if you delete the copied page file.
Delete: Delete the selected PDF pages. Be careful to perform this operation, for it may
delete the input files under the node that connected behind.
Empty: Delete all the PDF pages under current node.
Sort: Sort the files by name, or by time (up or down).
Refresh: Manually refresh the PDF pages.
Select File: This right-click menu item enables you to select more than one file at the
same time. Using the sub item Select File By Odd, you can select all the page files in the
odd position, while using the sub item Select File By Even, you can select all the page
files in the even position.

3.5.3 Signature Process

Here we take the signature (or surface) processes under the Imposer node as example.
The processes can also be implemented with right-click menu items.
The right-click menu on any signature file contains items such as Surface Info,
Preview, Copy, Delete, Empty, Refresh, Ganging, and Preview Front and Back.

96
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-95

Compared with the source file and PDF page file processes, signature processes differ in
the following features.

1. Surface Info
Show the information on the signature/surface: name, front/back, dimension, date
modified, and input pages.

Figure 2-96

97
 User Guide

2. Signature preview
Normal preview and fast preview: They are the same as the PDF page previews. In
normal preview mode, you can use the right-click menu item Preview to open an
independent signature preview window. In the fast preview mode, you can fast preview
the signature in the job window if you hold down the left mouse button on the thumbnail.
Front & Back Preview: When you choose two signatures at the same time, you can use
the right-click menu item Preview Front and Back to check the composite effect of the
front and back surfaces, and check if the register marks are in alignment, and etc. Click
the transparency icon at the top of the preview window, you will activate a slider in
the below, with which you can adjust the composite proportion.

Figure 2-97

3. Gang after imposing

With the right-click menu item Ganging > [Composer], you can submit the signature
generated after the Imposer process to ElecRoc ganging program, in which you can gang
the pages being imposed on the signature.

3.5.4 Tiff Process

Tiff files exist in the output file queue of the PDF Rasterizer node, or in the input file queue
of the 1 Bit TIFF Export or Post-RIP Proof node. Similarly, you can use the right-click
menu items to perform related operations, such as previewing, deleting, emptying,
sorting, and refreshing.

98
 Using ElecRoc Client

1. Tiff information

Figure 2-98

You can learn detailed information about each separation, including separation name,
path, file size, dimension, date modified, and the screen setting such as resolution, shape,
angle, frequency, levels, and curves.

2. Tiff preview
1) Normal Preview and Fast Preview
In normal preview mode, you can use the right-click menu item Preview to open an
independent preview window. A difference from signature or page preview lies in that
you can preview the whole file, or preview only one of the separations. And in the fast
preview mode, you can fast preview the tiff in the job window if you hold down the left
mouse button on the thumbnail.

99
 User Guide

Figure 2-99

2) Tiff Preview
Choose the right-click menu item Tiff bitmap preview to open the dot preview window.

Figure 2-100

100
10
 Using ElecRoc Client

Separation preview: From the color list at the upper-left corner, you can choose any
one, or some, or all of the separations to preview.
Thumbnail navigation: A green little box appears if you click on the thumb image
located at the lower-left corner of the window. The content centered on this box will then
be scaled up at the right area of the window. Therefore, by clicking, or by moving the
little box, you can easily navigate and switch the content displayed at the right.
Zoom Display: You can click the first icon in the toolbar to choose a commonly-used
zoom option, such as Whole Image, 25%, 100%, 200%, and etc. You can also zoom in or
out the display by holding down the right mouse button on the thumb image and
dragging.
Resolution: Click Default Resolution in the toolbar, and then choose a resolution from
the dropdown list. In this way, you can preview the bitmap image in a different
resolution.
Rotate: This icon enables you to rotate the thumbnail image.
Negative: This icon produces the negative effect.
Mirror: This icon produces the mirror effect.
Spot: This icon enables you to view and edit the spot colors.
Dot Image/Preview Image: Click Dot Image in the toolbar to open the dot image.
Click Preview Image to return.

Figure 2-101

In the dot image mode, you can also use the toolbar icons to perform the operations
mentioned above. Besides, you can also add guidelines for you to better navigate on the
dot image.

101
 User Guide

Guideline: ElecRoc provides rulers at the left and top of the dot image. To add a
guideline, hold down the left mouse button on the ruler, drag to proper place on the dot
image and then release. You can customize the line color with the toolbar icon Color of
Guideline, and use Clear Guidelines to delete all added guidelines.

3. Ink Histogram
ElecRoc enables you to generate an ink histogram for a specific press. If there is no
available press prior to the generation, it will hint you to add. Determine the name, the
ink funnel quantity, maximum ink key, and media size, and then click OK.

Figure 2-102

Choose a press printer and then you can generate the ink histogram, as shown in the
below.

102
10
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-103
1) The Dot Percentage Histogram varies according to the printer’s ink count and Max Ink
Key. And it can be generated for the whole file or for a single separation as well. Please
choose the separation from the separation list located at the upper-left corner and the
figure above shows an example for that of the Cyan separation.
2) To change the display proportion, you can hold the right mouse button and drag on the
dot percentage histogram.
3) With the options in the Job rotate dropdown list at the top of the window, you can
rotate the bitmap, and see the change on the dot percentage histogram as the bitmap
rotates.
4) The dropdown list at the upper-right corner of the window enables you to switch the
view among dot percentage histogram, ink key map, and thumb histogram. The following
figure is an example of the ink key map.

103
 User Guide

Figure 2-104
5) When you have generated the dot percentage histogram, or the ink key map, or the
thumb histogram, you can click the Print button at the upper-right corner of the window,
to print out the displayed diagram and data. Before the print, please specify in details the
diagram type (dot percentage histogram, or ink key map, or thumb histogram), and the
separations (it’s best to choose the file name, if you choose only a separation, the pop-up
dialog box will then only display that separation for you to choose). After you click the
Print button, a dialog box appears, see the left figure below, asking you to choose the
content to be printed.
Click Confirm to enter in the print setup window, see the right figure below. Here you can
configure some of the commonly-used printing parameters, such as printer, copies,
direction, paper size, color mode, and etc. Click Print after you have configured these
parameters.

Figure 2-105

104
10
 Using ElecRoc Client

6) Moreover, you can click the button Press Management to add or delete a printer, or
modify a printer’s name, printable size, ink fountain quantity, and max ink key.
Double-click each of the above mentioned items to turn it editable, and then re-enter a
proper value.

Figure 2-106

105
 User Guide

Chapter 4 Processor Parameter Setup

This chapter will introduce you to the parameter setup of the processors in ElecRoc. The
introductions on Preflight, Trap, Imposer, Imposer, and Composer are NOT provided in
this chapter, considering their rich features and paper length. Refer to chapters 5-8 for
their parameter setup.

4.1 How to Configure

In ElecRoc workflow management system, a job workflow is completed by one processor
singly or more than one processor together. Each processor processes files in a manner
as a set of parameters define. Different parameter setups produce different results. How
to efficiently and correctly define processor parameters is a key to use ElecRoc system.
1. Global and local parameters
In ElecRoc system, processor parameter setup can be defined at two places.
The one is in the module Administrator > Processor Management, as mentioned in
Chapter 2. Here you can define globally applicable processor parameter setup, i.e. the
setting is applied in the entire ElecRoc system, becoming the default parameter setting
for processors in each of your newly-created jobs.
The other is in the job window, mentioned in Chapter 3. You can define locally applicable
processor parameter setup, i.e. the setting is only applied in the current job when the
node is NOT shared, having no influence on the setting of the processors of same type in
current or any other job.
Irrespective of global or local, their functions are the same, and so are ways of
configuring them. In this chapter, we take the global parameter setup as example.
2. Save setup
In any processor’s parameter setup window, you can save your defined processor
parameter setting by clicking the Apply button at the bottom of the window, so as to
make it take effect and become up-to-date global or local setting.
3. Apply parameter template
For the user to apply various global or local parameter setups easily, ElecRoc introduces
parameter template. A template is a combination of related parameter setting. For any
processor, in the global parameter setup window, the user can save the current setting as
a parameter template.
In this way, according to different environments and production demands, the user can
establish multiple and different combinations of parameter setting for any processor, and
save them as different templates. In practice, by loading the saved template, the user
can quickly apply the corresponding setting, thus avoiding repetitive configurations of all
the parameters, and gaining better efficiency.
All the template operations are implemented by way of the Load Parameters button.
When this button is clicked, as in a global parameter setup window, a menu will appear,
providing three menu items for you to load, save and delete a template.
1) Save as parameter template
Choose Load Parameters > Save As to open a dialog box. Input the template name
and then click OK.

106
10
 Using ElecRoc Client

2) Load parameter template

You can load the saved templates or the original setting for use or modification. Click
Load Parameters > Load, and then choose the template to be loaded from behind.
After you load a template, you can click the Save button to save it as global or local
parameter setup; and if you make some modifications, you can click Load
Parameters > Save As and then choose the same template to save your modifications.
3) Delete parameter template
Click Load Parameters > Delete, and then choose the template to be deleted from
behind.
Note: In any processor’s local parameter setup window, the Load Parameters button
only enables the user to load a template, i.e. the global parameter setup. Available
templates include your saved templates and default one. If the template is updated after
you load, and you want the job node parameter setup to keep up with the updated
template setup, please re-load the template.
Now we introduce you in details to each processor’s parameter setup.

4.2 PDF Generator

Figure 2-107

As the required processor node in ElecRoc workflow, and usually located at the beginning,
PDF Generator converts source files of various types such as PS, EPS, PDF, TIFF, and PRN
into PDF page files, a standard file type employed inside ElecRoc. During the conversion,

107
 User Guide

PDF Generator can also perform font substitution if needed, and image compression.
Most of the processors in ElecRoc accept only the PDF page files generated by PDF
Generator.
The PDF Generator processor parameter setup window is shown as above, consisting of
four tabs: Parameters, Fonts, PS and Advanced.

4.2.1 Parameters
1. Single Page/Multiple Page
These two options refer to the file shape and external form for the PDF Generator’s
output PDF pages (when the source file is composed of many pages).
In single page mode, each page is shown as a file, as shown in the real line box below,
page files from a same source file are listed in the same rank. In simplified view (the
toolbar icon is checked), a pair of brackets is employed to indicate the page number.
In full view, a suffix _p000x is added at the end of the file name, meaning the page
number, e.g. _p0001 means page 1, _p0002 means page 2. The suffix page number
matches strictly that in the source file, even if you choose to output discontinuously only
part of the pages. E.g. if you choose only to output the page 3 and page 6, then the
suffixes become _p0003 and _p0006.
In multiple page mode, multiple pages are shown as a file, as shown in the dashed line
box below, page files from a same source file are listed in two ranks: the first rank shows
the multiple-page PDF file; by clicking the in front, you expand the second rank,
showing the pages the file contains. To submit the multiple-page PDF file to other node in
the job for process, you need to choose the whole file instead of certain page or pages.

Figure 2-108

You can apply one mode all the time, or apply the two modes by turns, on a same PDF
Generator node. E.g. you can choose the single-page mode to process one or batch of
files, and then choose the multiple-page mode to process the next or batch of files.
Note: When the process policy for the file with same name is set to override, if you apply
only one mode for two files with same name, the latter overrides the former. But if you
apply different modes for them, both of them appear in the file list. In the latter case,
their thumbnail images for preview will be the same.

2. Page Range
Specify the page range of the file to be processed. There are three options:
All: To process all pages of the file.

108
10
 Using ElecRoc Client

Range: To process a range of pages (continuously from one page to another). Here you
can manually input the page numbers.
Pages: You can customize the pages that you want to process. The valid separators
allowed in the Pages edit box include “,” and “-“, which mean “and” and “to” respectively.
For example, you may input “1,2,4-7”, which means to process page 1, page 2, and
pages 4 to 7.

3. Margin Adjustment
PDF Generator enables you to change the file size by way of increasing or reducing the
top, left, bottom and right page margins. Positive value adds margin and thus increases
the file size, while negative value reduces margin and the file size.
Bleed Symmetry: With this option, pages are processed in such a way that in duplex
printing, the front and back pages on each piece of paper will be symmetric, i.e. be
registered. When checked, the left and right margin of the odd pages will be adjusted as
per the Left and Right values specified here, while the left margin of the even pages are
adjusted as per the Right value, the right margin as per the Left value.

4. Thumbnail Parameters
Choose any PDF page, double-click or right-click and choose Preview, you can display a
thumbnail image to check the page content, or preview the process result.
Enable Preview: When checked, PDF Generator produces thumbnail image for preview.
Resolution: The resolution of the thumbnail image, 36, 72, 144 DPI.

5. Other Parameters
Stop running when occur spot color: If checked, ElecRoc issues warning and stops
processing the file in case that the file contains spot colors. This feature can effectively
notice you pay attention to the spot colors in the file, so as to avoid any spot color output
error.
Deliver pages once processed: If checked, each page will be immediately delivered to
the connected next node for process, once it has been generated by PDF Generator. If not,
pages will be delivered at the same time till all pages from all files have been generated.
Rotation: To rotate pages. You can rotate pages 90, 180, 270 degrees anti-clockwise.
The default setting is no rotation.
Rules for file with same name: You may submit a same file to a same PDF Generator
more than once. If you choose Override, the PDF page generated at the earlier
submission will be overridden by that at the later submission. If you choose Add label,
an ascending numerical suffix will be added to the file name _V01, _V02 …
Time out: If the file submitted to PDF Generator cannot be processed within the time
period specified here, ElecRoc stops the process after this time period, preventing single
file exception from affecting the after files’ processes. By default, it is set to 0, meaning
no timeout setting.

6. PDF Parameters
PDF Password: If the submitted PDF file contains password, you must provide the
password here so that ElecRoc can correctly process the file. The Adobe Acrobat allows
you to set two passwords in a PDF file: Open Password controls permission to open the
file; and Security Password controls the permission to edit.
1) The PDF file contains no password: No password is required in PDF Password edit

109
 User Guide

box.
2) It contains only Open Password: You must provide the correct Open Password.
3) It contains only Security Password: If the PDF file allows to be printed, you do NOT
need to enter the password. If the PDF allows NOT to be printed, you must provide the
correct Security Password.
4) It contains both Open Password and Security Password: If the PDF file allows to
be printed, you need to provide only one password. If the PDF allows NOT to be printed,
you must provide the correct Security Password.
Page Box: PDF Generator identifies the size determined by your specified page box as
the page size of the new generated PDF page file. Page boxes in a PDF file may include
Media Box, Crop Box, Bleed Box, Trim Box and Art Box. E.g. suppose there are two
page boxes defined in the PDF page, Crop Box size is A4 (210x297mm), Bleed Box size
is 200x287mm (bleed 5mm, so the size is smaller), if you choose Crop Box here, the
page size of the generated PDF page would be 210x297mm, but if you choose Bleed Box,
the page size changes to 200x287mm.
RGB to CMYK: By default, this option is unchecked. If your file contains transparent RGB
objects, and their output result is not satisfactory, you can try this option to get a better
transparent output result.
Only transparent blend CS: This option becomes activated when you have checked the
RGB to CMYK option. Transparent blend CS refers to two cases, one is the page’s blend
color space is RGB, the other is the page contains transparent group object whose blend
color space is RGB. If checked, the above RGB to CMYK process happens only to these
two cases, while other transparent RGB objects are not processed.

7. Double Page Spread

This parameter is applied to the case when each page from your source file consists of
two pages of content, see the upper-left figure in the below. When you enable this
feature (check the option Split), PDF Generator will split each page from the source file
into two pages, see the lower-left figure in the below. As shown in the right figure below,
the setup window for this parameter can be opened if you click the Settings button.
Based on different binding positions and types, ElecRoc provides 6 splitting methods,
with which you can get various page numberings. Please choose a proper method
according to your actual needs. If you choose one from the right two methods, the first
and last pages of the source file will not be split.
Bleed: After the splitting, a bleed as specified here will be added to the left or right side
of the new page. The default bleed is 3 mm.

110
11
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-109

4.2.2 Fonts

Figure 2-110

PDF Generator embeds the fonts used in the source file into the newly-generated PDF
page file during its process. If the fonts used are embedded in the source file, or these

111
 User Guide

fonts are already installed in your ElecRoc system, the embedding operation can run
normally, and you do NOT need to make any configuration here.
But if the fonts used are NOT embedded in or provided with the source file, or these fonts
are NOT yet installed in your ElecRoc system, i.e. these fonts are absent, in these cases,
you must pay attention to the font setting as follows.

1. Ignore Absent Font

If checked, the generated PDF page file may miss the font used in the source file. But the
missing font must be replaced by the default or any specified substitute font. If not, PDF
Generator reminds you with error report when it finds a font missing.

2. PS Parameter
Error if embedding font is failed: A PS file itself may disable you to embed certain font.
In this case, PDF Generator will still use the default font to substitute for the missing one,
but the substitution may result in messy code. If checked, ElecRoc issues warning
message and stops the process. If not, the PDF Generator process continues and issues
the warning message in pink.

3. Embed Basic Font

ElecRoc builds in 35 basic fonts.
Embed basic font: If checked, in case that the source file uses a basic font, but doesn’t
embed it, PDF Generator will embed the absent basic font into the newly-generated PDF
page file. If not, PDF Generator only embeds other absent fonts.
Error if font is not embedded: If checked, in case that the source file doesn’t embed
all its absent fonts, excluding the 35 basic fonts, ElecRoc will issue warning.
If you check both the two options above, ElecRoc issues warning even when the source
file doesn’t embed basic font it uses.

4. Font Substitution
Default Font: You can specify a font as the default substitute font from the Default Font
dropdown list. When you check Ignore Absent Font but don’t define any substitute font
in Substituted Fonts List, PDF Generator uses this default font to substitute for absent
fonts.
Max. Absent Fonts: This option limits the quantity of the fonts in the absent fonts list.
This list displays the absent fonts in the source file. The quantity of absent fonts increases
as the process files increases. When the quantity reaches the limit specified here,
ElecRoc will auto delete the older one in the list. In this way, the number of absent fonts
in the list remains within the limit number. It is a global option, thus can be configured
only in Administrative Tools.
Absent Fonts List: If PDF Generator finds an absent font in the source file during the
process, it will display this font in the absent fonts list (click Refresh to manually refresh
the list). You can also use the Add Absentee, Delete Absentee and Clear Absentee
buttons to add, delete or clear fonts manually in the list. These operations can only be
implemented in Administrative Tools.
Installed Fonts List: This list displays the fonts installed in ElecRoc. You can use them
to substitute for the absent fonts.
Substituted Fonts List: This list is designed for you to define substitute relationships.
Choose an absent font from the Absent Fonts List, and then choose an installed font

112
11
 Using ElecRoc Client

from the Installed Fonts List, to build a substitute relationship. The relationship is then
displayed in the Substituted Fonts List. Now, PDF Generator can use the corresponding
substitute font to substitute for the absent font, and embed the substitute font into the
generated PDF page file, during its process.
You can add absent fonts by using Add Absentee button, and you can delete one or all
absent fonts or substitute relationships by using the Delete Absentee, Clear Absentee,
Delete Substitute and Clear Substitute buttons. A deletion of a font from the Absent
Fonts List doesn’t delete the involved substitute relationship in the Substituted Fonts
List.

4.2.3 PS

Figure 2-111

1. PS Parameters
Preserve overprint settings: If checked, ElecRoc uses the overprint settings defined in
the source file. If not, the overprint settings will be removed.
Default is nonzero: This option is specially designed for inverted texts, such as that
generated by Founder FIT. In case that the source file contains such text, please leave
this checkbox blank.
Merge copydot DCS: If checked, PDF Generator can correctly process the overprinting

113
 User Guide

of DCS images. Check it only when DCS does not contain spot color and CMYK are
complete.
Merge same images: When checked, if the submitted PS file contains more than one
same image, PDF Generator ignores the repeated processes to the same images, so as to
reduce the size of the temporarily-generated file. PDF Generator may fail if the temp file
is too large. By default, this option is left blank, for concern that it may slow down the
process speed. We suggest you to check it only in case that your PS file contains lots of
same and large images.
Idiom Substitution: If checked, ElecRoc uses PostScript Level 3 smooth gradient
description to replace the old smooth gradient description in PS. PostScript Level 3
employs new smooth gradient dictionary and operators to describe smooth gradient,
greatly improving the speed and quality of generating smooth gradient, and supports
more types of smooth gradient, for you to easily generate colorful smooth gradient
graphics.
Support device spot color: If you want to output spot color as an independent color
separation in backend, such as PDF Rasterizer, check this option. Otherwise, e.g. use
CMYK to simulate the spot color, you may leave it unchecked. By default, it is checked.
Support spot color Level 1: If checked, ElecRoc can better support spot color gradient
defined by front-end layout application.
Preserve halftone info: To preserve the halftone settings in the source file.
Resolution: For most PostScript files, higher resolution results in larger but higher
quality PDF files, while lower resolution results in smaller but lower quality files. In
general, you can use the default setting. In case that you want to output PDF files with
specific printer, or emulate the resolution defined in the original PS file, or in case that
page elements emerge or miss in some files after being processed, you can try to change
the resolution to rectify. Note that the resolution cannot be over 6000 DPI.
Media Size: If the media size of your PS or EPS file is NOT defined, the generated PDF
will be in the media size specified herein. You can choose a predefined standard size: A0,
A1, A2, A3, and A4. You can also choose Custom to specify other values.
Note: If the size you want to customize is close to one of the predefined sizes, you can
first choose the predefined size, and then choose Custom to modify the values.

2. Other Parameters
Ignore absent image: If checked, in case that the source file, e.g. PS file generated by
Founder FIT without image information, misses image(s), ElecRoc issues warning but
continues processing, so the generated PDF pages miss images too. If unchecked,
ElecRoc reports error and stops processing.
Image Path: To specify the paths of the images referred in source file. You can manually
input the path, or you can also click Browse to choose a path, optional paths need to be
predefined at the Server. It supports more than one path, separated by semicolons.
ElecRoc searches images according to the paths on a first-come first-served basis.

4.2.4 Advanced
PDF Generator compresses the images contained in the source file during its process. The
size of the generated PDF page file can be obviously reduced if you choose proper
compression modes and resolutions.
Note: The default settings are suitable for commercial print, and are recommended if

114
11
 Using ElecRoc Client

your PDF is just for commercial print. If your PDF is for remote proof or network
transmission, you may modify the settings as needed.

Figure 2-112

Image Types: Images are classified into three types here, Color images, Grayscale
images, and Monochrome images.
Compression: There are five options. None means no compression. Zip is a lossless
compression technique, supporting PDF and TIFF files, most suitable for images
containing large single-color areas. It is the default compression mode for color and
grayscale images. JPEG achieves high compression ratio and has a quite big influence on
the images. The image quality is controlled by three options, High, Medium, and Low.
CCITT is a series of lossless compression technologies for black and white images,
available for PDF and PostScript files. CCITT is the French abbreviation for International
Telegraph and Telekeyed Consultive Committee. PackBits is a fast, simple lossless
compression scheme for run-length encoding of data. Apple introduced this format on
Macintosh computer. It can be used in TIFF files.
Resolution: If the resolution of the file is bigger than the value specified here, PDF
Generator will re-sampling the file at your specified resolution.

115
 User Guide

4.3 PDF Processors

Such processors accept only the PDF page files generated by PDF Generator, and output
them in PDF file format, including:
Margin Adjustment Page Clipper PDF Tools Double Burn
PDF Merger PDF CMS Ink Convert EcoInk
rd
Preflight Trap 3 Party Preflight
Imposer Composer Ganging
In this section, we introduce the processors except Preflight, Trap, Imposer, and
Composer. In consideration of the paragraph length, we will introduce them separately in
sections 4.5 and 4.6, and chapters 5 and 6.

4.3.1 Margin Adjustment

This processor enables you to adjust the margins of the PDF pages.

Figure 2-113

1. Auto Adjustment

116
11
 Using ElecRoc Client

When Auto Adjustment is checked, you can customize the top, bottom, left and right
margin to be remained. In the thumbnail image displayed at the right, the yellow area
indicates the artwork on the page, the white area indicates the original margin, and the
red dashed lines represent the margin after adjustment.
Page size after adjusting: If checked, the processor can automatically increase or
reduce the margin, making the final page size be the size specified here. The diagram
containing nine tiny circles indicates positions for alignment before and after the
adjustment. Take the upper-left circle being checked as example, i.e. align the upper-left
corners of the pages and then increase or reduce the margin, in this case, the right
and/or bottom margin of the page will be adjusted.

2. Page Adjustment
Choose Page Adjustment to activate the parameters below, meanwhile disabling the
options in the Auto Adjustment area. Input the top, bottom, left and right margin to be
increased in the corresponding edit boxes. The thumbnail image at the right shows the
adjusted effect. The area enclosed by real lines represents the original size of the page,
while the area enclosed by dashed lines represents the page size after the margin
increase.
Page size after adjusting: Same as that in Auto Adjustment.
Bleed Symmetry: If checked, in duplex printing, the front and back pages on each piece
of paper will be symmetric or registered, i.e. the left and right margin of the odd pages
will be adjusted as per the Left and Right values specified here, while the left margin of
the even pages are adjusted as per the Right value, the right margin as per the Left
value.

4.3.2 Page Clipper

Using this processor, you can cut out the page content outside one or more defined crop
boxes on the page. It helps you to get rid of the unneeded content on the page, and also
enables you to split one page into several little ones.
In the job window, find out the Page Clipper icon from the left node list, and drag it into
the job, then submit a PDF page file from a PDF processor such as PDF Generator to this
node. After the submission, double-click the node to open the following window.

117
 User Guide

Figure 2-114
The window shows a toolbar at the top, which is grayed when you don’t submit any page.
The left lists all the submitted pages, as shown above, you can submit more than one
page at the same time. The editing interface of the selected page is shown at the body of
the window.
To clip a page, you need to define correctly one or more crop boxes. The content inside
the boxes is remained while that outside of the boxes is removed at the time you clip.
Now we go to the details on how to define a crop box.

1. Resize the crop box

You can define the size of the crop box in any of the following ways:
1. Hold down the left mouse button on the page and drag to form a dashed-line box. A
crop box is generated once you release the mouse button. After you define a crop box,
you can drag the arrows on the four sides or corners to freely adjust the size of the box.
2. Use the property panel at the bottom of the window to manually input the height and
width of the crop box. Here you can accurately define the size. You can click the unit
displayed in the height and width edit boxes to choose a preferred unit.
3. Use the three icons at the right of the toolbar.
The actual width of the page : Make the width of the crop box be the same as that of
the page.
The actual height of the page : Make the height of the crop box be the same as that
of the page.

118
11
 Using ElecRoc Client

The actual size of the page : Make the size of the crop box be the same as that of the
page.
The default crop box covers the entire page when you enter in the Page Clipper window.

2. Position the crop box

You can define the position of the crop box in any of the following ways:
1. Use horizontal and vertical coordinates to position the crop box. On the property panel
for the crop box, the nine-point diagram at the left represent nine positions on the crop
box. The X and Y values are the horizontal and vertical coordinates of such a position in
a coordinate system. E.g. we can check the lower-left point in the diagram and set the
coordinates to (10, 10), which means that the coordinates of the lower-left corner of the
crop box are (10, 10).
The default coordinate system originates at the lower-left corner of the page, with the
positive X axis pointing to the right, while the positive y axis upward. If needed, you can
change the origin to define another coordinate system. Choose the toolbar icon Set
custom coordinate system (the whole page now is grayed, and two intersecting
white lines appear and move along with the cursor), and move the intersecting lines to a
proper position (press Ctrl or Alt meanwhile to choose one commonly-used system
basing on the page or page element, i.e. when you move the axes to some specific
positions on the page, you can see white coordinate system), and then click the mouse,
to open the following dialog box.

Figure 2-115

You can input exact values in the X, Y edit boxes, to precisely determine the position of
the origin. And you can choose a preferred direction in the coordinate axis diagram aside.
2. Hold down the left mouse button to drag the crop box to any place as needed. If you
adopt this way, you can add guide lines for easiness in operation.
Add a guide. Move the cursor to the rulers located at the top and left of the window, and
once the cursor turns to an arrow, hold down the left mouse button and drag toward the
page. Now you will see a white line appearing, drag this line to proper position and then

119
 User Guide

release the mouse button. And then in the pop-up dialog box, specify the position of the
auxiliary line and click OK. The position here refers to the distance between the line and
the page side. X refers to the distance off the top side and Y the left side. This dialog box
can also be opened by clicking the toolbar icon .

Figure 2-116

Lock guides. Click the toolbar icon , and then choose Lock guides from the dropdown
list. A locked line can NOT be moved freely any more.
Capture guides. Choose Capture guides in the dropdown list. It aligns the crop
box with the nearest line when you move the box.
Like Capture guides, you can also choose Capture elements of the border in the
dropdown list, to align the crop box with the nearest page element box, such as the page
box, when you move the crop box.
3. Use the toolbar icon . A dialog box appears when this icon is clicked. Input the
distance to move leftward or rightward in the horizontal direction, or the distance to
move upside or downside, and then click OK.
4. Use the toolbar icon to make the crop box be at the center of the page. After you
click this icon, a dropdown list appears, providing three centering options, horizontal &
vertical, horizontal, and vertical.

3. Color and Zoom

ElecRoc also provides features to help you define the size and position of the crop box
with ease.
To change the color of the crop box, click the toolbar icon and choose Trim Box Color
in the dropdown list. In the follow-up color setup dialog box, choose an appropriate color,
and then click OK.
To zoom in or out the page, you can use the zoom icons , , in the toolbar, or hold
down the right mouse button and drag.

4. Define multiple crop boxes

120
12
 Using ElecRoc Client

As you drag the mouse on the page to create a crop box, if you press down the Ctrl key
at the same time, or make the toolbar icon be checked, you can create more than one
crop box one time.
The size and position of each crop box can be separately defined.

5. Crop to Blocks
This feature enables you to split a page. There are two manners to divide a page into
blocks: by auxiliary line and by certain rows and columns, controlled by the Block mode
parameter. If you choose the Not partition option, then you can define one or more
independent crop boxes as the methods mentioned above.
Using the auxiliary line block: To add one or more horizontal or vertical auxiliary lines
on the page. These lines can further split the crop boxes on the page into multiple
rectangular blocks, each block then becoming a crop box. E.g. in practice, you may have
imposed multiple middle-seam pages onto a page. With this feature, you can easily split
these middle-seam pages, for use later in the composition.
Set the number of block ranks: when checked, you see new parameters in the below
of the Block mode list. ElecRoc can split the crop boxes into multiple equal rectangles,
each becoming a new crop box, as per the rows, columns and distance specified here.

6. Crop
Click the icon at the upper-left corner of the window after you define properly the
quantity, the size and positions of the crop boxes. A new window now appears. Choose
the blocks to be cropped, and then click OK. Each of the chosen blocks will then become
a new page file.

Figure 2-117

121
 User Guide

4.3.3 PDF Tools

The PDF Tools parameter setup window is shown as follows:

Figure 2-118

1. Zoom
This setting enables you to scale flexibly the size of the generated PDF page file.
No Scaling: If checked, the file size remains unchanged.
Scaling: If you choose Same Scaling, the file is scaled up or down to the input
percentage in both horizontal and vertical directions. If you choose Free Scaling, you
can then separately specify the horizontal and vertical scale percentages.
Page Size: This option enables the file to be scaled to a specified page size. You can
choose a predefined size in the Page size list, or choose Custom to define a specific
size.
Fit to page: This option enables the file to be scaled in the specified page size, with same

122
12
 Using ElecRoc Client

scale percentages in both X and Y directions.

2. Spot Color

Figure 2-119

1) None
When the option None is selected, none of the following processing methods will be used
to your spot colors.
The following three processing methods are mutually exclusive. You can choose only one
of them.
2) Custom spot color
When the option Custom spot color is selected, the table below it takes effect,
describing how your spot colors will be processed. Spot colors undefined in the table, if
any, are processed as per the description for the item Default spot.
You can click CMYK/LAB button to change the display list of spot color using CMYK or
LAB color space, you can click the icon to add a spot color into the table. After the
adding, please specify its name, output manner, and corresponding color values, one by
one. Unneeded spot color can be removed from the table by clicking the icon . You may

123
 User Guide

click the icon to load spot color(s) from existing spot color tables, accessing the spot
color names and CMFY values. The spot color in this table can be written back to your
spot color table by clicking the icon . At the time you define the color values, please
double-click the value to activate it into editable state.
There are four manners to output spot colors. Separation refers to output as a
stand-alone separation, same as a process color. to Press Color refers to output by way
of transferring the spot color onto press colors. Change Into refers to output the spot
color with another spot color. In this case, you need to choose the “another spot color” in
the Replaced by column. Remove refers to no output of the spot color.
Note: At the time you define the spot color name, please note that the spot color names
are NOT case-sensitive because of the operating system. Spot colors such as SPOT1 and
spot1 will be taken as the same one.
3) Convert specific process color in graphics to spot color
If selected, it converts the process colors defined here to spot colors. Please define the
CMYK values at the left of the table, and then define the spot color at the right.
If it finds out graphics on the page whose color values equal to the definition here, it will
then convert them into spot colors. The spot color will be named as per what you define
at the right of the table. Tolerancy refers to tolerable deviation between the actual and
defined color values. Its unit is percentage, the higher the value is, and the wider the
scope of colors being converted will be.
4) Modify the extension
If the color contains suffix and not __, Rename spot color as: When the option
Modify the extension is selected, if the spot colors contains a suffix, but not the one
specified here, it will rename the suffix as the one specified here. If you continue to check
the option Add a suffix if a separation has no suffix, in case that the spot color has
no suffix, it will automatically add a one.

4.3.4 Double Burn

Double Burn processor allows you to merge two PDF pages into one PDF page. Merging
is necessary when different parts of a page are designed by different people; perhaps one
designs graphic part, and another inputs text. Works from different designers need to be
merged to complete a page design. Double Burn meets this need perfectly. The following
diagram shows how it works.

Figure 2-120

124
12
 Using ElecRoc Client

The Double Burn parameter setup window is displayed as follows:

Figure 2-121

1. Alignment
Page Alignment: The diagram containing nine tiny points indicates positions for
alignment during the mergence. E.g., if you check the upper-left point, it will align the
upper-left corners of the two pages, and then merge them. X and Y refer to the horizontal
and vertical spaces for the second page away the first page under the selected align
mode.
Preview: If checked, the processor generates a thumbnail image for the merged page.
Enable the second job clipping: This option enables you to clip the second job. You
can input in the Lower Left and Upper Right boxes separately the X and Y coordinates
both originate at the lower-left corner of the page to define two points, which can then
form a rectangle on the page. Double Burn cut off the content outside of the rectangle.

2. Rule
Parameters under this tab allow you to define two sets of merging rules.

125
 User Guide

Figure 2-122

1) Rules for automatic double burn

 File name tag
It refers to the name of the file submitted to the Double Burn processor. ElecRoc uses the
file name to determine if the file is applied to the automatic double burn process.
File name tag: If the names of the input files are in a standard style: Jobname_tag,
Double Burn can automatically submit the input files for process. To realize automatic
combining, the Jobname part of the two files to be combined must be the same, while the
tag part can be specified separately in the First job tag and Second job tag edit boxes.
For example, the user can input A and B, two files like Sample_A and Sample_B can then
be applicable for the auto process.
 Multi-page job
Parameters in this area allow the user to specify the combining rules when one or both of
the two input files consist of multiple pages.
Single/Multi-page job: This option is applied to cases when one file contains only one
page, and the other contains multiple pages. The Combine first page of each job
option makes the processor to combine the first page of the first file with the first page of
the second file.

126
12
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-123

The Combine single page with each page of multiple job option makes the
processor to combine the page of the first file with each page of the second file
respectively.

Figure 2-124
Multi/Multi-page job: This option is applied to cases when both files contain multiple
pages. The Combine first page of each job option makes Double Burn to combine only
first pages of the two files.

Figure 2-125

127
 User Guide

The Combine all pages sequentially option makes it to combine pages with the same
page number, e.g. page 1st of the first file with page 1st of the second file, page 2nd of the
first file with page 2nd of the second file, and so on.

Figure 2-126

 Name Rule
If you choose Preserve tag, Double Burn preserves the tags of both the two input files
in the name of the combined file. The two tags are connected with a separator “_”. If you
choose Remove tag, it removes the tags in the file name. And if you choose Append
tag, it appends a specified tag in the file name. The specified tag and the file name are
connected with separator “_” as well.
2) Manual double burn
There are four processing manners if you manually submit pages to Double Burn:
Pages are combined sequentially in pairs: This option makes the processor to
combine pages sequentially in pairs, as shown in the below.

Figure 2-127

First page is combined with following pages: This option makes the first page be
combined with the following pages, shown as follows.

Figure 2-128

128
12
 Using ElecRoc Client

Merge all files: This option combines all the submitted pages into a single page. The file
name is composed of the first two page names, separated by “_”.
Use automatic rules: If checked, it applies the automatic combining rules to process
the manually-submitted pages.

4.3.5 PDF Merger

ElecRoc provides PDF Merger for your convenience in long distance transmitting and
proofing. With this processor, you can merge multiple PDF files into one PDF. The
operation is very simple: you need only to submit more than one PDF files (separation
files are not supported) to PDF Merger.

Figure 2-129

 Set File Name

Rules for file with same name: Irrespective of how the file is named after the
mergence, if you choose Override, in case that it generates two files with same name in
two different processes, the new file will override the old one. If you choose Add Label,
it adds a suffix like _1, _2 … in the name of the new file.
Use first page name: This option uses the first page name as the output PDF file’s
name.
Rename as: If checked, you can input a name in the edit box, and make it as the name
of the output file after the mergence.
Use surface name: This option uses the surface name as the output PDF file’s name.
 Output Setup
Split the PDF file if the file size exceeds 2 Gigabyte: If checked, in case that the file
size after being merged exceeds 2 GB, ElecRoc will automatically split the file, making the
exceeded part as a new file, so as to ensure that no new file is larger than 2 GB.
 Merging Option

129
 User Guide

Merge Pages: Merge the submitted pages into a single file.

Merge signatures to multiple pages: Merge each signature into a multipage PDF file.
Merge signatures to single page: Merge each signature into a single-page PDF file.

4.3.6 PDF CMS

This processor provides the color management capacity at the PDF page level. In job
workflow, it can be deployed behind PDF Generator, Preflight, Trap, in front of Imposer,
Rasterizer and etc. Its processor parameter setup window is shown as follows:

Figure 2-130

1. General Parameters
1) Override ICC
The input file may embed ICC color profiles. If you want to use the embedded ICC profiles
to reproduce the colors of the page objects, keep the Override Embedded CMYK ICC
and Override Embedded Non-CMYK ICC boxes empty. If you check these two boxes
(both, or any of them), you can then use the profiles specified below by Input
Parameters.
2) Input Parameters
Profiles: You can specify the input ICC profiles for 6 types of page objects, including RGB
images/graphs, CMYK images/graphs, and Gray images/graphs. The input profiles for
each type of page objects are further divided into two types: Input Profile and Device
Link. ElecRoc not only provides some built-in profiles for you to use, but also supports
you to import more other profiles into ElecRoc in the module Resources > Profile
Resource > ICC.
If you check Image Graphic Same, the input profiles for the images and graphs in same

130
13
 Using ElecRoc Client

color mode will be the same. And if you check Color Manage Gray as CMYK, the input
profiles for Gray images and graphs will be the same as those for CMYK images and
graphs.
Render Intent: The Main Render Intent parameter controls the render intents for the
images and graphs in all color modes (RGB, CMYK, Gray and LAB). You can also
separately define the render intent for each image or graph type. There are four optional
intents: Perceptual, Saturation, Relative and Absolute.
For Black Preserve option, only Gray Image or Gray Graphic is selected, it can be
selected. Black Preserve keeps the gray images and graphics to the black separation.
3) Output Parameters
Color Model: ElecRoc CMS supports 4 output color modes, RGB, CMYK, Gray and HiFi.
Target: Here you can specify the target color profile.
Embed Target ICC: If checked, ElecRoc will embed the ICC profile specified at the
Target dropdown list, into the PDF file generated after the PDF CMS process.
Use PDF/X Embedded ICC: This option becomes available when the Color Model is set
to CMYK. If checked, the output profiles embedded in PDF/X will be used with priority.
Plane Num: In HiFi output mode, you can further specify the number of the output
planes. ElecRoc supports 5 planes (CMYKO, CMYKG, and CMYKB), 6 planes (CMYKOG,
CMYKOB, and CMYKGB) and 7 planes (CMYKOGB).
4) Color Mapping
With the Color Mapping setting, you can define how to converse a specific color. Colors
that are not specially specified here will still be conversed as per the input and output
parameters specified above.

Figure 2-131

131
 User Guide

Input the source color to be conversed in the From area. You need to provide such
information as the color space (RGB, CMYK, Gray or LAB) and the color value. Then input
the target color value that would be after the conversion in the To area. The Color Space
in the To area is determined by Output Parameters > Color Model under the General
tab. And then click Add to append the mapping relation into the table above. A tick in
front indicates the color will be conversed as specified here, while blank indicates not. If
you check the Apply box, all the mapping setting takes effect.
If you want to change a mapping relation, choose it, edit the source and target colors and
then click Apply. If you want to delete it, choose it and just click Delete.
Tolerance: Using this parameter you form a tolerance range (non-zero color value +-
tolerance value). Colors within this range will all be conversed as specified here. E.g. if
you specify specially the mapping relation for a CMYK source color (30 0 100 0), and the
Tolerance is set to 2, then source colors (28~32 0 98~100 0) in the input file will all be
conversed like the color (30 0 100 0).
Image/Graphic: These two options control if the color mapping settings are applied to
the image or graph objects.

2. Advanced Parameters

Figure 2-132

Black Preserve: Settings here are available only when the output color model is set to
CMYK. Colors of two black objects can be preserved, one is image or graph of C=M=Y=0

132
13
 Using ElecRoc Client

K=0~100, which will not be conversed, the other is image or graph of R=G=B, which will
become C=M=Y=0 K＝1-r after being conversed. For R=G=B image, adjusting the value
of Tolerance to get the best result. The r refers to the R (or G, B) value in percentage.
Exception Handling: The overprint or/and transparent image elements contained in
the input page, if any, would deviate or change after a color conversion. Thus a warning
mechanism can timely arouse your attention. You can ask ElecRoc to issue error or
warning in such cases.
Convert rich black to pure black: If checked, ElecRoc can convert the rich black
objects (K=100, C, M, Y any value) in your file to pure black objects (K=100, CMY=0).

4.3.7 Ink Convert

This processor is developed to convert one separation to the other separation. The files
only can be submitted to the Ink Convert node manually in jobs, the window of ink
convert setup will popped up.

Figure 2-133

Page Color: List all separations of the submitted file.

Output: List the output separation of each page color.
Output Selected as: List all separations of the current file and imported spot color.
Through Import Spot Color button, the spot color in spot color table can be imported to
the list.

133
 User Guide

Figure 2-134

4.3.8 EcoInk
This processor is developed to meet the requirements for energy consumption reduction
in print industry. It uses a lot of K to substitute for CMY, so as to reduce the ink
consumption and lower the printing cost. Meanwhile, it applies color management
technology to ensure the color stability and quality consistency, improving the gray tone
and making the details and image contrast more obvious.
In ElecRoc workflow, it accepts PDF pages processed by PDF Generator, or signatures
generated by Imposer or Composer, process and output them as PDF files. The output
files can then be submitted to the Rasterizer node.
Before you define the processor parameters, you should create an EcoInk solution by
Resources > Profile Resource > EcoInk. This solution takes a precise control of the
color conversion and management, ink-saving range, ink-saving level, and whether to
preserve pure colors.

Figure 2-135

134
13
 Using ElecRoc Client

EcoInk Solution: It refers to the EcoInk solution created by Resources > Profile
Resource > EcoInk. You can click View to learn the details on your selected solution.
Ignored Elements: EcoInk processor can selectively ignore certain image elements
during the ink-saving process. Such elements include:
1) element whose width or height is less than a specified value;
2) element whose width/height ratio is greater than a specified value;
3) element whose height/width ratio is greater than a specified value;
4) element that contains gradient;
5) spot color; and
6) element with specific color value. The corresponding checkbox for the last one is
Reserved Value. Check it and click Settings, and then you can define colors with
specific color value.

Figure 2-136

The Tolerance parameter in the follow-up color defining dialog box refers to the
difference allowed between the actual and specified color values. E.g. suppose that the
specified value here is C=a M=b Y=c K=d, and the Tolerance is set to x%, then colors of
C= (a-ax％)~(a+ax%) M = (b-bx％) ~(b+bx%) Y=(c-cx％)~(c+cx%)
K=(d-dx％)~(d+dx%) can all be ignored.
Exception Handling: The overprint or/and transparent image elements contained in
the input page, if any, would deviate or change after the ink-saving process. A warning
mechanism can timely arouse your attention and help avoiding possible errors. You can
ask ElecRoc to issue error or warning in such cases.

4.3.9 3rd Party Preflight

ElecRoc enables you to use the third-party Enfocus’ preflight module in ElecRoc workflow.
The processor parameter setup window is shown as follows.
Note: The installation of Enfocus PitStop on ElecRoc server is required. ElecRoc currently
supports only the Server versions.

135
 User Guide

Figure 2-137

The Profile and Action List dropdown boxes provide all available preflight profiles and
action list files in ElecRoc system, for you to choose. If you check Enable Preview, it
generates a thumbnail image for the PDF file during the preflight process.
After the preflight process, choose the preflight node, then choose a processed file in the
output file queue, right-click and choose Preflight Report, you can view the process
result report about the file.

4.3.10 Ganging
The Ganging processor is mainly designed for use with the large-format output devices.
It can automatically gang and output multiple small pages, which may be unsuitable for
being processed by imposer, on one large sheet of page based on the media size, in an
optimal layout, saving greatly the media and efficiency. With this processor, you can also
tile a large page into multiple small pages.
Note: This processor requires Adobe Acrobat version 8 or higher version being installed
on your computer.

136
13
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-138

1. Media (mm)
The media sizes can be classified into two types: pre-defined and custom. You can choose
a pre-defined option as needed, or choose Custom to define a specific size.

2. Mark Parameters
You can add marks in ganging. Mark size is fixed to 10.5 mm.
Enable surface mark: If checked, surface mark is added outside the surface.
Enable ganging mark: If checked, ganging mark is added outside the pages.

3. Tiling Parameters
Enable Tiling: If checked, it enables the auto tiling.
Auto Overlap: If checked, ElecRoc automatically controls the overlap width, ignoring
the Overlap setting.
Overlap: When Enable Tiling is checked but Auto Overlap is unchecked, Ganging
uses the values in the Horizontal and Vertical edit boxes as width and height of the
overlapping area between two neighboring tiled pages.

4. Preview
Here you can specify a preview resolution, ranging from 18 to 72 DPI.

137
 User Guide

Hint: In case that pages are very small while signature is very large, e.g. a bisect, you’d
better set a lower resolution, otherwise, the preview speed may be slow on Mac client.

5. Ganging Parameters
Enable Ganging: If checked, it enables the auto ganging.
Direction: Here you can determine whether to enable ganging in X, Y, or both directions.
Priority: Here you can control the priority of ganging direction.
Adjust layout: If you choose Keep layout, the signature size will base on the value
specified by the parameter Media. And if you choose Keeping only replate area,
ElecRoc will automatically trim away the blank area on the four sides of the signature,
therefore the signature size may become smaller than the Media size.
Interpage: You can input in the Horizontal and Vertical edit boxes to specify the
inter-page spacing in both horizontal and vertical directions.
Rotation: You can rotate the pages by choosing a suitable option.
Repeat Count: Repeat the submission of pages. For instance, if you submit 3 pages and
set Repeat Count to 2, then you will actually submit 6 pages (3x2) for ganging.

138
13
 Using ElecRoc Client

4.4 Output Processors

Such processors accept the PDF pages or signatures processed by PDF processor, and
output them on real media or as a finished electronic document, including:
PDF Export PDF Rasterizer 1 Bit TIFF Export 8 Bit TIFF Export
Mono Printer Color Printer Pre-RIP Proof Post-RIP Proof
Digital Printing Inkjet Printing Barcode
Ink Save Report Ink Control Export

4.4.1 PDF Export

PDF Export processor allows you to export the PDF page files to a specified location.

Figure 2-139

Preserve file name: If checked, the name of the PDF page file will be preserved during
the export. If the source file submitted to PDF Generator contains more than one page,
PDF Generator may produce more than one PDF page file, and include in their file names
a page number. If you want to preserve this number in the file name, choose Preserve
page number from the right dropdown list, otherwise, choose Remove page number.
Rename as: If checked, you can specify a name as the name of the exported file(s). By
clicking the button , you can add into the name some variable fields whose values are
depending on the actual job name, ID, file name, and etc.
Rules for file with same name: There are two options. If you choose Override, in

139
 User Guide

case that the exported file has the same name as an existing file in the output path, the
new file will overwrite the old one. If you choose Append Suffix, in such case, it adds an
ascending numeric suffix like _V01, _V02, _V03… to the name of the new file.
Change output path: Here you can specify the output path where the PDF pages will be
exported. You can directly input the path in the edit box or click the Browse button to
select an optional path. Optional output paths should be pre-defined from the Server.
Create Subdirectory: If checked, it generates a subdirectory named with the job name
under the output directory, and exports the till files under this subdirectory.

Keep file name: If checked, ElecRoc will delete a specified digit number of node id and
underline before the file name, and all the extensions behind the file name. The digit
number can be specified, by default its value is 6. This is generally designed for the PDF
file generated by PDF Merger. For example, if checked, and the digit number is set to 6,
an input PDF file “13_10_sample_pdf_Merge” would be exported as “sample”, if the digit
number is set to 8, it would be exported as “mple”.

4.4.2 PDF Rasterizer

This processor can convert PDF page files or signatures into bitmap files.

Figure 2-140

140
14
 Using ElecRoc Client

1. Screen
1) Screen Parameters
Color Mode: CMYK or Gray. By default, CMYK outputs the page and signature into Cyan,
Magenta, Yellow and Black separations, while Gray outputs only a Gray separation. The
separations are listed in the table below. The Separation and Remove options in the
Output column control whether or not to output each separation.
Both modes support spot color output.
Resolution: The resolution of the bitmap file is specified here, ranging from 10~12000
dpi. You can manually input a value, or choose a commonly-used value ranging 1200～
3657 from the dropdown list.
Shape: ElecRoc supports a wide range dot shapes. As shown in the table below, some
are provided as standard shapes, and some are optional, available upon additional
payment.

Category Shapes Standard Optional

Round 
Ellipse 
Rhombus 
Traditional AM Diamond 
Square 
Pure Round 
Sharp Ellipse 
EagleAM_Round 
EagleAM EagleAM_PureRound 
EagleAM-F 
FounderFM(First Order) 
FM
EagleFM(Second-Order) 
EagleFAM 
FAM
EagleFAM-F 
Gravure 
EagleAGS-Pincushion 
Gravure
EagleAGS-Hexagonal 
EagleAGS-T Shape 
Flexo Round 1 
Flexo Round 2 
Flexo
Flexo Round Balance 1 
Flexo Round Balance 2 
Table -11
Angle: Proper screen angles can effectively minimize the moirés occurred in full-color
image printing. The default angle is specific to dot shape, e.g. the default C, M, Y, K
angles for most dot shapes are 15°, 45°, 90° and 75°, but turn to 7.5°, 37.5°, 22.5° and
67.5° for EagleFAM. You can change the angle by inputting manually a new value or

141
 User Guide

choosing simply one from the angle options.

Frequency: The number of lines per inch, sometimes also called density of dots, with
the value ranging from 1 to 600 lpi. Higher value enables smaller dots and thus higher
image quality, but may possibly results in dot enlargement. In practice, its value is
closely relevant to the resolution, media and ink type. Frequency for the shape EagleFM
is fixed to 5 optional levels.
Levels: The level of grayness, with the value ranging 1~35536, affected by resolution,
frequency, and even the computer memory. Generally, the higher the level, the better the
image detail is reproduced, especially the gradient. When you choose to use the Gravure
or AGS shape, you can set it to 512, 1024 or even bigger, to make up the detail loss.
Dot size: This option appears when the shape FounderFM is selected. It controls the dot
size, in the unit of micron. Its value range and default value are relevant to the
resolution.
Shadows/Highlights dot size: These two options appear when you choose to use the
shape EagleFM or EagleFAM. They separately control the dot size in shadow and highlight
areas, in the unit of micron. Their value ranges and default values are relevant to the
resolution and frequency.
Miracle Cell: This option is used to increase the ink density of shadow in flexo printing,
by adding extra tiny dots in the shadow, and increasing the ink surface tension through
the tiny dots. You can adjust the dot size (0-5 pixel), dot density (0-50%), end value
(50-100%), and type (single: dot density is fixed, gradient: dot density is variable
according to the gradient).
Screening in Job: If the input file contains pre-defined screen setting, such as
frequency, shape, and angle, you may choose to apply these settings. To do so, uncheck
Override frequency in job, Override dot shape in job, and Override angle in job.
If you check all, or part, or any of them, you can override the corresponding screen
setting in the input file, and instead, use the screen setting defined here.
Deliver pages once processed: If checked, bitmaps for each page will be immediately
delivered to the connected next node for process, once they have been generated by PDF
Rasterizer. If not, bitmaps will be delivered at the same time till all pages from all files
have been processed.
2) Spot Color Output
 Output modes for spot colors
1) Separation: Output the spot color as an independent color separation, like the
process color separation. In this case, you can separately define the screen shape,
frequency, angle, level, and dot size for the spot color separation.
2) to Press Color: Dissolve and transfer the spot color onto process color separations,
and output as per the screen setting defined for these process color separations. If you
choose this mode, you need to click the icon at the upper-right to define definitely the
cmyk value of the spot color.
3) Change Into: Replace one spot color with another, and output as per the mode
chosen for the replacing one. Click the icon and then choose another spot color in the
Replaced by column.
4) Remove: Remove the spot color, i.e. the spot color is not output.
Default output: The separation named Default spot is designed for you to define the
default screen setting for all spot colors in the input file, i.e. if not defined specially, all

142
14
 Using ElecRoc Client

spot colors will be output as per the output mode defined for this separation. The default
mode for CMYK is Separation, and for Gray is to Press Color, i.e. the Gray. Change
Into is not a default mode.
Note: By reason of the operating system, the spot color name is NOT case sensitive. Two
spot colors named like SPOT1 and spot1 may be considered as one same color.
 Add spot color
You can separately define the output mode and screen setting for each spot color, in case
that you don’t want to output all the spot colors as defined for the Default spot
separation. Click the icon to add a spot color separation. After this, you can define the
color name, the output mode, the shape, angle, frequency, and even the cmyk value, one
by one.
To delete an unneeded spot color separation, choose it and then click the icon .
 Edit spot color
When you choose the mode to Press Color or Change Into, you can click the icon to
edit the C, M, Y, K value, or pick out the substitute spot color. Click this icon again to exit.
 Import/save spot color
You can click the icon to import spot colors from a spot color table, copying out the
name and cmyk value. In reverse, you can click the icon to save the spot colors here
into a spot color table.
3) Curve
Calibration: Calibration curve is used to calibrate the output device, so as to minimize
the inaccuracy of screening and ensure the output quality.
Tune Curve: This curve can tune the dots value of the separation, so as to rectify the
color offset occurred.
Intended Press: If you have made compensation about dot gain, you can employ the
dot gain curve to remove the compensation.
Actual Press: You can employ this curve to compensate the dot gain caused by printing.
You can create, edit, calibrate, import or export the four curves above at Resources >
Traditional Press. The PDF Rasterizer curves there refer to the calibration curves, and
press curves refer to the intended/actual press curves.
4) Zone Screen
In general, as specified by the Screen Parameters, the screen methods for all the
separations and all the objects on separation are the same on the whole, i.e. except the
screen angle, all separations and all objects on the separations will be screened with a
same shape, frequency, and level. If you enable zone screen, you can then apply various
screen settings to the separations, to the graphs, the images, or even single text, image,
graph, shading object.
ElecRoc zone screen is classified into two types, the Zone Screen at the front end, and
the Local Screen at the back end.
The front-end zone screen means to define separately the screen setting for single object
on PDF page (text, image, graph, or shading), by using a dedicated Acrobat plug-in,
before the PDF Rasterizer process. In this case, PDF Rasterizer screens corresponding
objects according to the screen settings defined by the plug-in in front-end, as long as
you check the option Zone Screen First here. Other page objects that you haven’t used

143
 User Guide

the plug-in to define screen settings are then screened as per the settings defined here.
Refer to appendix C.4 Screen Plug-in for details.
The back-end local screen means to check the option Enable Local Screen here and
then define separately various screen settings for the separations, or for the two kinds of
objects, images or graphs, i.e. the Separation Screen and Photo Screen mentioned
below.
 Separation Screen
Check Separation Screen. In this case, all separations, including the spot color
separations, can be defined with various screen settings, i.e. except the screen angle, the
shape, frequency, and level for each separation can be different from each other. Please
define the settings over again at the Screen Parameters setup area. Note that, at the
same screen node, the frequency, level and dot size for same shapes must be the same.
 Photo Screen
Check Photo Screen. In this case, ElecRoc classifies the page objects into two types,
images and graphs. Please choose the object type from the dropdown list, and then
define the screen setting for it at the Screen Parameters setup area. You can
separately specify the parameters such as angle, shape, frequency, level, dot size, and
screen curves as well. Other parameters in the setup window, such as color mode,
resolution, output manner, separation name, spot color process manner, for the two
kinds of objects, must be set to or kept with a same value.
Report error if exist Transparency: Images and graphs in transparent file are NOT
supported here. ElecRoc issues error and stops screening when it encounters a
transparent page, or signature containing transparent page. If you uncheck this option,
in this case, ElecRoc issues only warning message in pink in the information window, but
continues the screening. Local screen becomes unavailable if the whole page is
transparent, or such page exists in a signature.
Gradients are processed as images here.

2. RIP

144
14
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-141

1) RIP
Output Blank: If checked, it will be permitted to output blank sheet.
Shading Quality: This option controls the quality level for the shading. Higher shading
quality requires more processing time. If you want to perfectly reproduce the original
shading effect, choose Higher. If the input files are large in size and quantity, or contain
too many shading effects, it may take a lot of time in RIP process. In this case, you can
choose Normal or Fine to save the process time.
Image Quality: It controls the level of image output quality. If you want to output with
higher quality, choose Fine, but this may lower processing speed. The Proof option can
reduce the processing time, but may result in the loss of output quality. The default
option is Normal, which is the intermediate option between Fine and Proof.
Override stroke setting in job: If checked, ElecRoc use a built-in stroke setting. If not,
ElecRoc uses the setting defined in the input file.
Stroke Adjustment: If checked, in case that the file is output in a lower resolution, the
position and lines of the table contained in the file can become smoother. If not, the lines
may look a little coarse.

145
 User Guide

Output HQ pattern: This option controls whether or not to output the Pattern objects in
the page with the highest quality. By default, it’s unchecked, so that you can get
comparably higher output speed.
Rich black to pure black: If checked, the rich black objects (K=100, C, M, Y any value)
in your file will be output as pure black objects (K=100, CMY=0).
Override overprint in job: If not checked, ElecRoc uses the overprint setting defined in
the file by front-end layout application. Whether the 100% black elements are
overprinted or not is controlled by the Black Only option.
Overprint in RIP: If you check Override overprint in job, ElecRoc uses the overprint
setting specified here instead of that defined in the file. The Overprint option allows you
to print an element of one color over one of another color without removing, or knocking
out, the material underneath. The Black Only option enables only the 100% black
elements to be overprinted, it is the default option. The Knockout option enables all the
separations to be knocked-out. White gaps may appear due to inaccurate alignment.
Overprint 100% black: This option appears only when the Overprint in RIP is set to
Black Only. Being checked, overprint takes effect only on 100% black.
Export proof line: If checked, ElecRoc outputs proof line during the rasterizing process.
Keep overprint on image with white color: Keep overprint of the image with white
spot color.
Keep overprint on spot color: If the spot color is overprint, use the preview to convert
it.
2) Media size
The dropdown list provides a wide range of pre-defined media size options. You can
choose anyone as needed, or you can also choose Custom to define a specific size.
Note: If the file size is larger than the media size here, ElecRoc will issue error. The
media size is direction sensitive. Take A4 for example, ElecRoc regards 297mmx210mm
and 210mmx297mm as different sizes.
3) Device
Mirror: If checked, the printer produces a mirrored page.
Negative: If checked, the page printed by the printer is in negative.
4) Scaling
X and Y control separately the horizontal and vertical scaling percentages.
If Scaling First is selected, it will do scaling first, then rotation.
5) Rotation
You can rotate anticlockwise 90º, 180º, 270º. The default is no rotation. You can also
choose Auto, enabling ElecRoc to rotate automatically.
If Rotation First is selected, it will do rotation first, then scaling.

3. ICC

146
14
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-142
Override ICC profile in job: If checked, it overrides the color settings contained in the
PDF file and uses the settings specified here. If not, ElecRoc searches in the PDF file for
the color settings, mainly the ICC profile.
Enable ICC: By default, this option is unchecked. Therefore, parameters in the Profile
and Output Rendering intents areas are all grayed. These parameters become
available as long as you check Enable ICC.
Profile: Here you can specify the source ICC profiles in three color modes, and the
output ICC profiles. The source profiles in each mode are further sorted to two types:
Input Profile and Device Link. ElecRoc not only provides some built-in profiles for you to
use, but also supports you to import more other profiles into ElecRoc by Resources >
Profile Resource > ICC. If you check Use CMYK profile in gray image, the source
profiles in Gray mode will be the same as those in CMYK mode.
Rendering intent: The Main Intent parameter controls the render intents for all the
objects in the file. You can also separately define the render intent for CMYK and RGB
images. There are four optional intents: Perceptual, Saturation, Relative and Absolute.

147
 User Guide

Preserve 100% process black: Check this option if you don’t want the 100%
black-only part of your input file to be converted to a CMYK equivalent color. This option
is particularly relevant for black text because it avoids colored fringes.
Use default device calibration: If checked, it applies a built-in device calibration to the
RGB objects. If not, it activates the Output Control for RGB parameters below for you
to customize the RGB output settings. Note that, if you have specified a RGB source ICC
profile in the Profile area above, all Output Control for RGB parameters will be
disabled.
Black Generation: It is the process of creating the black channel and its effect on the
color channels when performing a mode-change from RGB to CMYK. Available options
include None, Light, Medium, Heavy, Maximum, and UCR, the latter the higher black
amount. UCR, as the abbreviation of Under Color Removal, can replace a lot of CMY with
K.
Override black generation in job: The input file may contain pre-defined black
generation setting. If you check this option, ElecRoc uses the Black Generation setting
specified here instead of that pre-defined in the input file.
Convert RGB black to true black: Some applications especially Microsoft Word, use
RGB colors for everything, including solid black. ElecRoc converts such blacks into CMYK
color of (0 0 0 100), if you check this option.
Max Ink: The maximum amount of all four CMYK colors that are generated in the
conversion process. Colors specified as black are not affected by this parameter.
Max Black: The maximum amount of black ink that is generated by the color conversion
process. Colors specified as black are not affected by this parameter.
Screen EcoInk Solution: If checked, you can apply an EcoInk solution. EcoInk solution
will then disable the above ICC settings.

4. Ink Information

Figure 2-143

After the screen process, if you want to submit the generated bitmap file to Ink Control
node for a further process, you need to enable the settings here.
Thumbnail of ink control file: If checked, it generates one thumbnail image specially
designed for the ink control process. The Ink Control Export processor can then base on
this thumbnail image to generate standard CIP3/CIP4 ink file. If not, ElecRoc issues error
when you submit the rasterized bitmap file to Ink Control Export node.
Resolution: The resolution level of the generated thumbnail image.
Same rotation as Tiff file: If checked, the generated thumbnail is rotated with the tiff
file, i.e. rotated as defined by the Rotation parameter under the RIP tab.

5. Mark
The settings here are the same as those described in section 4.4.5 Mono Printer.

148
14
 Using ElecRoc Client

4.4.3 1-Bit TIFF Export

This processor enables you to export the Tiff files generated by Rasterizer processor.

Figure 2-144

1. Output Setup
Rules for files with same name: When you export the Tiff files to specified location, in
case that there are files with same name already existing in the specified location,
ElecRoc provides you with two methods to deal with: the one is to override existing the
files; the other is to append suffix, i.e. to add a “_X” suffix behind the new files, the “X”
refers to an integer number increased sequentially.
Simple display name: If checked, the exported till files are named based on the
simplified display name of the input file.
Full display name: If checked, the exported till files are named based on the full display
name of the input file.
Rename as: If checked, you can input a name in the right edit box as the file name. You
can also click the button to choose if the new name contains such elements as job
name, node ID, bitmap file name, color name, abbreviated color name, and resolution.
Change to selected path: If checked, you can specify the location the Tiff files to be
exported. You can input the path in the right edit box, or click to choose one.
Create Subdirectory: If checked, it generates a subdirectory named with the job name
under the output directory, and exports the till files under this subdirectory.

2. For BrainNew
If checked, the exported Tiff files can be applied to the BrainNew application.

3. Compress

149
 User Guide

Available compression options: CCITT, PackBits and LZW.

CCITT: CCITT is a series of lossless compression technologies for black and white images,
supported in PDF and PostScript language file formats. CCITT is the French abbreviation
for International Telegraph and Telekeyed Consultive Committee.
PackBits: PackBits is very effective for reducing the size of bitmap files which contain
large areas of solid color.
LZW: LZW compression is the compression of a file into a smaller file using a table-based
lookup algorithm invented by Abraham Lempel, Jacob Ziv, and Terry Welch. Two
commonly-used file formats in which LZW compression is used are the GIF image format
served from Web sites and the TIFF image format. LZW compression is also suitable for
compressing text files.

4. Others
Delete proof line: To delete the proof line in the Tiff files.
Delete processed Tiff files: If checked, the input files submitted to 1 Bit TIFF Export
will be removed when they have been processed. Otherwise, they will be kept under the
node as input resources.

4.4.4 8-Bit TIFF Export

This processor can generate 8 bit Tiff files based on the PDF files, such as those
generated by PDF Generator, and export the generated 8 bit Tiff files as you specify.

Figure 2-145

150
15
 Using ElecRoc Client

Most of the parameters under the RIP, Device and Mark tabs are the same with those
mentioned in the previous two sections, except the peculiar Anti Zigzag parameter.
Anti Zigzag: This parameter is under the RIP tab. Anti-zigzag uses intermediate colors
or grayscale tones to visually smooth boundaries between different colors, most useful
for low or medium resolution output. Among the three options, Disable means no
anti-zigzag, Fine provides more smoothing than Normal, but requires more time.
Under the Output tab, you can specify the following parameters.
Preserve file name: If checked, the output file will be named mainly with the name of
the input file, i.e. the input file name will be preserved. If you submit more than one file
or submit a same file more than once, the newer exported one will override the older one.
Rename as: If checked, please type a name into the edit box. The exported file will be
named as you type. In case that you submit more than one file or submit a same file
more than once, there would remain only the last exported file under the output file path.
Rules for file with same name: This option becomes activated when you have chosen
Rename as. If you choose Override, in case that you submit a same file more than once,
the newer exported one will override the older one. If you choose Append Suffix, in the
same case, it will add additionally an ascending numeric suffix like _p0001, _ p0002, _
p0003… to the new exported files.
Change output path: Here you can specify the output path where the Tiff files will be
exported. If the output path is not specified here, the files will be exported to the shared
folder Output_FrameBmp on the server.
Create Subdirectory: If checked, it generates a subdirectory named with the job name
under the output directory, and exports the till files under this subdirectory.

4.4.5 Mono Printer

The mono printer parameter setup window is shown as follows:

151
 User Guide

Figure 2-146

1. Print
1) Color Separation
Mode: There are two color modes: Gray and CMYK. Gray is the default option, can
generate gray separation. CMYK separates colors in CMYK, i.e. Cyan, Magenta, Yellow
and Black. The color separation table below lists all the separations under your selected
color mode. The checkbox in front of each separation controls if the separation will be
printed or not. And you can drag any color to change the order in the list.
Spot Color: As for a composite file containing spot colors, when this option is selected,
ElecRoc will generate spot color separations to output them; otherwise, it converts spot
colors into Gray or CMYK separations to output.
Note: The printer resolution is the same as that defined in the printer’s Printing
Preferences from the Printers and Faxes window of your operating system. You must
stop the processor in ElecRoc before you change the resolution.
2) Media
The Media dropdown list provides a wide range of pre-defined media size options. You
can choose anyone as needed, or you can also choose Custom to define a specific size.
If you have used the Console to create a device parameter template, you can see a Use
device template option here. And if you check this option, you can then see the
templates available in the Media dropdown list. Choose a template to apply its defined
media size and device parameters.

152
15
 Using ElecRoc Client

It’s best to create a device parameter template with the Console, or to choose Start >
Printers and Faxes in your operating system, to define the media size.
3) Printing
Center: If checked, the file will be printed in the center of the media. And the left and top
margin cannot be edited.
Left Margin: If the box Center is not checked, you can input the value of left margin.
Top Margin: If the box Center is not checked, you can input the value of top margin.
Enable exceed media output: In some cases, the output page may exceed the media
size. If checked, such page will be printed out. If not, such page will not be printed.
4) Scaling
X and Y allow you to specify the scaling percentage in both X and Y directions. Value 100
means that the output page size is the true page size. If you enter 80 for X and Y, the
page will zoom in 80% of the original size from the axes of X and Y. If you enter 200 for
X and Y, the original page will be doubled. The default value is 100.
5) Tiling Parameters
Enable Tiling: If checked, in case that the page size is larger than the media size,
ElecRoc can split the page into multiple smaller pages to output. But this capability is
auto disabled if you check Enable exceed media output.
Overlap: You can input in the Horizontal and Vertical edit boxes to specify the overlap
width of tiles.
Auto Overlap: If checked, ElecRoc automatically determines the overlap width, ignoring
the Overlap settings.
6) Others
Proof Line: If checked, it prints out the proof line.
Output Blank: If checked, it can output blank sheet.
Negative: If checked, the page printed by the printer is in negative.
Mirror: If checked, the printer produces a mirrored page.
Copies: The quantity of copies you want to print out, ranging from 1 to 255.
Density: The density of ink, 1~255. This option is specific to printer models, i.e. not all
printers support this feature.
Shrink to page: If checked, ElecRoc adjusts the output content to fit the page. In this
mode, Scaling and Rotation are disabled. The content is located in the center of the
page.
Note: If the original page size is smaller than the media size, the page size will remain
unchanged.
Rotation: If the page cannot be printed on the media in the normal orientation, you can
try to change the output orientation. You can rotate the page anticlockwise 90, 180, 270
degrees. The default setting is no rotation.
Override overprint in job: If not checked, ElecRoc uses the overprint setting defined in
the file by front-end layout application. Whether the 100% black elements are
overprinted or not is controlled by the Black Only option.

153
 User Guide

Overprint in RIP: If you check Override overprint in job, ElecRoc uses the overprint
setting specified here instead of that defined in the file. The Overprint option allows you
to print an element of one color over one of another color without removing, or knocking
out, the material underneath. The Black Only option enables only the 100% black
elements to be overprinted, it is the default option. The Knockout option enables all the
separations to be knocked-out. White gaps may appear due to inaccurate alignment.

2. Mark

Figure 2-147

1) Standard Mark
Options in this area enable you to add standard marks including registration marks, trim
marks, folding marks, etc. onto a page.
Mark Type: ElecRoc supports 15 different types of marks, including Cross Mark, Solid
Circle, Internal Cutline, External Cutline, Folding Line, Book Spine, Anti Cross, Rect Mark,
Square Mark, Circle Mark, L Cross, U Cross, Corner Mark, Hollow Circle and T-shape.

Figure 2-148

154
15
 Using ElecRoc Client

Mark Position: The standard marks can be positioned at the following positions on the
page: the Corner refers to the four corners of the page; the Edge refers to four positions
close to the four corners on the left and right sides; the Top refers to four positions close
to the four corners on the top and bottom sides; the Middle refers to the middle of the
four sides; and the Book middle refers to four positions close to the middles of the top
and bottom sides. Click Select to add the selected mark on the selected positions, while
click Deselect to discard the added mark, and you can click Clear All to remove all
marks.

Figure 2-149
Mark Size: Here you can specify the size of mark and the thickness of the mark line.
Center Offset: Distance from the mark to the top, bottom, left or right edge of the page.
Line Offset: The horizontal and vertical distance between cut lines. This option is only
available for Internal CutLine or External CutLine.
2) Additional Information
Additional information include comments, color bar, file information, current time, and
etc. Using the Additional Information parameters, you can not only control whether to
output such information, but also specify its font and position on the page.
Enable: When checked, it activates the parameters in the below.
Position: The additional information can be output at different positions of the page,
Top, Bottom, Left or Right. Keep the Default position, if not specially needed.
File Information: If checked, it adds the file path outside the page content.
Time: If checked, it adds the current time outside the page content.
Color Bar: If checked, it adds process step wedges outside the page content.
Comment: If you check it, you can input a string of comment here, and this comment
will then be output at the bottom or side of the page.
Information Map: Located at the right of the Additional Information parameters,
this area displays a thumbnail image of the defined information in real time.

3. Curve
The curve setting is only effective for ink jets.
Use Curve (Only for ink jet): If checked, you can choose a Gray tune curve from the

155
 User Guide

dropdown list for color adjustment.

4.4.6 Color Printer

Figure 2-150
The color printer processor parameter setup window looks basically the same as that of
the mono printer. For details, refer to the introductions in the previous section.
Note that the default settings for some parameters may be different, e.g. the default
option for Color Separation > Mode under the Print tab is CMYK, and some
parameters may be not available. Moreover, we recommend you to define the media size
at the Printers and Faxes window in your operating system.

4.4.7 Pre-RIP Proof

Pre-RIP proof, also called PDF proof, is applied to proof PDF files output by PDF Generator
or other PDF processors. The Pre-RIP Proof parameter setup window is shown as follows:

156
15
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-151

1. Color
1) Color Mode
Color: CMYK color mode is supported. It separates colors in four separations, Cyan,
Magenta, Yellow and Black. The color separation table below lists all the separations. The
checkbox in front of each separation controls if the separation will be printed or not. And
you can drag any color to change the order in the separation list.
Output Spot Color: As for a composite file containing spot colors, if checked, ElecRoc
generates spot color separations to output them.
Spot color to press color: This option and the above option are mutually exclusive. If
checked, it converts spot colors into CMYK separations to output.
Separation Mode: It refers to the separation mode supported by proof device. You can
choose an option as needed.
2) Color Solution
This dropdown list provides color solutions for you to choose. Many of them are built-in
solutions designed for color management in various proof environments. You can simply

157
 User Guide

choose such a solution, or launch the color calibration tool to create a new solution.
Details on your selected color solution, including resolution, separation mode, ink type,
and etc., can be viewed in the window Resources > Digital Proof > CMF Correction.
This data will automatically override the corresponding parameter setting in the setup
window and make them appear in gray, after you have chosen a solution.
Quality Certification: Click Quality Certification button, it will automatically open the
quality certification program, and load the parameters of the current CMF file.
3) Spot Color Table
In order to achieve accurate spot color output, we generally define how to output spot
colors in the CMF solution file. If your CMF file doesn’t contain such definition, you can
define it in the spot color table. And if your spot color table still doesn’t contain it, ElecRoc
will output spot colors as per the definition in the file itself.
Spot color table: This dropdown list provides all available spot color tables in ElecRoc
system, including both the system-defined and user-defined ones, which can be added or
edited in Resources > Profile Resource > Spot Color Table.
4) Color Tune
This dropdown list provides all the color tune curves available in your ElecRoc system,
which can be edited or created in Resources > Digital Proof > Color Tune. You can
choose any of them as needed to adjust the CMYK colors.
5) Screen Mode
Optional screen modes include FM1, FM2, FM3, and Fast Screen. FM1 or FM3 are suitable
for pre-RIP proof. With FM3, colors would be comparably darker, and richer as to the color
levels. Fast Screen, as the name implies, is applied for quick proof. The Default is FM1.
Screen mode will be grayed when you choose color solution.
6) Others
Proof Line: If checked, it prints out proof line.
Override overprint in job: If not checked, ElecRoc uses the overprint setting defined in
the file by front-end layout application. Whether the 100% black elements are
overprinted or not is controlled by the Black Only option.
Overprint in RIP: If you check Override overprint in job, ElecRoc uses the overprint
setting specified here instead of that defined in the file. The Overprint option allows you
to print an element of one color over one of another color without removing, or knocking
out, the material underneath. The Black Only option enables only the 100% black
elements to be overprinted, it is the default option. The Knockout option enables all the
separations to be knocked-out. White gaps may appear due to inaccurate alignment.
Proof on Printing Paper: If checked, you can use printing paper, instead of the paper
dedicated to digital proof, to do your digital proof. When checked, please re-choose a
color solution suitable for this proof type from the CMF File dropdown box. Other
settings are the same as normal digital proof. By using printing paper to proof, you can
lower your proof cost significantly without sacrificing the color quality.

2. Device

158
15
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-152

1) Resolution
The output resolution of the proof device. Options vary as the connected device differs.
2) Scaling
Scale X and Y allow you to specify the scaling percentage in both X and Y directions.
3) Media Size
This dropdown list provides a wide range of pre-defined media options. You can choose
any one as needed. And it provides also the Custom option for you to define a specific
media size.
Printable Size: It refers to the size of the actually printable area on the output media.
4) Margin
Left/Up: The margin is the blank space bordering the printed area on a page. You can
specify the left and up margin when the Centering option is disabled.
Centering: If the media is single page paper, you can choose Center to position the
page content at the center of the paper; or you can choose Horizontal to print the
content at the center of the left or right edge of the paper. If the media is roll paper,
Horizontal is recommended, but you can also choose Center. In the latter case, after a
file has been printed, the next print would not start on a new page, but in the blank area
below the printed file on the same page.
5) Others
Enable exceed media output: If checked, the output of jobs that exceed the media
size will be allowed.
Copies: The number of copies to be output.
Rotation: If the page cannot be printed on the media in the normal orientation, you can
try to change the output orientation. You can rotate the page anticlockwise 90, 180, 270
degrees. The default setting is no rotation. If you choose Auto Rotate, ElecRoc can
automatically determine whether and how to rotate.
6) Page Gap

159
 User Guide

Auto page position: If the page size is much smaller than the output paper, such pages
can be automatically positioned on the output paper in a paper-saving layout. Once this
option is checked, you can define the space between the individual ganged pages.
Note: This function is available only in case that the job is being copied.

3. Mark
Refer to related introduction on the mark in section 4.4.5 Mono Printer.

4. Comment

Figure 2-153

Print Comment: If checked, it outputs the comment defined herein at the lower-left
corner on the paper. You can design the comment as needed, e.g. the comment can
contain the print start time, job name, color tune curve, and so on. If unchecked, options
below are all grayed.
Print start time: If checked, it outputs the time when the print is started.
Job Name: If checked, it outputs the file name on the paper.
Color Solution: If checked, it outputs the name of the applied color solution.
Tune Curve: If checked, it outputs the path of the applied color tune curve.
Attached Information: If checked, it can output additional information apart from that
specified above. To add such information, input it in the edit box at the right.

5. Advanced
The advanced parameters vary as the proof device differs. Here we take parameters for
some commonly-used devices as example. Note that some parameters may differ even
to a same device family from a same vendor.
1) For Epson proof device

160
16
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-154

Paper Source: The mode for feeding paper: Roll or Sheet.

Paper Suction: The intensity for paper suction, your input value should vary according
to the type and thickness of the output paper.
Feed Paper Adjustment: This option controls the speed of feeding paper, so as to avoid
irregular lines in the horizontal direction appearing in print.
Bidirection Printing: If checked, the printer head prints when moving in both directions,
so as to get a higher printing speed. In general, this option is not recommended, because
it may result in quality degradation.
Auto Cutting: If checked, printer will automatically cut the paper after print.
Nozzle Check: If checked, printer outputs a built-in image pattern. By observation, you
can find out if the nozzle is clogged.
Ink Type: The type of the ink, pigment or dye.
Black Ink Type: The type of the black ink, photok or mattek.
Media Type: The type of the output media, such as Plain Paper, Glossy Paper and
Semi-glossy Paper.
2) For HP proof device
Print Mode: Options include 8 Pass Bidir, 8 Pass Unidir, and 12 Pass Unidir.
3) For Canon proof device
For Canon devices such as iPF 810, advanced parameters are shown as follows. You can
configure the ink type, paper source, print quality, auto cut, and etc.

Figure 2-155

161
 User Guide

4.4.8 Post-RIP Proof

Post-RIP proof, also called dot proof, is applied to proof TIFF files generated by PDF
Rasterizer.

Figure 2-156

ElecRoc post-RIP proof supports you to use a wide range of ink-jet proof devices from
Epson, Hp and Cannon, and the laser proof devices as well. It also supports the Winprint
mode. In this case, it’s no longer restricted by the device models, which means that you
can use any printer installed in your operating system to proof (choose the Winprint
mode and a proper printer when you install the proof processor). Moreover, post-RIP
proof provides the quick proof capacity.
As to the parameters, the Color, Comment and Advanced setting is basically the same
as pre-RIP proof. Refer to section 4.4.7 for details. The Screen Mode for post-RIP is
generally recommended as FM2 or FM3. FM2 is subject to produce redder colors, while
FM3 enables richer color levels. The Default is FM2.

162
16
 Using ElecRoc Client

The device related setup for post-RIP proof is also basically the same with that for
pre-RIP proof, except for the following parameters:
Smooth Mode: Used to clear off moiré, options include smooth1, smooth2, smooth3,
and smooth4. By default, it is set to smooth1. From smooth1 to smooth4, more close to
smooth4, moiré problems may be avoided more easily; more close to smooth1, the dot
shape may be kept much better.
Descreening: Used to clear off the unacceptable moiré patterns appeared on some
separations, if any. It can reduce moiré patterns, but may result in some loss in dot shape
at the same time. In practice, when moiré patterns appear, we recommend the user to
use Smooth Mode parameter to clear off at first; and then use this parameter in case that
the Smooth Mode option cannot clear off completely moiré patterns on some separation.

4.4.9 Barcode
This processor can add the Code 39 barcode onto your PDF page. Code 39 is a barcode
widely-used in commodity source tracing and logistics tracking. As shown in the following
figure, the output result is usually a barcode and a corresponding string of numbers,
located at the left or right side of the page. The data contains 8 digits, among which the
first 4 digits are usually the user code or department code.

Figure 2-157
The Barcode node can appear as a stand-alone or a connected node in your job,
accepting PDF page files and enabling you to preview the output result immediately after
the process.

163
 User Guide

Its process parameter setup window is as follows.

Figure 2-158

Barcode Attribute: The barcode can exist in any of the two formats: an image
(supporting two resolution options, 600x600 and 1200x1200); or a graphic (to become
a vector graphic).
Barcode Type: Currently supports only Code 39.
First 4: The barcode data consists of 8 digits. The first 4 digits can be specified here.
Valid characters include upper case letter, number, and special symbols (-.$/+%). The
last 4 digits are variable: the 5th and 6th digits are current page number, the 7th and 8th are
total page number. Considering that each piece of paper contains front and back sides,
both the two page numbers need to be divided by 2. For example, suppose that you
submit 16 pages at a time, the total page number is then 8, the 1st and 2nd pages are
considered as the 1st page, while the 3rd and 4th pages as the 2nd page.
Note: The total page number refers to the total PDF pages you submit one time, not the
total pages your source file contains. There are only 2 digits for the page number,
therefore, if the page number exceeds 100 (i.e. actually 200 pages), ElecRoc will issue
error report.
Sequence, Reverse: Sequence indicates that the actual value at the 5th and 6th digits
will increase one by one; while Reverse indicates that the value will decrease.
Print Position: Front Paper indicates that the barcode will be output on the front side
of the paper, i.e. on the odd pages; Back Paper indicates that the barcode will be output
on the back side of the paper, i.e. on the even pages.
The dropdown list in the below enables you to specify the left or right position on the page,
i.e. right side or left side on the paper.

164
16
 Using ElecRoc Client

Text Position: If you choose No Print, the corresponding number will NOT be output
together with the barcode; please choose Print On Left or Print On Right to output the
number and the barcode together.

4.4.10 Ink Control Export

This processor generates industry-standard CIP3 and CIP4 ink files, based on the ink
control thumbnail image generated during the Rasterizer process. The CIP ink file can
help press worker to reduce the press cycle and minimize the production waste.
In ElecRoc workflow, it accepts only the tiff files generated by the screen node, usually
the screened signatures. The screening option Ink Information > Thumbnail of ink
control file must have been enabled during the screen process. After the process, it
outputs the ink file under your specified output directory, but doesn’t display the file in
the job window.

Figure 2-159

Rename as: You can check this option to specify the name of the generated ink file.
Save ink file to: This setting enables you to customize the output directory for the
CIP3/CIP4 ink file. If not checked, the generated ink file will appear under the default

165
 User Guide

directory \\server name\InkFile\. If checked, you can then customize the output
directory, by manually inputting, such as \\server name\Upload\, or by clicking Browse
to choose one from optional directories. Here you can specify more than one directory
separated by the symbol “|”, i.e. you can make the ink file appear under multiple
directories.
Create job subdirectory: If checked, ElecRoc creates a subdirectory under the output
directory, named with the job name, and then generates the ink file under this
subdirectory. If not, it generates the file directly under the output directory.
Delete the source ink files: If checked, the source files for generating ink files will be
deleted from ElecRoc system after the process. If not, these files will remain inside
ElecRoc, and in this case, you can run again to generate the ink file.
Ink file version: Ink files in versions below 3.0 are in the .cip format, while in version
3.0 are in the .ppf format.
Rotation: If checked, you can customize the rotate angle of the ink file.
Coding type of ink files: Binary or ASCII.
Separate PPF file: This setting becomes available when you set the Version to 3.0. If
checked, it divides one PPF ink file into several files, each file corresponding to a specific
separation. E.g. if the input file contains 4 separations, CMYK, it would then generate 4
PPF files, separately describing the ink setting for the C, M, Y and K separations.
Separator of color plate name: After the separation, characters like C, M, Y, K may
appear at the end of the PPF file name, representing the separation. A separator may also
exist in front of this suffix, and it may be “-” or “_”, and can be specified here. Sample of
PPF file name: 12_10_11_Calibration_Test_pdf_p0001_2540_C.ppf
Character for gray: A character at the end of the PPF file name, representing the Gray
separation, and it can be K or G.
Related rotation for back/front: If checked, the rotate directions for both the front
and back sides of the ink file will be related. The front side is rotated according to the
Rotation setting, while the back side is rotated by the same degree but in an opposite
direction. For instance, if Rotation is set to 90 Rotate, the front side will be rotated
clockwise by 90 degree, while the back side will be rotated anticlockwise by 90 degree.
Combine front / back signatures into one PPF: If checked, in case that the input
files are pairs of back and front signatures, it generates one ink file to describe the ink
setting of one pair of signatures. If not, it generates two ink files, one describing the front
side, the other for the back side.
Fixed rules: Named the PPF file using the fixed rules(Name_Front / Name_Back).
Custom rules: Named the PPF file with the characters input in Joint Symbol, Front and
Back input box.

166
16
 Using ElecRoc Client

4.5 Preflight
4.5.1 Use Preflight
Preflight is Founder’s self-developed preflight processing module, providing an optimal
choice for you to use preflight in ElecRoc. Specially designed for pre-press PDF inspection,
Founder preflight functions the same as that the third-party preflight does, i.e. to verify
or check the PDF pages according to your defined checklist, and then generate a preflight
report, so as to avoid any possible print accident.

Figure 2-160

Each job may contain more than one Preflight node, and the preflight checklists for these
nodes may be different from each other. In the job, you can make this node connected
with other node, or make it stand-alone. If connected, it can form an automated preflight
workflow, with PDF Generator and other processor node, and accept automatically the
output files from the prior node in the workflow, regardless of single-page or
multiple-page files. If it exists as a stand-alone node, you need to manually submit the
pages for the inspection.
A job information window pops up during the preflight process, enabling you to monitor
and control the process progress and relevant process information. The preflight
processing speed has been optimized for general customer requirements. But the actual
speed is specific to the page content. It may be slower for some special pages that
contain transparent objects, large image patterns, complex paths, and etc.
After the preflight process, you may see pink and/or red page files in the output file
queue. The page appears in pink if its preflight report contains Warn message, and in
red if the report contains Error message. The red pages will not be automatically
submitted to the next connected node in the workflow.

167
 User Guide

E.g. we can define such an entry in the preflight checklist, Page size is A4, and set the
action to Error. After the preflight inspection, if the page size is exactly A4, i.e. just like
the entry describes, the preflight report will then contain this result, labeling it as Error,
and show this page in red in the output file queue. If the page size is not A4, NOT as the
entry describes, the report will NOT mention this, and the page will then appear in black
in the output file queue.
Please view the detailed result in the preflight report. It is an html report. If you want to
open the report, choose a page (the file instead of the page in case of multiple-page
mode) in the output file queue, then right-click and choose Preflight Report > Open.
The other items Save, Print and Send are used to save, print and send out the report.

Figure 2-161

The top shows a sum of the inspection result, i.e. the quantity of the Errors, Warnings
and Notifications. Below this, it displays the check entries and the result returned, one by
one, and page by page. The result is information about the page objects that meet the
description of the check entries.
Click the page number at the right, and you can open the file in Acrobat and use the
preflight plug-in to position these objects.
Right-click a checked page (any page in case of multiple-page mode) and choose
Preflight Navigator, and you can then open the file in Acrobat, so that you can position
the objects with Error, Warning or Notification in the file, by using the Acrobat preflight
plug-in. The plug-in must be installed beforehand.

168
16
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-162

By choosing from the Acrobat main menu Founder Plug-Ins > ElecRoc Preflight >
Positioning, you open a floating panel on the Acrobat window. Expand the types of
Errors, Warnings or Notifications, and double-click one of them, and you can see one of
the objects in that type on the page, labeled by a solid or dashed line rectangle box. The
detailed information about the object is then displayed at the lower-right of the panel,
including size, color space, color, and etc. Click the buttons or to switch among the
objects of same type.
For more information, refer to Appendix C.2 Preflight Plug-in.

4.5.2 Preflight Checklist

1. Define a Checklist
The setup interface for you to define a checklist is shown as follows:

169
 User Guide

Figure 2-163

The preflight check entries, i.e. the preflight parameters, are sorted into 6 catalogs,
General, Page, Image, Color, Font and Rendering, totaling 14 categories. The left are
catalogs and categories, the right are the items (or entries) contained in a category.
Action types: There is always an action in front of each check entry, and this action may
be Ignore, Notify, Warn, or Error. Ignore means no preflight inspection, while the
other three means to be inspected. These three actions are a classification to the
messages generated after the inspection, as identifiers to show the degree of importance.
E.g. you can enable the entry under the category Page Sizes “Page size is A4”, and set the
action to Warn. After the inspection, if the page size is indeed A4, the report returns a
result message labeled as Warn, but if the page size is NOT A4, the report returns no
message.
Action choosing: The four actions pop up automatically once you place the cursor on
top of the action icon. You can then choose anyone as needed. You can also click the
triangle besides the action icon to get the actions.
Parameter lock-up: Tick the Lock option at the lower-left corner to lock up all the

170
17
 Using ElecRoc Client

parameter setting, so as to prevent any casual modification.

Expand the catalog tree: Tick the Expand Tree option to expand all the catalogs and
categories at the left, and un-tick it to fold them. If you want to manually unfold certain
catalog, please click the little icon in front or double-click the catalog. Choose any
inferior category to show the check entries it contains at the right.
Activate a parameter: To enable and define each category of parameters, you need to
first tick the Enable xxx option at the top, or double-click the category at the left. By
default, most of such options are disabled, the parameters underneath are all in gray,
and corresponding entries will not be checked.
Auto memory: ElecRoc can remember the latest parameter setting in the setup window.
The setting remains the same if you re-tick the Enable xxx option.
Parameter look-over: Click the category Summary at the top of the catalog tree to
view your defined checklist. By default, all the catalogs are folded. You can click the little
icon in front or double-click the catalog to expand the entries it may contain.

2. Preflight Check Entries

1) General
The general items for a preflight inspection. The current version supports temporarily
only the compatibility inspection, i.e. to check the version and format of your PDF file.
 Compatibility

Figure 2-164

PDF version: This entry is to check the version number of your PDF file. The condition
options in the dropdown list include less than, less than or equal to, equal to, more than
or equal to, more than, and not equal to. The versions include PDF 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6
and 1.7.
PDF/X compatibility: To check if your PDF/X is in the specified format. Formats include
PDF/X-1:2001, PDF/X-1a:2001, PDF/X-1a:2003, PDF/X-2:2003, PDF/X-3:2002,
PDF/X-3:2003, and PDF/X-4.
Document: To check if your PDF document is ASCII or Binary.
2) Page
To check the properties of a PDF page.
 Page Size
To check if the page size is the same as the specified.

171
 User Guide

Figure 2-165

Page Size: There are two conditions, is and is not. The size dropdown list provides
standard size options, including A0 (840x1188mm), A1 (594x840mm), A2
(420x594mm), A3 (297x420mm), A4 (210x297mm), A5 (149x210mm), Legal
(216x356mm) and Letter (216x279mm). Choose anyone as needed, or you can also
choose Custom to specify any other size.
Tolerance: A deviation between actual size and specified size is allowed. It supports
both positive and negative values, but always uses the absolute value of your input value.
The tolerance is effective to both the width and length values.
Page Box: You need to specify a proper page box if the page size is defined based on
certain page box. A PDF page may contain more than one page box, such as Crop box,
Media Box, Art Box, Trim Box and Bleed Box.
 Page Contents
To check if the PDF page contains content such as layers, shadings, patterns.

Figure 2-166

172
17
 Using ElecRoc Client

Page is blank: To check if your PDF page is a blank page.

Page contains layers: To check if your PDF page contains layers.
Page contains pattern fills: To check if your PDF page contains pattern fills.
Page contains smooth shadings: To check if your PDF page contains smooth
shadings.
Page contains transparent elements: To check if your PDF page contains transparent
elements.
Spot color is embedded with overprint property: To check if your PDF page contains
spot colors that are embedded with overprint property. The overprint setting embedded
for spot color may be lost during the spot color's conversion toward CMYK or Gray.
Spot color is embedded with transparence property: To check if your PDF page
contains spot colors that are embedded with transparence property. The transparence
setting for spot color may cause unexpected problem during the rasterizing process.
 Page Objects
To check the text and line objects on your PDF page, learning such information as the font
size, the line width, and if the text is knock-out.

Figure 2-167

Text is smaller than _ points: To check if your PDF page contains any text object that
is smaller than the points specified here.

173
 User Guide

Text is smaller than _ points and is colored with _ or more separations: To check
if your PDF page contains any text object that is smaller than the specified points and is
colored with specified or more separations.
Black text knockout: To check if your PDF page contains any text object that is knocked
out.
White text overprint: To check if your PDF page contains any text object that is
overprinted.
Text is invisible: To check if your PDF page contains any text object that is invisible.
Line weight is less than _ points: To check if your PDF page contains any line object
whose line weight is less than the points specified here.
Line weight is less than _ points and is colored with _ or more separations: To
check if your PDF page contains any line object whose line weight is less than specified
points and is colored with specified or more separations.
Line art or clipping path has more than _ nodes: To check if the nodes of the line art
or clipping path on your PDF page are more than the specified number here. The preflight
report returns the actual node number, if it’s bigger than specified.
White graphics overprint: To check if your PDF page contains any white graphic object
that is overprinted.
3) Image
To check the images on your PDF page.
 Image Position
To check the positions of the images, learning that if they are rotated, scaled, and etc.

Figure 2-168

Image is rotated over an angle that is not a multiple of 90: To check if your PDF
page contains any image that is not rotated by an angle of a multiple of 90. The preflight
report returns such image and its basic information, if any. The basic information includes
width and height, bit per component, color space, coordinates, and etc.
Image is flipped: To check if your PDF page contains any image that is flipped or
mirrored. The preflight report returns such image and its basic information, if any.
Image is skewed: To check if your PDF page contains any image that is skewed. The
preflight report returns such image and its basic information, if any.
Image is scaled non-proportionally with scale difference _ %: To check if your

174
17
 Using ElecRoc Client

PDF page contains any image that is scaled non-proportionally and the difference
between the horizontal and vertical scale proportions is bigger than your specified
percentage here. The preflight report returns such image and its basic information, if
any.
 Image Resolution
To check the resolutions of various types of images. In case that the horizontal and
vertical resolutions of an image are different, as long as one of them meets the condition
specified here, the preflight report returns corresponding message.

Figure 2-169
Resolution of color or grayscale image is below _ dpi: To check if your PDF page
contains any color or grayscale image whose resolution is below your specified dpi value.
Resolution of color or grayscale image is above _ dpi: To check if your PDF page
contains any color or grayscale image whose resolution is above your specified dpi value.
Resolution of black and white image is below _ dpi: To check if your PDF page
contains any black and white image whose resolution is below your specified dpi value.
Resolution of black and white image is above _ dpi: To check if your PDF page
contains any black and white image whose resolution is above your specified dpi value.
Image use 16 bits per channel: To check if your PDF page contains any image that
uses 16 bits per channel.
 Image Compression
To check the compression modes of various types of images.

175
 User Guide

Figure 2-170

Color and Grayscale image is: To check if your PDF page contains any color or
grayscale image that is compressed in one of the following selected compression modes,
including JPEG, JPEG2000, ZIP, LZW and Run Length. If you select Not compressed, the
preflight report returns even the image that is not compressed.
Black and white image is: To check if your PDF page contains any black and white
image that is compressed in one of the following selected compression modes.
Image use JPEG compression and compression ratio is higher than _ %: To
check if your PDF page contains any image that is compressed in the JPEG mode and the
compression ratio is higher than the percentage specified here. The ratio is the file size
after compression to that before compression. The lower the value is, the bigger the
compression will be, vice versa. The value ranges 0-100%.
4) Color
To check the color setting of your PDF page.
 Process Color
Mainly to check the color spaces applied in your PDF page.

176
17
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-171

RGB is used: To check if the RGB color space is used in your PDF page.
Calibrated Gray or Calibrated RGB is used: To check if the Calibrated Gray or
Calibrated RGB color space is used in your PDF page.
Lab color is used: To check if the Lab color space is used in your PDF page.
ICC based color is used: To check if the ICC based color space is used in your PDF
page.
Indexed color is used: To check if the Indexed color space is used in your PDF page.
N channel color space is used: To check if the N channel color space is used in your
PDF page.
Ink coverage is higher than _ %: To check if your PDF page contains any CMYK graph
whose total ink coverage is higher than the percentage specified here. The value ranges
0-400%.
 Spot Color
To check the spot color setting in your PDF page.

177
 User Guide

Figure 2-172

Spot color used: To check if your PDF page contains any spot color.
Number of separation is above _: To check if the number of separations in your PDF
page is above the number specified here.
Spot color definition is ambiguous: To check if there is any ambiguous spot color
definition in your PDF page, such as the case that two spot colors have the same name
but different color values.
Spot color has an alternate color space other than CMYK or Gray: To check if your
PDF page contains any spot color that has an alternate color space other than CMYK or
Gray, such as RGB.
Spot color ends on a suffix _: To check if your PDF page contains any spot color that
ends on a suffix specified here. If you enable this entry, you need to choose a suffix in the
dropdown list, including CV, CVC, CU, CVS, CVP, C, U, and M.
 ICC Color
To check the ICC setting in your PDF page.

Figure 2-173
Text or line art _ tagged with ICC: To check if there is any text or line-art object is
tagged with ICC profile in your PDF page.
Image _ tagged with ICC: To check if there is any image object is tagged with ICC
profile in your PDF page.

178
17
 Using ElecRoc Client

5) Font
 Font Type
To check the font types used in your PDF page, no matter if they are embedded or not, or
if they are subset embedded or not. There are five entries, each of them representing a
font type, TrueType, Type1, Type3, Double byte, and Multiple Master.

Figure 2-174

 Font Embedding
To check if there is any font NOT embedded in your PDF page, and if the embedded font
is subset.

Figure 2-175
Font is not embedded: To check if your PDF page contains any font that is NOT
embedded.
Ignore 14 standard PDF fonts: By default, this option is ticked. The 14 standard PDF
fonts are Times-Roman, Times-Bold, Times-Italic, Times-BoldItalic, Courier,
Courier-Bold, Courier-Oblique, Courier-BoldOblique, Helvetica, Helvetica-Bold
Helvetica-Oblique, Helvetica-BoldOblique Symbol, and ZapfDingbats. In general, they
are NOT necessarily to be embedded in the PDF document, for the PDF maker like
Acrobat can provide these fonts.
Embedded font is subset: To check if the embedded font in your PDF page is subset.

179
 User Guide

 Font Name
To check if your PDF page uses one or more specific fonts.

Figure 2-176

To perform this check, tick the Check if the font name is option, then choose an action
and input the font name in the corresponding edit box. You can specify at most 8 font
names.
6) Rendering
 Rendering
To check if your PDF page contains halftone, transfer curve, UCR, BG, and rendering
intent. To further deepen the check to specific page objects, most of the check entries
contain a dropdown list, which provide three options Image, Line and Text, and All. All
refers to the sum of Image and Line and Text objects. Please pay attention to the
setting of this dropdown list.

Figure 2-177
Halftone phase is used for _: To check if your PDF page contains any user-defined
halftone screen setting, i.e. user-defined frequency, angle, and shape. In case that the
source file of your PDF page is a PS file, to perform such a check, you need to select
Preserve halftone info in PDF Generator setup, otherwise, the halftone information in
the file may be removed by PDF Generator.

180
18
 Using ElecRoc Client

Transfer curve is used for _: To check if your PDF page contains any transfer curve.
This curve is generally used for minimizing the dot enlargement, may be applied to only
specific page objects, such as images, or lines and texts.
UCR is used for _: To check if your PDF page contains any UCR information. UCR is
named Under Color Removal. It uses K to replace lot of C, M, Y inks, reducing ink
consumption.
Black Generation is used for _: To check if your PDF page contains any BG information.
BG is named Black Generation, a process of black generation during the image transfer
from RGB to CMYK.
Rendering intent is used: To check if your PDF page uses any rendering intent.
Rendering intent for _ is _: To check the detailed rendering intents for various types
of objects.

181
 User Guide

4.6 Trap
4.6.1 Overview
Founder’s Trap is designed to meet the practical needs for trap process from customers
and the market, enhancing ElecRoc’s trap process capability.
Trap can be a stand-alone ElecRoc processor that may be installed on the server or any
other connected LAN computer. In workflow, Trap can be connected with other node, or
exists as a stand-alone node. If connected, it can stay behind PDF Generator, Preflight,
PDF CMS, or before Imposer, PDF Export, or PDF Rasterizer, to form an automated trap
process workflow.

Figure 2-178
There are two file queues, input and output, under the Trap node. After the process, you
can see the trapped PDF files in the output queue. The result can be viewed through high
resolution thumbnail image, by way of quick preview in the job window, or in an
independent preview window. Moreover, as to the files in the output queue, you can
choose right-click menu item Download to open the output file in Acrobat, checking the
result with the trap plug-in, which is provided with ElecRoc and can be integrated into
Acrobat.

4.6.2 Trap Basics

Trapping is a prepress technique. It consists of creating small overlaps between abutting
colors, spread or choked, in order to mask registration problems on the printing press
later on in the graphical production. As shown in the below, the images contain two colors,
the light and dark grays. The left image represents the original design; the middle
represents misregistration, small gaps showing up as a result of inaccuracies; the right

182
18
 Using ElecRoc Client

shows trapping effect, overlaps being created to fill up the gaps by way of spreading or
choking the two colors.

Original design Misregistration Trapped

Figure 2-179
 Definitions
Trapping objects refer to the image, graph, bitmap, text, line, shading objects in different
colors on the PDF page. The trapping happens at the edges or joints between two
abutting objects. The overlapping area formed by spreading or choking objects are
trapping area, or trapping placement.
 Trapping Types
Trappings are generally sorted into normal and black trappings. Both of them are applied
to all page objects, including the images and small objects mentioned later on in the
image trapping and small object protection.
Normal trapping: It refers to the trapping in general sense, apart from the black
trapping.
Black trapping: Black trapping is special for black objects. If the density for the black
separation is comparatively high, the trapping area should spread underneath the black,
i.e. the black remains unchanged, while the other colors are spread or choked. On the
contrary, if the black is spread or choked, it will cover other colors and make them nearly
invisible. To avoid such case, a special rule is thus applied to the black objects.
 Difference of the Two Types
1) Normal trapping is object-level trapping, happening between the two abutting objects,
and not limited to specific separation of the objects. Black trapping is separation-level
trapping, happening between the black separation and other separation of the black
object, or between the black separation of the black object and the non-black separation
of the abutting object.
2) Trapping placement of normal trapping is controlled by Sliding Trap Limit, and all the
separations of the object may be spread or choked. The trapping area of black trapping
spreads wholly underneath the black separation, i.e. the non-black separations are
spread or choked, the Sliding Trap Limit value doesn’t work.
Sample: The image below contains two abutting objects, one is the yellow square of Y100,
and the other is the black circle of C60 K100. The right is the result after separation.

Figure 2-180

183
 User Guide

If normal trapping happens between the yellow square and the black circle, the C, Y
separations of the black circle and the Y separation of the yellow square may all be spread.
Part of the trapping area may be under the black circle; while part may be over the yellow
square (specific placement can be controlled by parameters).

Figure 2-181

If the black circle is considered as a black object, and thus the black trapping happens
between the yellow square and the black circle, the K separation of the black circle will
then keep unchanged, the non-black separations, including the C of black circle and the
Y of the yellow square, are spread or choked underneath the K separation.
3) The trapping width of black trapping is generally bigger than that of normal trapping
(usually multiplied with a factor of 1.5 or 2).
 Normal trapping Condition
As the prerequisites for an occurrence of normal trapping between two abutting objects,
on the one hand, there must be enough color difference between the two objects,
controlled by Trap parameter Ink Settings > Step Limit, the higher the value, the less
the objects qualified to be trapped; on the other hand, the common density of the two
objects must be within a certain range, less than the specified Trap Rules > Common
Density Limit, the higher the value, the more the qualified objects be.
 Black trapping Condition
The Black Color Limit and Black Density Limit parameters under the Trap Rules tab
control the range of the objects for black trapping. The higher the two values are, the less
the qualified objects would be. Black trapping is applied to opaque spot color objects, but
that whether it is also applied to normal spot colors is controlled by the two parameters.
 Trapping Placement
Black trapping: The trapping area locates between its own black separation and other
separations of the black object, or between the black separation of the black object and
non-black separations of its abutting object. The area spreads entirely under the black
separation, in other words, the non-black separations are spread or choked.
Normal trapping: The trapping area always spreads from the lighter to the darker colors.
Most or all of the area locates under the darker objects, the detailed placement being
controlled by the parameter Sliding Trap Limit. The effect is most obvious when it
happens to a shading object, for that each location in the shading has a distinct color
value, producing a continuous change from darker to lighter colors, or from lighter to
darker, and thus the trapping placement changes subsequently.
1. When Sliding Trap Limit is 0%:

184
18
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-182
2. When Sliding Trap Limit is 100%:

Figure 2-183
3. When Sliding Trap Limit turns to 70%:

Figure 2-184

 Trapping Width
The width of the trapping area is controlled by Founder trap parameter Geometry >
Trap Width. Normal controls the normal trapping width while Black controls that for
black trapping.
Take the following factors into consideration when you specify the trapping width: 1) the
black trapping width is usually bigger than normal trapping (1.5~2 times); 2) obviously
affected by paper quality, generally speaking, the normal trapping width for offset
/coated paper is 0.1~0.3 pt, offset /offset paper is 0.3~0.8 pt, rotary offset/newspaper
0.4~0.8 pt, flexo-printing 0.7~5 pt, and etc; 3) the screen lines per inch also affects,
usually 0.5~2 times of the line width, e.g. if the line width is 0.48 pt in 150 lpi, the
trapping width can then be set to 0.24~0.96 pt; 4) for higher printing quality, the width
should be set to the strict minimum.
Note: In order to highlight the effect of each parameter, the sample figures in this
manual are generated with comparatively higher trapping width, which may be evidently
different from the result in actual production.
 Trapping Color
Normal trapping: The color of the trapping area is controlled by Founder trap parameter
Ink Settings > Color Scaling. The higher the values are, the deeper the color will be.
Black trapping: It is a simple color addition of the black separation and the non-black
separations.

4.6.3 Trap Parameter Setup

1. How to Configure
Double-click the Trap item in Administrator > Processor Management, or
double-click the Trap node in job window, to open the Trap parameter setup window.
Like any other ElecRoc processor, Trap also supports parameter template. To create a
template, choose Administrator > Processor Management > Trap to open the
parameter setup window, configure the parameters as needed, and then choose Load
Parameters > Save As at the lower-left corner of the window.

185
 User Guide

Figure 2-185

2. Trap Parameters
1) Trap Rules
Parameters under this tab are mainly in three groups, Trap Thresholds, Image Trapping,
and Zone Trap. They make rules for the normal, black and image trappings in terms of
the trapping condition, trapping placement, default trapping colors, and control if to
enable the predefined zone trap setting in job.
 Trap Thresholds
These thresholds or limits are used to judge if a trapping happens, the trapping
placement and the default trapping color.
Default Step Limit: The step limit is one of the factors in determining if a normal
trapping happens. The normal trapping happens between two abutting objects only when
their relative color differences on at least two separations are no less than the
corresponding step limits. The Default Step Limit here only defines a default step limit
for each newly-added color separation. ElecRoc finally uses the step limits under the Ink
Settings tab to perform the trapping process.
Common Density Limit: This is one of the factors in determining if a trapping happens.
The normal trapping happens only when the common density of two abutting objects is
no more than the limit specified here. And this limit is also applied to black trapping.
Black Color Limit: One of the factors affecting if a black trapping happens. To be viewed
as the black object qualified for black trapping, the percentage in black color separation
of the object must be no less than the value specified here.

186
18
 Using ElecRoc Client

Black Density Limit: Also one of the factors affecting if a black trapping happens. To be
viewed as the qualified black object, the neutral density of the object must be no less
than the value specified here. The object that meets both the requirements of Black
Color Limit and Black Density Limit will be viewed as black object, and a black
trapping can then happen to it.
Sliding Trap Limit: This parameter controls the trapping placement. Its value ranges
from 0 to 100%. It doesn’t work on the black trapping, or when the trapping placement
between image and graph is set to Center, Choke or Spread.
Default Color Scaling: It is the default value for the Color Scaling parameter
whenever you create a new separation under the Ink Settings tab. The color scaling
controls the color in the trapping area when a normal trapping happens between two
abutting objects.
 Image Trap
Placement: This parameter controls the trapping placement when trapping happens
between an image and another abutting object. Here the image may be a 1-, 8- or 16-bit
image; another object may be an image, a graph or a text object. Therefore, this
parameter works on the Trap image to object and Trap image to image, mentioned
follow-up, but the Trap 1 bit image is NOT affected in most cases. That whether an
image and its abutting object are qualified for a normal or black trapping, is determined
by rules mentioned previously. When qualified, whether a trapping happens is yet
controlled by the three checkboxes, Trap image to object, Trap image to image and
Trap 1-bit image.
1) Automatic. The image is viewed as a normal object, and trapped as per normal or
black trapping rules, but the trapping placement is calculated based on the colors at the
image edge, spread from lighter to deeper colors, unrelated to Sliding Trap Limit.
2) Center. This option is applied to most of the image trappings. The trapping always
happens at the middle between the image and its abutting object, unrelated to the
objects’ densities and color values.

Automatic Center
Figure 2-186
3) Choke. For the trap between image and graph, the trapping area is based on the
image, and choked inside the image; for that between image and image, the area is

187
 User Guide

based on the top image, and choked inside the top image.
4) Spread. For the trap between image and graph, the trapping area is based on the
image, and spread outside the image; for that between image and image, the area is
based on the top image, and spread outside the top image.
Note: Irrespective of what option is enabled, if the black trapping conditions are met,
then the trapping happens as per the black trapping rule, i.e. other separation is spread
or choked under the black separation. The black trapping is prior to normal trapping.
Quality: The quality of image trapping falls into three levels, normal, higher and best.
Normal easily produces large trapping area, while Best enables higher color
preciseness.
Trap image to object: Controls if a trapping happens between an image and a graph or
text object, when the trapping conditions are met.
Trap image to image: Controls if a trapping happens between two images, when the
trapping conditions are met.
Trap 1-bit image: Controls if a trapping happens between a 1-bit image and an abutting
object, when the trapping conditions are met. Here, the abutting object may be an image,
a graph, a text or a 1-bit image; and the 1-bit image is an object different from image,
graph and text, because its color is NOT limited only to black or white, each of its pixels
is either colored or colorless, the colored pixels are colored with the same color, the
colorless pixels can reveal other object underneath, if any.
1) When trapping happens between 1-bit image and other image, the trapping
placement is controlled by Image Trap > Placement. If the placement is set to center,
or spread, or automatic, the other image is spread; if the placement is set to choke, the
1-bit image is spread. The following figure shows that the 1-bit image is spread.

Figure 2-187

2) When trapping happens between 1-bit image and a graph, or a text, or a 1-bit image,
the trapping placement is always under the deeper object, similar to the case when the
Sliding Trap Limit is set to 100%.
1-bit image and a graph:

188
18
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-188

1-bit image and text:

Figure 2-189

Two 1-bit images:

Figure 2-190

Fine Bitmap: It becomes available when the Trap 1 Bit image option is selected. If
checked, it can enhance the preciseness of the 1 bit image trapping, especially that at the
common boundary of multiple overlapping 1 bit images. This option may increase the
trap processing time.
Image internal trapping: This option is recommended for vector images or images
with edges in sharply transitional colors (like cartoons). If checked, the trapping happens
inside the darker edge, to keep better visual effect.
 Zone Trap
Before you use ElecRoc, you may use a front-side application, such as Founder’s ElecRoc
trapping plug-in that can be integrated in Acrobat, to predefine trap settings in the source
file. In this case, you can check the options here to enable the predefined trap settings.
For details on ElecRoc trap plug-in, refer to Appendix C.3 in Part 4.
Area trapping in job: You may use a front-side application to specify some areas on
each page of the source file, and define various trapping settings for them. Check this
option if you want to enable such area trapping settings.

189
 User Guide

Global trapping in job: Check this option if you want to use the global trap settings
predefined in the source file, if any. The global trap settings are applied to the entire page,
not overriding the area trap settings defined separately.
Ink settings in job: If checked, the ink settings predefined in the source file, including
the colors, densities and types, will be used.
By default, the three options above are all unchecked.
2) Geometry

Figure 2-191
 Trap Width
It refers to the width of the overlaps when trapping happens between two abutting
objects.
Normal: The width for normal trapping.
Black: The width for black trapping, i.e. the width that other separation is spread or
choked under the black separation.
Unit: The unit of trapping width, mm, inch, or point.
 Trap Shape
Here you can define the geometric shapes of the two ends and joints in trapping areas.
End: This controls the shape of the ends in trapping area. If you choose Miter, the end
is tailored into miters; if you choose Overlap, the end is still the overlap, like the rest of
the trapping area. See the following figures, the middle color refers to the trapping area.

Figure 2-192

Joint: This parameter controls the shape of the joint.

190
19
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-193

Bevel: A triangle is tailored off at the joint to form a bevel.

Round: To round the joint with a circle that uses the trap width as the radius and abuts
upon the two outer edges of the cross overlaps.
Miter: Two identical isosceles triangles are tailored off at the joint.
3) Small Object Protection
When trapping happens to small objects, including small texts and thin lines, these
objects may easily become thinner and smaller, producing a visual effect deviated from
the expectation. In this case, you can properly reduce the trap width to protect them.

Figure 2-194

 Small Text
Settings here aim to reduce the trap width when trapping happens to the texts whose
sizes are no more than the specified size.
Size Limit: If the texts qualified for normal or black trapping are smaller or equal to the
specified font size here, they will be considered as small objects, and thus their trap
widths will then be reduced according to the percentage defined by Trap Width Scaling.
The value range is 0.0~100.0, in the unit of Pt. The default is 6 Pt. 0 represents no
protection.
Trap Width Scaling: Here you can define the percentage to scale down the trap width.
The value range is 0.0~100.0 in the unit of %. 0 represents no trapping to small texts.
 Thin Line
Similar to small texts, settings here can reduce the trap width when trapping happens to
the lines whose widths are no more than the specified value.
Size Limit: If the lines qualified for normal or black trapping are thinner or equal to the
specified width here, they will be considered as small objects, and thus their trap widths
will then be reduced according to the percentage defined by Trap Width Scaling. The
value range is 0.0~100.0, in the unit of Pt. The default is 0 Pt, representing no protection.
Trap Width Scaling: Here you can define the percentage to scale down the trap width.
The value range is 0.0~100.0 in the unit of %. 0 represents no trapping to small lines.
4) Ink Settings

191
 User Guide

Options under this tab are mainly designed for you to define the ink information used in
trap process. Correct ink information, including the color, density, ink type, step limit,
and color scaling, plays an important role in determining the trap condition, type,
placement, width and the color.

Figure 2-195
 Ink Settings
Color: Input the color separations in the file into the table, and define their ink properties.
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black are four basic separations, and thus can NOT be deleted
or renamed. If the file contains spot color, you can click the icon at the upper-right of
the table to add a spot color separation. By default, the Color name of the new
separation is spot plus a number suffix; the Density is 1; the Type is normal; the Step
Limit and Color Scaling values are initialized according to the Default Step Limit and
Default Color Scaling values under the Trap Rules tab. After you add a separation,
you can re-define its properties as needed, or click the icon to delete it, if unneeded.
Hint: You can use the right-click menu item Page Info to view what spot colors your PDF
page contains.
Density: It refers to the density of the ink, with a valid range of 0-10, and a precision of
three decimal places. The densities defined here will be applied in the calculations that
are involved in determining the trap condition and trap placement.
Type: The ink types for CMYK are the same Normal, and can NOT be changed. But for
spot color inks, there are four optional types.
1) Normal: also called semi-transparent, in which a spot color is considered as a special
process color that has similar trap properties as CMYK colors. The objects output with the
normal ink will either override or be override by other ink.
As shown in the below, the red circle is a spot color object located on top of two squares.
The relation between the circle and the squares is overprint in the left diagram and
knock-out in the right.
If the red circle is output with normal ink, at the left, i.e. when the relation is overprint,
the trapping doesn’t happen between the circle and the squares, but happens between
the two squares (specifically the joint under the circle); at the right, when the relation is
knock-out, the trapping happens between it and the two squares.

192
19
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-196

2) Transparent: No trapping happens between the transparent ink and any other ink,
but the non-transparent ink objects underneath can be trapped. Polish oil is an example
of transparent ink. As shown below, the trapping doesn’t happen between the circle and
the squares in both cases, but in the left case, it happens between the two squares
underneath.

Figure 2-197
3) Opaque: The trapping happens at the edge of the opaque ink object, but doesn’t
happen yet between the objects underneath. Black is actually an opaque ink. The black
trapping rule is applied between the opaque object and other ink object.

Figure 2-198

4) Opaque Ignore: The trapping never happens between this ink and any other ink, and
never between the abutting objects underneath. This type of inks is mostly found in
special art processes like gold and silver.

Figure 2-199

Step Limit: It is one of the factors that determine if a trapping happens between two
abutting objects. ElecRoc uses this value to calculate if the color difference between two
abutting object in one separation is big enough for a trapping. The default value
whenever you add a spot color separation comes from the Default Step Limit
parameter under the Trap Rules tab. If the default value doesn’t meet your actual need,
you can change it as follows, click the value in the table to activate an edit box, then input
the actual value and press Enter. You can input the value by typing, or by copying/pasting,
or by clicking the up/down buttons aside. Moreover, you can also change the value by
right-clicking the separation and choosing Change Step Limit to. Values for all the
separations may be different from each other, if needed.

193
 User Guide

Color Scaling: This parameter controls the trap color in the trapping area when a
normal trapping happens between two abutting objects. The Default Color Scaling
parameter under the Trap Rules tab determines the default value for each newly-added
spot color separation. The method to change this value is the same as that for Step Limit,
by way of clicking to activate an edit box, or by using the right-click menu item Change
color scaling to. Values for all the separations may be different.
 Trap Sequence
If you have defined opaque inks in the table, you can then use the icons and at the
upper-right to change their positions in the table, so as to adjust their trapping sequence.
If a trapping happens between two abutting opaque inks in the table, the ink at the
bottom side keeps unmoved, the trapping happens to the ink at the top side.
For example, provided that you want to use two opaque inks, the gold and silver, to
output two abutting objects, if the gold is output first, and the trapping happens to the
silver ink, then you need to position the gold ink below the silver in the table, vice versa.
 Trap Profile
The introduction to trap profile aims to simplify your work on configuring the ink settings.
This file records information on the separations and the corresponding ink densities and
types. You can save the ink setting information in current table as a trapping ink profile
into ElecRoc system, for public use by all the Client users. To do this, click the icon at
the upper-right of the table to open a dialog box, input the file name and then click OK.
Note: The trapping profiles in your ElecRoc system can be managed centrally in
Resources > Profile Resource > Trap. Operations like creating, editing, importing,
exporting are all supported. The spot color related information on your PDF page can also
be saved as a trapping profile under the PDF Generator node. Moreover, you can check
the Ink settings in job option under the Trap Rules tab to use the pre-defined ink
information in the file.
To load a trapping profile, please simply choose the one you want to use from the Ink Set
dropdown list. Note that the Step Limit and Color Scaling values will turn to their
default values after you load an ink profile.
 Auto Spot Color Policy
It’s recommended that you manually define all the ink information on the spot color
separations, including the ink densities, the types, the step limits, the color scaling, and
the sequence, to ensure the quality and preciseness of spot color traps.
However, at the same time, ElecRoc also provides you with an auto process mechanism.
This mechanism can automatically detect the spot colors in the file, calculate their ink
densities according to the spot color values and the CMYK ink densities, determine if a
trapping happens based on the calculated densities, the default types and step limits,
and then trap if qualified. The normal trapping is performed using the default color
scaling value in this case.
The Spot Color Policy parameter controls how to auto process the spot colors from the
file, in case that these colors are not defined yet in the ink setting table.
Use spot color table: If chosen, ElecRoc automatically calculates the ink densities of
the undefined spot colors, and then determines if a trapping goes based on the calculated
densities, the default types and step limits, and finally performs the trapping if qualified.
The spot colors defined already in the ink table are processed as predefined.
Use spot color in jobs: ElecRoc automatically calculates the ink densities of all the spot

194
19
 Using ElecRoc Client

colors, and then determines if a trapping goes and performs the trapping if qualified. The
predefined ink settings in the table become ineffective.
No trapping for spot color: ElecRoc performs no trapping at all to the spot colors
undefined in the ink table.
Note: When automatically detecting the spot colors, in case that the color name contains
unidentified characters, ElecRoc will make a proper character substitution.
5) Others

Figure 2-200

Time Out: If the trap process time for a file exceeds the value specified here, ElecRoc will
automatically stop the process. This setting stops only the overtime files, i.e. the process
on the follow-up file continues as usual if the current file is stopped. The unit is minute,
and one decimal place is allowed. The default value is 0, indicating no time out setting.
Enable Preview: If checked, a thumbnail image will be generated after the trap process,
with the purpose for you to preview the trap result.

4.7 Hot Folder

A hot folder refers to a specially specified folder over network or in your local computer.
ElecRoc can automatically identify files in this folder, and submit them to PDF Generator
for process. Once such a folder has been specified, you can submit files to ElecRoc
system by simply putting files into the folder. It not only provides a flexible, easy and fast
way to submit files, but also improves greatly the working efficiency.
To configure a hot folder, perform as follows:
1. Create a shared folder on any PC in the local area network where ElecRoc is located.
2. Open the General Settings window on ElecRoc Server, and then add the folder path
under the Input Directory tab.
3. Start up ElecRoc Client, open or create a job and add the Hot Folder node, then
right-click it to open the parameter setup window.

195
 User Guide

Figure 2-201

Please configure the parameters as needed.

Hot Folder Path: Click Add to open a Select Hot Folder dialog box and choose a
directory as the path of the hot folder. The dialog box lists all the source file directories
configured from ElecRoc Server. Don’t choose the directory that has already been chosen
as the hot folder for other job. Click Remove to delete unneeded path, while Remove
All to delete all the added paths, if needed.
File Format: The hot folder can detect and submit files in such formats as: PRN, TIFF,
PDF, PS, and EPS. Check the formats you want the hot folder to detect and submit.
Search in subdirectory: If checked, the subdirectories in the hot folder, if any, will also
be searched for source files to be submitted.
Priority: The default process priority for the source files entering into ElecRoc workflow
by way of the hot folder.
After processing action: There are two options, Move all jobs to Ready folder and
No action, according to the needing to choose one of them.
4. Return to the job window after the configuration. Add the PDF Generator node behind
the hot folder and make them connected.
By default, the Hot Folder is held. Right-click it and choose Resume to run it. When being
running, the node becomes green. Now you can copy the source files into this folder to
process them.

196
19
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-202
If you choose the node, you can see all the source files detected and submitted by the hot
folder in the job window. And if you are authorized to modify the hot folder, you can also
delete or move these source files with right-click menu items.

197
 User Guide

Chapter 5 Imposer
5.1 Imposer Parameter Setup

Figure 2-203
The imposer parameter setup window opened in job window is shown as above. Note that
the Templates tab will disappear if this window is opened from Administrator >
Processor Management > Imposer.

5.1.1 Parameters
1. General
Max. Pages: It refers to the total amount of pages in all imposer templates you are
using in current node (under the Templates tab you can specify the templates to be
used). The value is unavailable for manual modification; ElecRoc automatically sums up
and displays it.
Bind Type: Six binding types are available, Perfect Bound, Saddle Stitch, Inflexed Stitch,
Nested saddle stitch, Cut and stack, Cut stack and saddle stitch.

2. Preview

198
19
 Using ElecRoc Client

Resolution: You can set the resolution of the signature preview. The resolution value
has three options: 36 DPI, 72 DPI and 144 DPI. We recommend 36 DPI on Mac client and
72 DPI on PC client. If the signature is too large, it is recommended lowering the
resolution.

3. Proof Line
Generate proof line: If checked, the proof line will be printed on the signature. After
the print, you can then fold the signature along the proof line.

4. Creep Control
When signatures are folded, the image area of the inside pages may move slightly. To
compensate the movement of image area, you need to set up creep parameters. In a
Saddle Stitch job, the creep value takes effect between signatures.
Inner creep value: You can set the creep value of each page. Specify a positive
Horizontal or Vertical number to move the image area toward the binding; specify a
negative one to move the image area away from the binding.
Outer creep value: It refers to the initial movement of the image areas on all the pages.
Specify a positive Horizontal or Vertical number to move the image area away from the
binding; specify a negative one to move the image area towards the binding.
Scale: If checked, the page size will be scaled according to the value of creep.

5. Location Control
You can move the PDF pages horizontally or vertically in a page of imposition template.
Odd Page: The Horizontal and Vertical control separately the horizontal and vertical
movements of odd pages. If the value you entered is positive, the page moves rightward
or upward. If the value is negative, the page moves leftward or downward.
Even Page: The Horizontal and Vertical control separately the horizontal and vertical
movements of even pages. If the value is positive, the page moves rightward or upward.
If the value is negative, the page moves leftward or downward.

6. Bleed Control
This setting restricts the area within which bleeds are printed beyond the trim edge of the
sheet or page.
Top/Bottom/Left/Right: They control the bleed margins beyond the four edges. The
bleeds can be output automatically or as per your specified values.
Auto Bleed: If checked, only the bleed margin within gutter of a page will be output.

7. Others
Lacking pages and report error: When it remains unchecked, ElecRoc allows the
imposer to automatically add blank page(s) to signature, if needed. Related operation
message is reported in pink in the job’s process information. You can check this option to
disable the auto-addition. The number of the pages submitted to Imposer must be
integral times of that in the imposition template, otherwise, ElecRoc issues a warning
message and interrupts the process.
Adjust layout size according to job size: If checked, you can submit pages whose
page sizes are different from that defined in the template layout, the small page size in
the template will according to the input file size and Bleed Size to adjust.
For example, suppose the page size defined in template’s layout is A4, and in this case

199
 User Guide

you can submit pages in size of A4+ or A4-. After the submission, ElecRoc will impose the
pages according to the layout’s attributes, such as page number, page sequence, and
page space, and in this case, ElecRoc won’t enlarge or reduce the size of the actual pages,
and won’t cut the page content either.
Check page size: To check up the size of the pages you have submitted to the Imposer.
If found the size is different from that defined in the template, it issues a report and stops
the imposing process. When checked, you can further set a tolerance value.
Note: If you have inserted a comment mark of ($JOB) in the template, please input the
detailed comment here.

5.1.2 Templates
Parameters under this tab are designed mainly for you to choose the template(s) to be
used by the current imposer node.

Figure 2-204

1. Job Templates
This list shows the imposition templates available for the current job. They may come

200
20
 Using ElecRoc Client

from the module Resources > Imposer Template > Imposer, or may be the ones
temporarily created.
 Choose a template
You can choose one or more templates from ElecRoc system. Right-click anywhere in the
list area, and then choose Select.

Figure 2-205
This dialog box lists all the templates under the current user, choose as needed.
 Create a template
You can launch the ElecRoc Imposer program to create an imposition template for
temporary use in current job, by choosing the right-click menu item New. For details,
refer to section 5.2 Create Imposer Template.
Or you can also choose the right-click menu item New JDF to create a Preps template.
 Edit a template
You can launch the ElecRoc imposer program to temporarily edit a chosen template in the
list. If the template comes from the template management module, the edition here
doesn’t change the original template in the management module. Double-click the
template or right-click and choose Edit to open the editing window.
 More right-click operations
With the right-click menu in the list area, you can also perform the following operations.

201
 User Guide

Delete: To delete the chosen template(s) from the list.

Select All: To select all the templates in the list.
Refresh: To refresh the list. E.g. you can click it if you want to immediately see the new
template after you have created it.
Sort: To sort the templates by the name or by the time created.
 Preview a template
When you choose a template in the list, you will see its thumbnail image for preview in
the bottom area of the window. You can zoom in and out the image by clicking / , or
by dragging the right mouse button.
Job Template Path: The location of the job templates (i.e. the templates in the list) in
your ElecRoc system.
Part: Here displays the part(s) and total pages in all templates in the Signatures list.

2. Signatures
This list shows the imposition templates to be used by the current imposer node and the
times they will be used.
The right-click menu items and parameter related to this list include:
Delete: To delete the chosen template(s) in the list.
Empty: To remove all the templates in the list.
Refresh: To refresh the list.

3. Configure Template(s)
From the Job Templates list, choose the template(s) you want to use at the current
imposer node, and then click , to open the following dialog box. Enter the times you
want to repeat the selected template(s) and click OK, to add the selected template(s) to
the Signatures list.

Figure 2-206

Note: If you want to move multiple templates at once, just press the Ctrl key and select
the templates one by one. And then click the right-headed arrow .
Times of repetition: The times you want to use the current template(s) to repeat the
imposition. This number is shown in brackets behind the template in the Signatures list.
For example, suppose the current template consists of 4 pages, but we need to submit
and process 8 pages. If we repeat only once, then only 4 pages can be imposed, while the
rest 4 cannot. But if we repeat twice, then all the 8 pages can be imposed at one time.
With the button , you can delete a chosen template from the list; can move a
template upward in the list, and move a template downward. In case that the list

202
20
 Using ElecRoc Client

contains more than one template, ElecRoc uses them in sequence to impose your
submitted pages.

5.1.3 Name
Here you can customize the naming rule for the signatures generated in the imposition.

Figure 2-207

Enable: If checked, the naming rule defined here is used; otherwise, ElecRoc uses a
default rule.
Name: Here you can specify the fields contained in the signature name, including job
name, node ID, file name, surface name, date, signature, sheet ID and sheet name. The
surface name, date and signature ID can be customized.
A sample name is shown below the setting.
Note: Do not define same naming rule for the various imposer nodes in the same job.

5.2 Create Imposer Template

5.2.1 Quick Start
This section brings you briefly to the usage of the imposer program.

1. Start the Program

Do any of the two operations as follows:
 Right-click the Imposer node in your job and choose Template Manager;
 Double-click the Imposer node in your job to open its parameter setup window,
and then switch to the Templates tab, right-click in the Job Templates list
area and choose New.
Note: In the second way, once started, the program displays a New Template dialog
box. You may specify the parameters and click OK (refer to the next sections for details)
to create a template, or click Cancel to enter into the main interface of the program.

203
 User Guide

Figure 2-208

2. Create Template
1. The New Template window is shown as follows. You can click the toolbar icon New
Template to open it when you have entered in the program window.

Figure 2-209

204
20
 Using ElecRoc Client

2. Input the template name in the Template Name edit box.

3. Define a sheet.
1) Input the sheet name in the Sheet Settings\Name edit box.
2) Choose one from the two options From Paper and From Plate, located at the
upper-left corner. Here we take From Plate as example, i.e. to create a sheet based on
a plate. Such sheet can contain punch area, punch marks, center marks, and side guide
marks.
3) Choose a method from the Printing Method dropdown list.
4) Specify the sheet size from the Plate dropdown list. You can customize this size.
5) Specify the paper size from the Paper dropdown list. Here you can also customize the
size. The paper size is usually less than the plate size.
4. Click OK.
Note: If you want your template to contain more than one sheet, you can choose the
main menu item Resource > New Sheet to add another. The setup window for the new
sheet is similar with that in the new template setup window.
The new template and the sheet appear in the program window.
Now you can add sheet objects, including layout, pages, and marks, to the sheet.

Figure 2-210

Note: Some panes and panels on the program window are allowed to be hided or

205
 User Guide

adjusted, so that there can be more space for specific pane or panel. As shown in the
above figure, you can click the tab Template at the left, to hide the template pane, so
that you can get more space for the sheet editing area.

3. Add Layout
Click the toolbar icon New Layout.

Figure 2-211

1. Specify the page size and direction in the Page Property area.
2. Specify the rows and columns of the pages, and the alignment mode in the Layout
Properties area.
3. Other parameters, if needed, can also be configured, such as the margins.
4. Click OK.

206
20
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-212

After you have added a layout into the sheet, you may need to define some properties for
the layout and the pages contained in the layout, especially the page number.
By default, page number for all the front sides is set to 1 and that for all the back sides
is set to 2. You have two ways to re-define the page number. 1) Choose a page, and then
in the property panel located at the bottom of the window, re-set the number in the
Content > Front/Back edit boxes. Or 2) choose the icon in the toolbar, to obtain a
Set page number dialog box, with the cursor turning to .

Figure 2-213

The Front and Back edit boxes display numbers for the front and back page sides. Click
the page you want to number, the displayed front and back number will be assigned to
your clicked page. By default, the two numbers in the Set page number dialog box
increase in succession as you click on the pages. If you don’t want to use the successive
number, you can manually input anyone else.

207
 User Guide

Note: If you press down the Shift button at the same time, the page number for the
pages on each side will be set to the same.

4. Add Pages
You can also add blank pages to the sheet, instead of a layout.
1. Click the toolbar icon New blank page.

Figure 2-214

2. Input the number of pages, the width and height of each page, and then click OK.

Figure 2-215

208
20
 Using ElecRoc Client

Drag the pages to proper positions, and if needed, configure other properties. Properties
for each page can be configured by way of the property panel at the bottom of the
window, and more operations can also be performed, such as alignment, rotation, layer
adjustment and etc, with help of the toolbar icons. Please refer to section 5.2.5 for
details.

5. Add Marks
Choose the Mark tab at the left of the program window, and then choose a mark, drag
it to proper position on the sheet. Mark properties, including position, direction, line
width, line length, block size, can be re-defined, if needed.

Figure 2-216

6. Submit & Upload Template

Click the toolbar icon Submit Template. Confirm the name of your template, and
then click OK. In this way, you can submit it to the current job.

209
 User Guide

Figure 2-217

ElecRoc pops up message to inform that the template is submitted successfully. Close the
message and switch to the job window, open again Imposer’s parameter setup window,
then you can see the submitted template under the Templates tab.
You can also click the toolbar icon Upload Template to upload the template into
ElecRoc, for public use by all other jobs.

5.2.2 Create Template

All the template-related operations and functions in this program include:

1. Template Directory

Figure 2-218

A pane is expanded when you click the tab Template at the left. It shows all the
templates available in your ElecRoc system, i.e. those you have uploaded for public use.
The Imposition Template directory is a dedicated directory designed for classification and
management of the imposition templates. It is the root directory, under which you can
store straight your templates, or you can also create a sub-directory underneath.
To create a directory, first, choose an existing directory, e.g. the root directory, as the
superior directory, then, click the Preference icon or right-click, and choose Create

210
21
 Using ElecRoc Client

Directory, and then, input the directory name, and click OK.
With the right-click menu items or items from the Preference menu, you can delete,
rename, or import templates into, any sub-directory.
Right-click menu items are also available for the templates within the template
directories. With them, template-related operations can be performed.

2. Create New Template

You can create a new template by way of:
 Click the toolbar icon ;
 Right-click on the Template pane or the top blank part of the template
editing area and choose New Template;
 Open the Preference menu and choose New Template;
 Choose from the main menu File > New.

3. Open/Close Template
If you want to open one of the templates inside the template directory at the left of the
program window, just double-click the template to open it in the right editing area.
If you want to open an outside template, please click the toolbar icon , or choose from
the main menu File > Open, and then find out your template from the pop-up dialog box
and open it.
More than one template can be opened in the editing area. When a template is opened,
a tab named with the template name will appear at the top of the editing area.
You can click the icon in front of the tab, or double-click the tab, or right-click on blank
area and choose Close, Close Other, Close All, to close the opened template(s).

4. Edit Template
You need to perform a series of editing operations, such as configuring sheet properties
or creating more sheets, configuring layout, adding pages, and adding marks.
1) Configure and add sheet
The sheet properties, including the plate and paper size and other properties can be
re-defined on the property panel once you choose the sheet. Besides, you can create
more than one sheet for your template. For details about sheet, refer to section 5.2.3.
2) Add layout
The layout is a group of blank pages orderly-arranged in a specific layout. You can add a
layout into each sheet. For details on how to create and configure a layout, refer to
section 5.2.4.
3) Add pages
You can add blank page separately instead of adding layout. Refer to section 5.2.5 for
details.
4) Add marks
To add a mark, choose a mark under the Mark tab at the left of the program window,
and then drag it to the sheet. After you have added a mark, you can re-define its
properties on the property panel. For more details, refer to section 5.2.6.

5. Save Template

211
 User Guide

Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the main menu File > Save, to save the
template with your specified name and destination. In this way, you will not lose the
template even if you exit the program, the job, or ElecRoc Client.
Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the main menu File > Save as, and you can save
the current template with another name and destination.
If you close the program without saving your template, ElecRoc will pop up message
suggesting you to save it.

6. Submit Template
After you have finished the creating of the template, you can submit it to the current job.
Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the main menu File > Submit to open the
Submit Template dialog box. Confirm the template name and then click OK.

7. Upload Template
If you click the toolbar icon , or choose from the main menu File > Upload, you can
upload the currently-opened template into ElecRoc, for public use by all other jobs.

Figure 2-219

The dialog box lists all the templates existing in the ElecRoc system, saved under the
dedicated directory named Imposition Template and its sub-directories.
Choose the directory or a sub-directory and specify the name, and then click OK to
upload. If needed, you can use the icons , , to create a new sub-directory, delete
an unneeded one, or rename.

8. Export, Import, Copy, Delete

212
21
 Using ElecRoc Client

Choose a template or directory under the Template tab, and then right-click to open
a short-cut menu. By using the items herein, you can export, import, copy, delete and
clear template.
Export a template: Export the template from ElecRoc to specified destination.
Import a template: Import a template into ElecRoc.
Copy a template: Copy the selected template to form a new one.
Delete template: Delete the selected template(s).
The above menu items can also be gained by clicking the Preference icon at the
upper-right of the template list.

5.2.3 Create Sheet

A template is composed of one or more sheets, on which you can then add objects such
as layout, page, and mark.

1. Create New Sheet

By way of the New Sheet setup window, you can create a new sheet for your current
template.

Figure 2-220

This window can be opened by any of the following methods:

 Every time when you create a new template; the setup window for your new
template contains the setup parameters for a new sheet;
 Click the toolbar icon ;
 Choose from the main menu Resource > New Sheet;
 At the top of the template editing area, click the toolbar icon .
1) From Paper

213
 User Guide

As shown above, choose From Paper at the upper-left corner of the window. In this case,
you will create a sheet based on a paper defined by the Paper parameters.
Choose a paper from the Paper dropdown list in the New Sheet window. This list
provides a variety of optional papers. The paper properties, including manufacturer, color
of paper white, paper thickness, width and height, are displayed in the below once you
have chosen a paper, but not editable, you can switch to the Paper tab (at the left of
the program window) to modify the paper properties, if needed.
If the optional papers do not meet your actual need, you can choose Custom, and then
input specific paper size in the then activated Width and Height boxes. You can click the
button to exchange the width and height. Manufacturer, Paper White, and Paper
Thickness are optional parameters, in which you can input related descriptions.
2) From Plate
Your sheet can directly base on the plate, i.e. you can make the sheet size equal the plate
size, and on the sheet, reserve a punch area, add the punch marks, center marks, and
the side guide. In the New Sheet window, choose From Plate at the upper-left corner.

Figure 2-221

Parameters then can be divided into two parts, Plate Property and Paper Properties.
You need to specify a plate by way of the Plate Property parameters, at this moment,
the Paper can be viewed as the area available for the imposing on the plate.
In the editing window, the largest area (in a light gray background, by default)
represents the sheet based on the Plate Property settings. It consists of a punch area,
the punch marks, the center marks, the side guide, and the paper. The default
background color for the punch area is slightly darker than that for the sheet. The blank
area without any default background color is defined by the Paper Properties
parameters, representing the area available for the imposing, and usually smaller than
the plate. The background colors for the plate, punch area, and the paper can all be
customized.

214
21
 Using ElecRoc Client

The plate and paper properties include:

 Plate properties
Plate: Choose a plate type from the Plate dropdown list. This list provides some
commonly-used plate sizes. The plate properties, including device type, width, height,
punch area, side guide, center marks, punch marks, are displayed in the below once you
have chosen a plate, but not editable, you can switch to the Plate tab (at the left of the
program window) to re-define the plate properties.
If there is no suitable plate for your demand, you can choose Custom, to activate the
Plate Property and Plate Marks parameters, including:
Device Type: Optional, here you can input any related descriptive information.
Width, Height: Here you can input specific plate size. The button enables you to
exchange the width and height.
Punch Area: If you need to punch in the later-on plate making, you can reserve a special
area on the sheet for the punching. This parameter controls the width of the punch area.
Its position is determined by the Benchmarks parameter below, it may be at the left,
right, top or bottom side of the plate. If you don’t need the punch area, you can set the
value to 0.
Punch Mark: ElecRoc adds a punch mark at the center of the punch area.

Figure 2-222
Center mark: If checked, ElecRoc adds a kind of line marks at the center of the four
paper sides. Here you can also define the line width and length for this mark.
Side Guide: If checked, it adds a mark as onto the sheet, for the side guide on the
printing press to precisely position the paper. Note that this setting may be of no effect in
case that the press model does not install the side guide. Checking it, you can further
define the length, width, line width, position of the mark, the sheet side(s) on which it
appear, and the separations on which it will be output. The Left and Right boxes control
which side(s) of the sheet it appears on. The separation options include C, M, Y, K and
Spot Color. E.g. if you do not want the mark to appear on the spot color separation, you
can let the Spot Color box unchecked.
Benchmarks: It controls the position of the side guide mark. There are four options: top,
bottom, left, and right, as shown in the below. In the caption such as left/top, the former
refers to the position of the punch area, the latter the position of the side guide mark.

215
 User Guide

left/ top right/ bottom up/ left bottom/ right

Figure 2-223

 Paper properties
The Paper and Paper Properties settings are the same as that mentioned in the section
on how to create a sheet based on a paper.
Paper Position: It refers to the paper’s position on the plate. The default position is
centering, i.e. the top and bottom margins are equal, and the left and right margins are
equal, too. In this case, the four margins are calculated automatically by ElecRoc based
on the plate and paper sizes. If you uncheck the Center box, you can activate the four
margin edit boxes, in which you can input custom values. Note that, the sum of the top
and bottom margins, as well as that of the left and right margins, limited by the plate and
paper sizes, are fixed. Therefore, if the top margin is changed, the bottom margin will
change accordingly, so do the left and right margins.
3) Printing Method
By way of the Printing Method dropdown list in the New Sheet window, you can create
sheets that support various printing methods. Five printing methods are supported:
single-sided, sheetwise, work and turn, work and tumble, and perfector.

Single-sided Sheetwise Work and Turn Work and Tumble Perfector

Figure 2-224

2. Re-define Sheet
After you have created a sheet, you can choose the sheet in the template editing area to
display its properties on the property panel located at the bottom of the window. Through
these parameters, you can redefine the properties of the sheet.

Figure 2-225

If the sheet is based on a paper, it displays only the paper properties. If the sheet is based

216
21
 Using ElecRoc Client

on a plate, it displays paper properties when you choose the paper, while plate the
properties when you choose the plate. The property parameters are the same as those in
the New Sheet window.

3. Sheet Management
Mainly with the icons located at the upper-left corner of the editing area, you can perform
sheet related operations as follows:

Figure 2-226

Switch sheet: A template can contain more than one sheet, but only one sheet can be
opened and edited each time in the editing area. You can choose from the sheet list to
switch from one sheet to another.
New sheet: By clicking the icon , you can add a new sheet.
Delete sheet: By clicking the icon , you can delete the currently-edited sheet.
Copy sheet: Click the icon , and you can copy the current sheet. A dialog box then
appears for you to input the name of the new sheet. Input the name and then click OK.

Figure 2-227

Edit sheet: Click the icon to open a dialog box, see the left figure below, in which you
can re-define the name and the printing method of the current sheet. For example, you
can change the printing method from sheetwise to perfector.
Adjust sheet order: Click the icon to open a dialog box, see the right figure below, in
which you can adjust the sheet order in the template. Please choose the sheet, and then
click the button at the right to make the adjustment.

Figure 2-228

217
 User Guide

5.2.4 Create Layout

To create a layout in your sheet, do as follow: click the toolbar icon , or choose from the
main menu Resource > New Layout, to open the following setup window, define the
parameters as needed, and then click OK.

Figure 2-229

1. Create New Layout

1) Layout Properties
Rows Number: The rows number of the pages in the layout on the front side. That on
the back side is the same, if the sheet contains the back side.
Columns Number: The columns number of the pages in the layout on the front side.
That on the back side is the same, if any.
E.g. you can set to 3 rows and 2 columns, which indicates that the layout would contain
3×2=6 pages on the front side, i.e. 3 rows of pages and each row contains 2, or 2
columns of pages and each column contains 3. If the sheet has the back side, it contains
6 pages as well on the back.
Alignment: Available in 4 most popular page alignment modes, up, down, head to head,

218
21
 Using ElecRoc Client

and foot to foot.

Rotate: To rotate the page and page content. Options include 0o, 90o, 180o, and 270o
counter-clockwise.
Offset: This setting controls the layout position on the sheet. By default it is at the center.
When you use the nine-point diagram to choose other position, you can use the X and Y
to define the horizontal and vertical offsets related to the anchor point.
Lock: If checked, the layout’s position on the sheet will be locked. A locked layout cannot
be deleted or dragged in any direction on the sheet. And a symbol will appear at the
upper-right corner of a locked layout.
Part: Part is a form to classify the pages, so as to meet some special needs. For example,
when you want to impose pages from two different books on a same sheet, you can name
the pages from one book as part A1, and name the pages from the other book as part A2.
If you don’t have such need, please keep the default option A1.
2) Page Properties
The properties include the page size and the orientation. The Size dropdown list provides
some commonly-used standard sizes for you to choose from. You can also choose
Custom to specify any other page size.
Save, Delete: By clicking Save, you can save a custom size as an option into the size
dropdown list for repetitive uses. The saved size option is named with your customized
width and height values, e.g. 400.0mm_300.0mm. By clicking Delete, you can remove
a saved size option from the dropdown list.
3) Margin
Page space: The space between two pages, as shown in the below by the area enclosed
by red dashed lines, available in two directions, horizontal and vertical.
The top space horizontally is shown as a1, i.e. the distance from the middle of the
horizontal page space to the upper page. The bottom space horizontally is shown as a2,
i.e. the distance from the middle of the horizontal page space to the lower page.

Figure 2-230

219
 User Guide

The left space vertically is shown as b1, i.e. the distance from the middle of the
horizontal page space to the leftward page. The right space vertically is shown as b2, i.e.
the distance from the middle of the horizontal page space to the rightward page.
Layout margin: The blank space bordering the layout on the sheet, as shown by the
area enclosed by green dashed lines.
The top margin is shown as c1, i.e. the distance between the top side and the page. The
bottom margin is shown as c2, i.e. the distance between the bottom side and the page.
The left margin is shown as d1, i.e. the distance between the left side and the page. The
right margin is shown as d2, i.e. the distance between the right side and the page.
4) Preview
At the bottom of the New Layout window shows a thumbnail image of the layout. If you
press down the mouse button on the thumbnail, you will get a zoomed-in thumbnail
image floating on the window, as shown in the below. At this moment, you can drag the
mouse to zoom in any other position on the layout.

Figure 2-231

5) Default Layout Marks

You may see some marks on the layout when you zoom in the thumbnail image. These
marks are automatically added by ElecRoc, and they may include cutline marks, fold
marks, cross marks, registration marks, CMYK marks, text marks, and other marks.

220
22
 Using ElecRoc Client

Choose from the main menu Edit > Preference > Mark Parameter to configure what
marks by default will be added when you create a layout.
Only the black: If checked, the default marks will be displayed and output only on the
black separation.

Figure 2-232

2. Layout Positioning
Prior to this operation, you need to select the layout at first. How to select a layout?
When the layout is not locked: move the cursor over any border of the layout, wait till it
turns to and then click the mouse. Or press down the left mouse button at any blank
area on the plate, then drag to form a rectangle, ensuring the rectangle cover at least one
page, and then release the mouse button.
When the layout is locked: press down the left mouse button at any blank area on the
plate, then drag to form a rectangle, ensuring the rectangle cover at least one page, and
then release the mouse button.
The layout position can be defined in any of the following ways:
 Use mouse to drag freely;
 Enable the capturing capacity;

221
 User Guide

 Configure parameters on the property panel;

 Use the moving/nudging capacity.
1) Drag Layout
As the simplest way, you can directly choose the layout and then drag and move it freely
on the sheet. When you move the layout in this way, you can refer to the rulers or the
pop-up coordinates at the lower-left corner to determine the adequate position.
2) Capture Layout
You may notice that while the layout is being moved, it may automatically be captured to
some specific positions, such as the plate borders and the grid lines. ElecRoc provides the
capacity to capture the layout to auxiliary tools or other positions, so that you can
position the layout on the sheet more easily and precisely.
 Capture to plate and paper
When the object approaches to the borders of the plate or the paper, or the middle lines,
it will be aligned with them closely and automatically.

Figure 2-233

 Capture to grid
Choose in the main menu Tools > Show Grid, to show the grid on the sheet, and
meanwhile, choose in the main menu Tools > Capture Grid. Now, when you move the
layout close to the grid lines, you will see two crossed register lines in red on the sheet,
and the layout will be automatically captured to the exact position where the grid line is.

Figure 2-234

222
22
 Using ElecRoc Client

The space between any two grid cells can be defined by way of the main menu Tools >
Grid Spacing. And the color of the grid lines can also be defined by way of the main
menu Edit > Preference > Color Settings.
 Capture to guides
You can add horizontal or vertical guiding lines to the sheet. When the layout approaches
to the line, it will be automatically captured to the position where the line is. As the grid
lines do, the guiding lines bring ease in layout positioning.
1. Show guides. Choose from the main menu Tools > Show Guides.
2. Add guides. Place the cursor over the ruler, then press down the left mouse button
and drag toward the sheet editing area, and then release the mouse button at proper
place. A setup dialog box appears. Input the precise coordinates, and then click OK.
If you click the dashed cross at the upper-left of the sheet editing area (at the left of
the horizontal ruler, and the top of the vertical ruler), and then press down the mouse and
drag to the editing area, you can add two cross guides at the same time.

Figure 2-235

3. Capture to the guides. Choose from the main menu Tools > Capture Guides.
When you drag the layout and make any edge of it approach to a guide line, the layout
will be automatically captured to the position where the guide line is located.

Figure 2-236

223
 User Guide

 Capture to other positions

You can also capture the layout to other layouts, pages or marks. Such capacity is
enabled if you check items Capture page and other layout elements and Capture
Mark, under the main menu Tools.
3) Position Coordinates
You can use the coordinates to precisely define the layout position.
 Define the coordinate system
The default coordinate system is originated at the lower-left corner of the sheet. In
practice, you can choose another origin to re-build the coordinate system. Click the
toolbar icon . The editing area then becomes entirely grayed. Move the cursor on the
sheet, and you will see two cross lines, their crossing is the origin of the new system.
If you press down the Ctrl or Alt key meanwhile, you can choose to use one of the
commonly-used coordinate systems built on the plate or plate element.

Press down Ctrl Press down Alt

Figure 2-237
If you don’t press down the Ctrl or Alt key, when you move the cursor alone to proper
position and click the left mouse button, you will open a setup dialog box. The Origin
Location refers to the coordinates of the new origin on the default coordinate system.
Coordinate Axis refers to the directions of the X and Y axes.

Figure 2-238

224
22
 Using ElecRoc Client

 Define the coordinates

The position parameter on the property panel controls the exact position of your layout
on the sheet.
Nine anchor points: They represent nine anchor points on the layout. Except the
central point, the rest eight points are all located on the borders. Your chosen point is
displayed in red on the layout. The X and Y are just the coordinates of this anchor point
on the coordinate system.
4) Move/Nudge Layout
 Move the layout
To move a layout (if locked, the layout cannot be moved), you can choose the layout and
then click the toolbar icon or choose from the main menu Edit > Move, to open a
setup dialog box. Input the distance you want to move in the horizontal and vertical
directions, and then click OK. You can input negative values.

Figure 2-239

 Nudge the layout

Choose the layout and then press the arrow keys to nudge the layout. When you click the
key once, you move the layout one time. The layout is moved in the direction indicated by
the arrow key, at a distance specified by the main menu Edit > Preference >
Appearance Settings > Offset Step.
5) Lock/Unlock
After you have determined the layout position, you can lock it, so as to prevent it from
being unintentionally moved. You can lock a layout in any of the following ways:
 Click the toolbar icon ;
 Right-click and choose Lock;
 Choose from the main menu Object > Lock;
 Use shortcut keys Ctrl + L.
Being locked, a symbol appears at the upper-right corner of the layout. The icon, the
menu item, and the shortcut keys used for unlocking the layout are: , Unlock and Ctrl
+ Shift + L.

3. Layout Properties
Layout properties here mainly refer to the parameters shown on the property panel when
the layout is selected. Through these parameters, you can view and re-define the layout
properties.

225
 User Guide

Figure 2-240

1) Rotate
You can choose any of the following methods to rotate the layout.
 On the property panel, choose the Rotate arrows , , or , your chosen
arrow is then shown in highlight;
 Choose the icons , or in the toolbar;
 Choose from the main menu Object > Rotate > Rotate 180, or Rotate 90
degree(Clockwise), or Rotate 90 degree(Counterclockwise);
 Use shortcut keys, press down Alt, and meanwhile press an arrow key.
2) Layout Properties
Properties include the number of rows, the number of columns, and the alignment mode.
They are the same as those in the New Layout setup window. Here, if needed, you can
re-define them on the property panel.
3) Small page size
The size of each small page in the layout. Here, if needed, you can also re-define it on the
property panel.
4) Layout Position
It shows the size of the layout and the position of selected point of the layout on sheet or
on paper.

4. Page Properties
Some properties for the pages in a layout can also be defined after you have created the
layout, mainly by way of the parameters on the property panel as well.
 Define page number
Choose a page and expand the Content tab on the property panel, and then input the
page numbers in the Front and Back edit boxes.
Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the main menu Edit > Set page number to
open a setup dialog box. Input the page numbers for both the front and back sides, and
then click on a page to apply the input numbers to the page. The numbers in the dialog
box will increase incrementally after the clicking.

Figure 2-241

 Add cutline marks

If you check External Cutline or/and Internal Cutline under the Template tab on the

226
22
 Using ElecRoc Client

property panel, you can add cutline marks to the four page corners.
 Configure content properties
Properties of the page content are controlled by the parameters under the Content tab
on the property panel. They include the offset, rotation, and the locking of the front and
back sides. Refer to related introductions in section 8.5 for details.

5. Other Objects
Here mainly refer to the marks and page space on the layout.
 Mark
1) You can add cutline marks to the page.
2) Choose one added mark, default mark or cutline mark, on the layout, and then you can
view and re-define its properties on the property panel, including line width, length,
whether it is present on the front or back sides, whether it is present only on the black
separation, and whether it is shown.
 Space
Also called margins, include the horizontal and vertical page space between pages, and
the space between the page and layout borders. When being chosen, its properties, such
as left margin and right margin, are shown on the property panel as well. Through them,
you can re-define the space size.

Figure 2-242

227
 User Guide

 Other layout-related operations

1) Use the toolbar icons , , , , , , , , , , or corresponding
commands from the main menu or right-click menu, to perform such operations to the
layout as cutting, copying, pasting, deleting, moving, centering, rotating, and locking.
2) As one object, when being selected together with other sheet objects, the layout can
be in alignment with them, by way of the toolbar icons , , , , , , , or
corresponding menu items.
3) Click the toolbar icons , , , , or corresponding menu items, to adjust the
sequence of the layout as a layer related to other layers.
For details about these operations, refer to related introductions in section 5.2.7.

6. Origami
In determining the page sequence numbering that corresponds to an imposition pattern,
a paper folding dummy is usually used: fold a piece of paper according to the correct
imposition pattern, and write down the page numbers after you complete the folding, and
then determine the page number for each page of the template as per the page number
written on the folded paper.
Origami is a powerful and easy-to-use electronic folding system, designed to replace the
manual folding. With Origami’s virtual paper, folding is done on computer screen. When
the electronic folding is completed, the page numbering for the imposition template is
also completed - Origami automatically determines page sequence numbering and page
orientation. Origami’s “virtual paper” can be folded (with the Fold tool), cut (with the Cut
tool) and combined (with the Combine tool).
1. Before you use the Origami tool, please ensure that there is a layout in your template.
The layout determines the sheet size, page size, page number, page orientation, and
page space. The toolbar icon and menu item for the Origami tool would NOT be activated
in case that you have NOT created a layout in your template.
2. Click the toolbar icon , or choose the main menu item Edit > Origami, to enter in
the following dialog. It will list all the layouts existing in the current template.

Figure 2-243

228
22
 Using ElecRoc Client

3. Tick the layouts you want to fold, and then click OK.

Figure 2-244

The left pane of the window is designed to record all the actions you have carried out.
Each time when you complete one folding, you will then see a diagram appearing in this
area, illustrating the action you have just done. If, at any time, you wish to return to a
previous action, double-click the diagram representing that action in this pane, and you
will instantly back to the point prior to that action. The right pane of the window holds the
“Virtual Paper” and this is where you perform the folding, cutting and combining actions.
4. You can use three tools during the folding process, to achieve flexibly various folding
results. They appear at the upper-left of the window. Starting at left, the tools are:
(Fold), (Cut), and (Combine). Their usages are as follows:
1. The Fold tool
Choose the icon . Use it when you want to fold the sheet.
1) As shown in figure (1) below, decide the position of the fold line. Click on the border
line between pages, and if a folding at that position is available, the line turns to red.
Note: The bottom line of the paper is also an acceptable fold line, which allows you to
turn the paper front side back. The number labeled on each page of the paper represents
the number of paper layers.
2) As shown in figure (2) below, decide the folding direction. Hold down the Ctrl or Shift
key, and then move the cursor onto either side of the fold line. Holding down the Ctrl key
means to fold towards you, and holding down the Shift key means to fold away from you.
Therefore, horizontally, you can fold towards the left or right side; vertically, you can fold
towards the up or down side.
3) Click the mouse button to complete one folding, as shown in figure (3). (4), (5), (6)
shows a further vertical folding.

229
 User Guide

Figure 2-245

2. The Cut tool

Cutting can be used when you want to divide one signature into two small ones.
Choose the icon and click on the fold line between pages, and if a cutting at that
position is available, the line turns to red, as shown in figure (1). Hold down the Shift or
Ctrl key (at this moment the two keys function the same), and then move the cursor onto
the right or upper side of the fold line (the right side when the fold line is vertical, and the
upper side when the fold line is horizontal), as shown in figure (2). And then click the
mouse button to cut the layout into two (3).

Figure 2-246

3. The Combine tool

The Combine tool can be used to move one signature on top of another signature.
Choose the icon . Drag one layout on top of another layout, and then drop it, the two
layouts will then be combined (if you do not drop a layout “on top” of another section, it
will spring back to its original position). The new combined layout can continue to be
edited (i.e., folded, cut, or combined).

Figure 2-247

After the folding, cutting or combining, click OK and return to the imposer window. Now
you can notice that the page numbers have been automatically specified.

230
23
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-248

5.2.5 Add Page

1. Add Blank Page
You can also add blank pages to the sheet, instead of a layout. Click the toolbar icon ,
or choose from the main menu Resource > New blank page to open the following
dialog. Input the page numbers, the width and height of each page, and then click OK.

Figure 2-249

2. Page Properties
The property panel located below the template editing area can show the properties of a
page when you choose this page. The two tabs divide properties into two groups,
Template and Content.

Figure 2-250

231
 User Guide

1) Template Page
Template page is a kind of pages used for modeling. It does not contain any real content,
but it does define the position of the page on the sheet, the space size of the page on the
sheet, the rotating direction, whether it contains the front and/or back side, the bleeding
size, whether it contains cutline marks, and the position and scaling for the content it will
contain, and etc.
Parameters about the template page are displayed under the Template tab on the
property panel. With them and other methods like toolbar icons or menu items, you can
define page properties such as position, orientation, size, bleeding, and etc.
2) Position
Here you can use the coordinates to precisely define the page position.
Besides this, you can also use other methods to position your page as you position your
layout, for details, refer to section 5.2.4.
3) Rotate
You can choose any of the following methods to rotate the template page.
 Under the Template tab on the property panel, choose the Rotate arrows , ,
or , your chosen arrow is then shown in highlight;
 Choose the icons , or in the toolbar;
 Choose from the main menu Object > Rotate > Rotate 180, or Rotate 90
(Clockwise), or Rotate 90 (Counterclockwise);
 Use shortcut keys, press down Alt, and meanwhile press an arrow key.
By default, the rotating direction of the page content is the same as that of the template
page. But you may also specify a different content direction. To do so, switch to the
Content tab, and choose a different Rotate arrow.
4) Front and Back
When the printing method is set to Sheetwise, or Work and Turn, or Work and
Tumble, or Perfector, and you add a page or mark onto the sheet or onto any side of
the sheet, by default, both the Front and Back boxes on the property panel will be
checked, and a relevant blank page or mark will appear on the opposite or reverse side.
Its properties such as size, position and direction are the same as the added page or
mark or keep relevance with each other.
You can uncheck any of the two boxes to delete the page or mark on the converse side.
5) Size
The size of the template page may be not equal to the size of the page content. If the
content size is smaller than the page size, and meanwhile the content is not scaled, then
part of the content may be cut off after the output. If the content size is larger than the
page size, and still the content is not scaled, then there would be much space around the
content.
By default, the size of the template page is equal to that of the page content. If needed,
you may also modify the size of the template page.
 Choose the page and move the cursor to any anchor point on the page border,
turning the cursor to an arrow like , and then press down the left mouse
button and drag it. In this way, you can adjust the page size freely;

232
23
 Using ElecRoc Client

 Under the Template tab on the property panel, input proper Size values.
6) Bleeding
The Bleeding parameter controls the size of the bleed box of the template page.
1) Show bleed box: Choose from the main menu View > Show bleeding box.
2) Color of the bleed box: The main menu Edit > Preference > Color Settings >
Bleeding Box.
3) Default bleeding: The main menu Edit > Preference > General Parameters >
Default Bleeding.
7) Cut Line
It includes external cutline and internal cutline. If checked, ElecRoc will add
corresponding cut line marks at the four corners of the page. The default line width and
length of the marks are determined by main menu Edit > Preference > Mark
Parameter > Cut Line. After you have added this mark, you can change the line width
and length from the property panel, if needed.
8) Page Position
It shows the size of the page and the position of selected point of the page on sheet or on
paper.

3. Page Content
You can also configure the properties of the page content, mainly through the parameters
under the Content tab on the property panel.

Figure 2-251

1) Page Position
It refers to the position of the page content on the page size defined by the template page.
The default position is at the center of the page. You can choose other position from the
nine-point diagram, and the then activated Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset edit
boxes enable you to input appropriate offset values.
Lock front and back: In case that the printing method is set to a method other than
Single-sided, this option can then control the positional relevance between the contents
on the front and back sides. E.g. in Sheetwise printing, if the content on the front side
moves leftward, then the content on the back side will automatically move rightward,
with same offset value, vice versa.
2) Rotate
You can control the direction of the page content on the template page through the four
arrows.
3) Page Number
If you specify the page number for the pages on your sheet, then when you manually
submit multiple pages for imposition, ElecRoc can correctly put the pages to the right

233
 User Guide

template pages one by one, according to the page number.

5.2.6 Add Mark

You can add a wide range of marks to the sheet.

1. Mark Type
The marks that can be added to the sheet include:
1) Plate marks. On the sheet based on the plate, you can add punch marks and the
side guide marks such as . For details, refer to From Plate in section 5.2.3.
2) Cutline marks. You can add the cutline marks such as to the four corners of any
page on the sheet. Refer to Cut Line in section 5.2.5 for details.
3) Default layout marks. Whenever you create a layout, by default ElecRoc will
automatically add some marks, including cut lines (e.g. ), fold marks ( or ), cross
marks , registration marks ( or ), CMYK marks (e.g. ), and text
marks (e.g. ). For details, refer to Default
Layout Marks in section 5.2.4 and Mark Parameter in section 5.2.8.
4) Smart marks. It’s a kind of dynamic mark that can move smartly along with other
sheet object. The cutline marks, the most of the static marks, and the custom marks, can
be added as smart marks into your sheet. Their positions on the sheet are based on and
associated with specific sheet object, such as plate, paper, page, and layout. Once these
base objects move, they move as well. In this way, you do NOT need to re-set the marks
in cases that the pages or layout on the sheet are to be changed. This provides great
convenience for you to create imposer template.
5) System Static marks. The main difference from the smart marks is that this kind of
marks is static, and will NOT move along with other sheet object. ElecRoc provides 18
built-in marks available for you to manually add to the sheet. They include cross reverse
mark , internal target mark , oval target mark , cross mark , external target
mark , line mark , vertical line mark , solid target mark , rectangular reverse
mark , T mark , three-fold mark , CMYK proof bar (three ones , and ),
color bar , step scale , text mark , and signature mark .
6) Custom marks. You can add custom marks into ElecRoc system, for use in imposition.
For details on how to add custom marks into ElecRoc, refer to section 5.2.8 Define Marks.

2. Smart Marks
As shown in the following figure, the bar mark located at the lower-left corner of
each page is a smart mark. It will always appear at the lower-left corner of each page,
whenever you move the layout, or modify the number of pages, or change the page size,
or even the page space.

234
23
 Using ElecRoc Client

1 3

Figure 2-252

Method to add smart mark: as shown above, ①, at the left of the window, expand
Mark > Smart Mark and define smart mark here; ②, choose the defined smart mark,
drag it into the sheet; at this point you have finished the adding operation; ③, for
convenience to choose the added smart mark for further operation, you can open the
Layer Structure panel (from main menu View > Layer Structure) to choose the
mark.
1) Mark Directory
In order to improve the usability and efficiency, ElecRoc enables you to create smart
mark template and manage the templates by way of directory. As the default directory
and the root directory, the directory Smart Mark can be used straight to store your smart
marks. And if needed, you can create sub-directory under it: choose Smart Mark,
right-click and then choose Create Directory. User-defined sub-directory can be
deleted or renamed via right-click menu items, if needed.
2) Define Smart Mark
The mark setting defined here is sort of a parameter template for your smart mark,
aiming to provide easiness for repetitive use.
Choose a directory, right-click and choose New, and then choose a mark type. The
mark’s property setup window then appears. Define each of the parameters, and then
click Save to save the setting under your chosen directory. If you click Save and apply,
you can not only save the setting, but also add the mark into the current sheet.

235
 User Guide

Figure 2-253
Here we introduce only the property parameters specific to the smart marks. As to other
parameters, please refer to the next 4th section “Mark Properties”.
Name: The name for the mark property setting.
Type: The specific mark type, for example, the bar mark contains 5 specific types.
The position of the smart mark is dynamic and associated. It’s a relative position, and
thus needs to be defined by way of some reference variables.
Base: Please choose a sheet object or sheet location from the Base dropdown list, only
on which you can further define the exact position for the mark. The base could be plate,
paper, imposition, imposition bleed, page, page bleed, gutters, and margin. For example,
if you choose the page as base, the smart mark will then appear at certain position on
each page; if you choose imposition, the smart mark will then appear at certain position
on the layout. The bleed in page bleed or imposition bleed means to use the bleed box of
the page or imposition as the base.
Base diagram: The base position is further divided into 9 smaller points, top, bottom,
left, right, center, upper-left, lower-left, upper-right, and lower-right. The smart mark
will be located at one point of them.
Target diagram: The selected base point can be further divided into 9 directions. The
following figure shows a smart rectangle mark’s positions when the base is page and the
base point is lower-left, but the target direction is respectively set to lower-left, bottom,
and lower-right.

236
23
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-254
X, Y: When you have defined the exact position by way of the above three parameters,
you can still make the mark move horizontally and vertically by way of the X and Y edit
boxes, if needed. A positive X value means to move towards the right, while a positive Y
value means to move upwards. Negative values mean to move in reverse directions.
3) Add
You can add a smart mark if you click the button Save and apply in the mark’s property
setup window.
You can also add the smart mark after you have defined the mark, by choosing the mark
and then dragging it to any place on the sheet.
By using right-click menu items, you can also add smart mark after you have defined the
mark: choose the mark, right-click and choose Add to. The sub-option current sheet
means to add the mark into current sheet, while the sub-option all sheets means to add
the mark into all the sheets of the current template.
4) Edit, Delete
To edit an added smart mark: we recommend you to open the Layer Structure panel
when you are using the smart marks, see the figure ① in the below. This panel lists all
the smart marks that have been added onto the sheet. Choose a mark, right-click and
choose Edit, to open its property setup window. Re-define the parameters and then click
Save.

1
2

Figure 2-255
To edit a smart mark parameter template: at the location as shown in above figure ②
you can also edit the smart marks, by way of right-click menu items. In this way, you can
re-define the properties of the mark template, for repetitive use.
Delete a mark: The right-click menu item Delete enables you to delete an unneeded
smart mark. The already-added smart mark on your sheet can also be deleted by using
the Delete key on your keyboard.
5) Import, Export, Copy
ElecRoc supports you to import and export the smart mark templates. This operation can
be completed with the right-click menu items.

237
 User Guide

3. System and Custom Marks

The way to add the static and custom marks is as follows. Click the toolbar icon , or
check the Mark tab at the left of the program window to expand the optional static or
custom marks. Then choose one mark and then directly drag it to the right sheet editing
area, and release the mouse at proper position.
Note: The custom marks are from PDF pages, thus are in two types, composite and
pre-separation. ElecRoc does not support you to combine these two types of marks onto
one same sheet.

4. Mark Properties
You can define the mark properties through the parameters on the property panel. But
the properties for various marks are different. E.g. the property panel for the mark is
shown as follows.

Figure 2-256
While that for the CMYK proof bar 3 turns to:

Figure 2-257

The property parameters for the static mark include:

 Position
It refers to the position of the mark on the sheet coordinate system.
 Rotate
The orientation of the mark on the sheet.
 Front, Back
They control if the mark appears on the front side, or the back side, or both sides.
 Line width, Line height
The line width and height of the mark. The default line width and height can be defined
from the main menu Edit > Preference > Mark Parameter > Other Mark.
 Color
This parameter is available only for the line marks , and step scale mark . Optional
colors include black (cmyk or mono), cyan, magenta, yellow, red, green, and blue.
Besides, you can also use custom color.
Customize mark color: If you choose Custom, you can customize a color in CMYK
mode.
 Only on black
This option is available for such marks as , , , , , , and . If checked,

238
23
 Using ElecRoc Client

the mark will be displayed and output only on the black separation.
 Bar mark features
The following parameters are specific to the CMYK proof bars and color bars.
Color block size: Each color bar is composed of multiple same-sized square blocks. This
parameter controls just the side length of such blocks. In this way, it controls the size of
the whole color bar.
Throughout the layout: If checked, the bar is repeated backwards throughout the
layout, starting from the place where the bar is located.
Spot Color: If checked, it adds the spot color block(s) at the end of the color bar. The
spot colors are those contained in the current sheet.
Insert 50% color blocks: This option is available only for the CMYK proof bar 3. If
checked, it adds the 50% K, C, M and Y blocks, and if the Spot Color option is checked
at the same time, it also adds 50% spot color block(s).
 Text mark features
Width, Height: The text size is controlled by Height. After you have defined the height,
you should define a width big enough to wholly display the text.
Comments: You can randomly input any text, or you can also add variables such as
surface name, time and date, which separately refer to the name of the current sheet,
the current time, and the current date.
Surface: Two options, Front/Back and A/B, are available for you to indicate the front
plate and back plate. Choose the style you prefer. Take the option Front/Back as example,
if the Comments parameter has contained the variable Surface, at the time being
output, the comments appearing on the front side of the your sheet will then contain the
text Front, while the back side contains the text Back.
Font: Font for the comments, Song Typeface, Boldface, Tahoma, Batang, or MingLiu.
And if needed, you can check Bold to make the comments boldfaced.
Swap: If checked, the text Front/Back or A/B in the mark will be swapped each other.
Sheet ID: The ID of the sheet. You can customize the first ID, and control if to number
in sequence algorithm. When the Comments parameter has contained the variable
Sheet ID, at the time being output, the comments appearing on the sheet will then
contain the ID defined here.
Binding > Signature ID: If checked, when the Comments parameter contains the
variable Signature ID, the ID will be bound with the signature specified in the dropdown
list below.
Vertical text: the characters are arranged vertically.
 Signature mark features
To avoid error in assembling, a square mark is added between the first page and the last
page on a signature. Signature mark can be added on both the saddle-stitched and
perfect-bound signatures. In saddle-stitched signatures, the signature mark is located in
the header. In perfect-bound signatures, the mark is located in the binding side of the
outer signature; while in the inner signature, the mark is located in the header.

239
 User Guide

Figure 2-258
First ID: The ID of the first signature mark. For example, if the First ID is 3, the mark will
be added to the height of the third mark, and the signature ID is 3.
Step: The step between signature marks.
Group: You can set certain signature marks as a group; groups are divided by a space of
a signature mark’s height. This helps to avoid signature missing from happening, and to
calculate the total signature number in an imposition process.
Use sequence algorithm: If checked, all the signature marks on the sheet are
numbered in a sequence. If not checked, they are numbered separated on each
signature.
Shape: The shape of the signature mark may be rectangle or circle.
Color: The signature mark is displayed and output in the color specified here.
Negative: The signature mark is composed of a number and a background. If checked,
the number is white, while the background is colored.
Positive: If checked, the number is colored, the background turns white.
Range: The range within which the signature mark is allowed to creep.
Up: The signature mark creeps upward. If you check Horizontal, the signature mark
creeps leftward.
Down: The signature mark creeps downward. If you check Horizontal, the signature
mark creeps rightward.
Reflex: When the creep of the signature mark reaches the limit, the mark will reflex.
Inner Reflex: Here you can input the step of inner reflex. When the creep reaches the
step limit, the creep will creep to the opposite direction. The beginning position is decided
by the Step minors 1. This setting cannot be used together with Group and/or Reflex.
Vertical: The signature mark creeps vertically.
Horizontal: The signature mark creeps horizontally.
Example: Height of the signature mark is 5, the Range is 75, and Inn Reflex is 5 steps,
the output of the signature mark is shown as follows:

240
24
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-259

Comments: You can add some comments in the signature mark. If needed, input the
comments in the text box.
Show Number: It controls whether to show the number in signature mark.

5.2.7 Sheet Object Operations

The objects on the layout include layouts, pages and marks. ElecRoc provides you with
some functions or enables you to perform some operations to them after you have added
them into the sheet.

1. Layer Structure
You need to be quite clear about the up and down relations in case that two or more
layouts (or pages/marks) are overlapping each other. ElecRoc views each layout (or
page/mark) as a unique layer. And the upper layer always overlaps the lower one. By
default, ElecRoc judges if a layer is old or new by the time it is created, the newer layer
always overlaps the older one, i.e. the newer layer is in the upper, the older one is in the
lower. This sequence can be customized.
The layer sequence and classification can be viewed in the Layer Structure pane.
Choose from the main menu View > Layer Structure to display this pane.

Figure 2-260

To change the layer position in the sequence, choose the sheet object, and then do any
of the following:

241
 User Guide

 Click , to adjust the layer position;

 Click the toolbar icons , , , ;
 Choose from the main menu Object > Arrangement > Bring to front, or
Send to back, or Bring forward, or Send backward.

2. Efficient step & repeat

Copy repeatedly one single page so as to produce multiple pages arranged according to
certain sequence and page space.
Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the main menu Edit > Efficient step and
repeat, to get a floating setup dialog box, with the cursor turning to .

Figure 2-261

And then, choose the page, press down the left mouse button and drag it on the sheet.
You will then see new pages being formed on the sheet around the base page. Release
the mouse when it has produced the number of pages you want to produce.

Figure 2-262

Parameters related include:

Benchmarks: Trim box to trim box refers to use the distance between the trim boxes
of the two pages as the page space, while Media box to media box refers to that
between the media boxes of the two pages.
Space: The page space between any two pages in the horizontal and vertical directions.
Locked Page: To lock the base and new pages after the step and repeat.

242
24
 Using ElecRoc Client

External/Internal CutLine: To include cutline marks on all the new pages after the
step and repeat.
Only Front: The cutline marks only appear on the pages in the front side of the sheet.
Bypassing page: To bypass the existing page on the sheet. I.e. at the place where an
existing page is located, it does not produce any new page.
Bypassing mark: To bypass the existing mark on the sheet.

3. Smart step & repeat

Choose from the main menu Edit > Smart Step and Repeat, and you will open a setup
window as shown in the below, so as to perform a smart step & repeat operation.

Figure 2-263

More options become available, compared to the rapid step & repeat setup window.
Direction of step and repeat: Starting from one corner, step and repeat toward the
opposite corner. Thus there are 4 directions. By default, ElecRoc can automatically
choose a proper direction, but if needed, you can choose any other direction.
Fill the entire paper: To generate multiple pages till they fill the entire paper.

243
 User Guide

Page Arrange: To generate a specified number of pages in both the horizontal and
vertical directions, as defined here.
Fill Area: To generate multiple pages till they fill the area as specified here.
Center Page: To center the base page and generated pages on the sheet.

4. Alignment
After you have added multiple layout objects into the sheet, you may need to align them.
1) Selection of multiple objects
To choose or select more than one sheet object at one time, you can do any of the
following:
 Press down the Ctrl key at the same time;
 Press down the left mouse button on any blank area inside or outside the sheet,
and then drag it in any direction to form a rectangle. In this way you can choose
all the pages inside the rectangle.
After you have chosen multiple objects, you can perform not only the alignment, but also
the operations like moving, cutting, copying/pasting, deleting, rotating, and configuring
the bleed, the size, and etc.
2) Align objects
You can align objects in any of the following ways:
 Click the toolbar icons , , , , , , ;
 Choose the menu items corresponding to the above icons: Object >
Alignment > Vertical align top/ Vertical align center/ Vertical align
bottom/ Horizontal align left/ Horizontal align center/ Horizontal align
right, and Object > Center > Horizontal and vertical/ Horizontal/
Vertical.
The default benchmark is the firstly selected object, but this can be re-defined manually.
After you have chosen multiple objects, click one of them once again to make it the
benchmark object. The anchor points on the benchmark object are shown in dark, while
those on the rest objects are in white.

5. Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Hold, Delete

Among them, Paste Hold refers to an operation in which the original object and the
copied one will be in a same location after the pasting, producing an visually overlapping
effect. These operations can be performed in one of the following ways:
 Choose the object and then click the toolbar icons , , , ;
 Right-click and choose Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Hold, Delete;
 Choose from the main menu Edit > Cut/ Copy/ Paste/ Paste Hold/ Delete;
 Shortcut keys. Cut: Ctrl+X; Copy: Ctrl+C; Paste: Ctrl+V; Paste Hold:
Ctrl+Shift+V; Delete: Delete.

244
24
 Using ElecRoc Client

5.2.8 More Features

For more flexibility and convenience, and higher efficiency, ElecRoc imposer also provides
you with the following functions and features.

1. About User Interface

1) The Program Window

Figure 2-264

In full view mode, as shown above, the program window consists of the following parts:
Main menu: Provides operational commands for you to use.
Toolbar: Consists of multiple icons or buttons that can substitute for some
commonly-used commands, for you to quickly perform the operations.
The resource management pane: The pane located at the left of the window is
designed for you to manage the related resources, such as templates, plates, paper, and
marks. They are grouped into four tabs, each with a unique operating interface.
The template editing area: The body of the program window is an area special for you
to edit your template.
Property panel: Lists the property parameters of your selected sheet or selected object
on the sheet for you to configure.
Layer Structure pane: a floating pane, displayed after selection, listing the layer

245
 User Guide

structure of current sheet. In layer structure, each sheet object is considered as a layer.
Navigator pane: a floating pane, displayed after selection, showing the thumbnail
image of the current sheet for you to navigate.
Status bar: Displays the plate size, paper size, unit, number of the selected objects, and
the cursor position. In addition, it contains two buttons at the rightmost, which can be
used to control the display of the front and/or back sides and the display percentage.
You can use the mouse dragging to adjust the sizes of the resource management pane,
the template editing area, and the property panel. But when you re-open the program
window, their sizes restore to a default setting. When you have expanded any tab of the
resource management pane, you can hide the tab and the pane by clicking the tab once
again. The property panel can be displayed or hidden by clicking the buttons / . The
template editing area can hold more than one opened template, each one with a tab
locating on the top, named with the template name. You can click these tabs to easily
switch between them.
2) Toolbar icons
 The position of the icons in the toolbar
The icons in the toolbar are classified into several groups, separated by the symbol .
Press down the left mouse button at the blank area between the icons within a group,
then drag forward or backward and drop at any other , you can move the group of icons
to the place where you drop the mouse button.
 Show/hide toolbar icons
Choose from the main menu Edit > Preference, and then choose Custom Toolbar
from the pop-up window.

Figure 2-265

246
24
 Using ElecRoc Client

The window lists all the toolbar icons that can be displayed and used and how they are
grouped. Expand each group of icons. A tick in front indicates to show, while a cross in
front indicates to hide. If needed, you can cross the icons that are less used or not used.
For your convenience, ElecRoc provides buttons such as Unfold, Fold, Select All, Clear,
Reset Default and Reset all to default. By default, all the icons are shown in the
toolbar.
 The toolbar right-click menu
You can right-click on the blank area in the toolbar to get a shortcut menu, and then use
the options to control if to show or hide a whole group of icons. If you check Lock
Toolbars, then you cannot move the groups of icons. The Custom option enables you to
separately control if to show or hide each of the icons.

Figure 2-266

3) Display of the front and back sides

The controller at the bottom of the program

window controls the display of the front and back sides on the editing area. If you
choose or , only one side (front or back) is displayed, and if you choose , both sides
are displayed.
Transparency: This option is applied to the sheet that contain both the front and back
sides. It refers to the transparency of the front side on the back side, or that of the back
side on the front side.
4) Display proportion
The sheet display proportion can be adjusted in the following ways:
1) Use the Zoom tool . Choose this toolbar icon. The cursor turns to after you
choose.
 Press down the left mouse button and drag the mouse, to form a rectangle in
dashed-line on the sheet. The content inside the rectangle will be zoomed in on
the editing area in the possibly biggest proportion.
 Scroll up and down with the mouse wheel;
2) Use the toolbar icons , , , and . The icon zooms in, the icon zooms
out, and each click on these two icons zooms in/out in a fixed scaling factor, which can be
defined with the Preference parameter Appearance Settings > Zoom Step. The
icon zooms to display the whole sheet in fitting proportion, and the icon zooms to

247
 User Guide

display the currently-selected object in fitting proportion. The object may be the sheet,
the layout, a page, or a mark. The icon zooms to a specified display proportion. Click
it, and you can choose from the optional proportions, such as 2:1, 1:1, 1:2, or you can
choose Custom to specify other proportion.
ElecRoc also provides menu commands corresponding to the above icons, under the
View menu.
3) Press down the Ctrl key and meanwhile scroll the mouse wheel to-and-fro to zoom in
and out the view. The cursor turns to if you press down the Alt key. At this time, you
can zoom in and out the view as you do with the Zoom tool .
4) Use the zoom controller at the lower-rightmost of the program window “Zoom: 61%
”. Here you can not only know the current zoom proportion, but also
can click the icons and to zoom out and in incrementally (5% each click), or adjust
the sliding bar to zoom in and out.
5) Sheet Navigation
For your convenience to browse the sheet when the view has been zoomed in, i.e. only
part of the sheet content is displayed in the editing area, ElecRoc provides you with the
following 4 optional capacities.
 Use the mouse wheel to scroll the sheet up and down;
 Drag the horizontal or vertical scroll bar;
 Choose the toolbar icon , and then you can press down the left mouse button
to drag the sheet freely;
 Make use of the Navigator pane.
Choose from the main menu View > Navigator to display the Navigator pane.

Figure 2-267

In this area, ElecRoc displays the thumbnail images of the front and back sides of the
sheet. When the zoom proportion increases to a certain extent, you will see a red
rectangle box on the thumbnail image (the bigger the proportion, the smaller the box
would be). The content inside the box are just the zoomed-in content in the editing area.
Therefore, if you move the red box by clicking anywhere outside it on the thumbnail
image, or if you drag and drop the box directly, you can subsequently change the content
currently displayed in the editing area. In this way, by clicking or dragging on the
thumbnail image, you can easily zoom in and browse the sheet in the editing area.

248
24
 Using ElecRoc Client

6) Layer Structure
ElecRoc introduces the concept of the layer. Each object on the sheet is considered by
default as a unique layer. From the Layer Structure pane, you can adjust the sequence
of the layers, to correctly deal with some issues come from the case when the objects
overlap each other.
7) Layout Object
ElecRoc provides such commands under the View menu as Display Page, Display Part,
Show Marks, Show bleeding box, Show trim box, and Show layout box, for you to
control whether to show the layout object or element including page number, part, mark,
bleed box, trim box, and layout box. by default, all of them are shown on the window.

Mark

Bleeding box

Page number

Trim box Part

Figure 2-268

8) Other Display
By using the commands Simple View and Operator View under the View menu, you
can hide the property panel and the resource management pane from the program
window, and by using the commands Show Guides and Show Grid under the Tools
menu, you can control whether to show or hide the guide or grid on the window.

2. Define Papers
You can create or define the paper options that are available for selection in creating a
sheet.

249
 User Guide

Figure 2-269
The operations related to defining a paper are all performed under the Paper tab. By
using the commands from the right-click menu or the Preference menu, you can
finish such common operations as creating, editing, copying and deleting.
As shown in the above figure, each paper has six properties, among which the Name,
Height and Width are compulsory. The button enables you to exchange the width
and height. The Manufacturer, Paper White, and Paper Thickness are optional
properties. If needed, you can input related descriptions.
Now that you have defined the papers, you can quickly define the sheet size and save the
time to set the paper properties, by choosing the pre-defined paper options from the
Paper dropdown list, at the time when you open the New Sheet window to create a
sheet, or expand the property panel to edit the sheet.

3. Define Plates
The purpose, method of operation, and the application of the plates, are basically similar
to the papers mentioned above. The difference lies in that you need to define more
properties as to the plates.

250
25
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-270

 Punch area
If you need to punch in the later-on plate making, you can reserve an area on the sheet
special for the punching. Punch Area controls the width of the punch area. Its position
is determined by the Benchmarks parameter, it may be at the left, right, top or bottom
side of the plate. If you don’t need this area, you can set the value to 0.
 Punch marks
ElecRoc can add a punch mark at the center of the punch area.
 Side guide marks
ElecRoc can add the marks such as onto the sheet, for the side guide on the printing
press to position the paper, in case the press model installs the side guide.
Checking it, you can further define the length, width, line width, position of the mark, the
sheet side(s) on which it appear, and the separations on which it will be output. The Left
and Right boxes control which side(s) of the sheet it appears on. The separation options
include C, M, Y, K and Spot Color. E.g. if you do not want the mark to appear on the spot
color separation, you can let the Spot Color box unchecked. The Benchmarks box
provides four options, representing the mark position, shown as follows.

251
 User Guide

Figure 2-271

 Center marks
A line mark appears at the center of the four sides on the paper, if checked.
 Other parameter
Device Type: Optional property. You can input related description here.

4. Define Marks
Marks here refer to the user-defined marks. Steps for adding custom marks into ElecRoc
are as follows:
1. Use third-party software to make the mark, and save it as a file that can be supported
by ElecRoc, e.g. PDF, PS, TIFF, PRN, and etc.
2. Enter in ElecRoc’s job window and submit the mark file to PDF Generator. After the
process is completed, choose the generated PDF page, right-click and choose Add as
Mark.
Note: After PDF Generator’s process, the mark file can be further processed by nodes
like PDF Tools and Page Clipper. Under such node or when the toolbar icon is selected,
you can still use the right-click menu item Add as Mark to perform the operation.
3. Input the name of the custom mark, and then click OK.
4. Return to the program window. Expand the Custom mark list under the Mark tab,
right-click and choose Refresh, and then you will see the newly-added mark.

5. Auxiliary Tools
We mentioned previously how to position pages by help of the auxiliary tools. There are
two auxiliary tools, grid and guide.
1) Grid
 Show the grid

252
25
 Using ElecRoc Client

When you have enabled the menu item Tools > Show Grid, you can see regularly
spaced horizontal and vertical dashed lines on the sheet, forming a multitude of equal
squares. Meanwhile if you have enabled another menu item Tools > Capture Grid, then
when you move a sheet object close to any grid line, you can see two crossed red lines
appearing and the object being captured to the place where the grid line is located. If you
don’t want to use the grid as a reference for positioning, please disable the two menu
items above.
 Define the grid spacing
Choose from the main menu Tools > Grid Spacing. The grid is composed of many
identical squares. The spacing actually refers to the side length of such square. The value
by default is 50 mm, with a range from 10~1000 mm.

Figure 2-272

2) Guide
 Show the guide
Choose from the main menu Tools > Show Guides. The display color of the guide lines
can be defined from the main menu Edit > Preference > Color Settings.
 Capture to the guide
Choose from the main menu Tools > Capture Guides. When you drag a sheet object
close to a guide line, ElecRoc will automatically capture the object to the place where the
guide line is located.
 Track the guide
Choose from the main menu Tools > Track Guides. In this case, if you move the guide
line, you will move the objects captured to the guide line at the same time.
 Add a guide
1. Do any of the following:
 Double-click anywhere on the horizontal or vertical ruler;
 Place the cursor on the ruler, and then press down the left mouse button and
drag towards the sheet editing area;
 Click the toolbar icon ;
 Choose from the main menu Tools > Add Guides.
2. The Add Guides dialog box appears. Choose the direction, horizontal or vertical, and
input the exact coordinate, and then click OK.
 Move a guide
Place the cursor on the guide line, the cursor then turning to an arrow-like shape, such
as , and then press down the left mouse button and drag the mouse. In this way you
can move the guide line anywhere easily. If you press the Ctrl key meanwhile, you can

253
 User Guide

move the guide line to one of the commonly-used positions on the sheet. You can also
double-click the guide line to re-locate it.
 Lock the guides
Choose from the main menu Tools > Lock Guides. The locked guide line can no longer
be moved randomly. To unlock, please cancel the selection of this menu item.
 Delete/Clear guides
You can delete a guide line by simply dragging it outside of the sheet editing area. Or if
needed, you can also click the toolbar icon to clear all the guide lines.

6. Resource Explorer
ElecRoc enables you to export such resources as papers, plates, templates and smart
marks out of ElecRoc system by way of the resource explorer.
Choose from the main menu Resource > Explorer to open the operating interface. The
left of the window lists the four resource categories, paper, plate, template and smart
mark, and at the right it shows all the resources of a selected category.
Check the resources you want to export, and then click Export. And in the follow-up
dialog box, specify the name and destination for your exported resources.
You can also click the Import button in the explorer to import paper, plate and template
resources into ElecRoc system.

Figure 2-273

7. Preference
Here refers to the parameters that can be defined according to your preference. Choose
from the main menu Edit > Preference to enter in the setup interface, which contains
five group of parameters.

254
25
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-274

1) General Parameter
 Alignment
It refers to the benchmark for the page alignment. Pages can be aligned with each other
based on the trim box or the media box.
 Other
Small page and template alignment: It controls the default position of the page
content on the template page, i.e. the default positioning setting under the Content tab
of the property panel, when you choose a layout or page.
Default Bleeding: The default bleeding setting of the page on the sheet.
External/Internal CutLine/Single Line: Controls if by default the
External/Internal CutLine/single Line options are enabled for each newly-added
page, not available to layout page. If the Single Line is checked, the cut line will ne
single line. If checked, when you add a page to the sheet, the property parameter
Template > External /Internal CutLine for the page will be checked by default. The
default setup of the External/Internal CutLine options for the layout page is controlled
by the parameter Preference > Mark Parameter > Cut Line.
2) Mark Parameter
Here you can define the default marks that would be added automatically when you

255
 User Guide

create a layout. These marks include:

Category sample Location

Cut Line the four corners of the layout
middle points on the four sides of
Fold mark Single line , three lines
the layout
Cross mark Center of the layout
Registration External target mark , solid target middle points on the four sides of
mark mark the layout, or the four corners
CMYK mark the top of the layout
Text mark the bottom of the layout
Table -12

Under the Mark Parameter tab, you can control if the above marks are automatically
added when you create a new layout. A tick means to add the corresponding mark.
Moreover, you can define the default line width, height, and the specific type.

Figure 2-275

Other Mark: They are the marks you manually add to the sheet. Here you can define the
default line width and height for such mark.
Only the black: If checked, the default marks above will be displayed and output only
on the black separation.

256
25
 Using ElecRoc Client

3) Appearance Settings

Figure 2-276

Offset Step: The moving distance of each nudge when you use the arrow keys (、、
、) to nudge the selected object on the sheet.
Grid Spacing: The spacing between any two grid lines.
Sub Grid: After you have redefined the grid by using the main menu item Tools > Grid
Spacing, you can use this parameter to further form a sub grid in each square of the old
grid. The parameter here controls the number of the sub squares in horizontal (or vertical)
direction.
Undo Step: The times to perform the Undo operations.
Zoom Step: The scaling factor for each click on the toolbar icons , , or on the zoom
controls at the lower-right corner of the window. The default value is 5%.
4) Color Settings
You can define the display color of many objects, including the page’s bleeding box and
trim box, guides, grid, workspace background, plate, punch area, and paper.
In the Preference > Color Settings window, if you want to change the display color for
some object, click the color block corresponding to the object to open a color setup dialog
box. In this dialog box, you can choose a new color from samples or in the HSB or RGB
mode. The preview area at the bottom of the dialog box displays the display effects.

257
 User Guide

Figure 2-277

5) Toolbar
Settings here control what toolbar icons are shown in the program window. For details,
refer to section 5.2.8.
6) Advanced
If Apply to All is checked, the parameters will be used for all opened and created
templates.

5.3 Terms
Before we move to the detailed capabilities, we provide you with some referential terms
or concepts related to imposition.
1. Signature. Refers to the sheet on which pages are arranged in special orders.

258
25
 Using ElecRoc Client

2. Bind Margin. Refers to the edge where the folded press product is bound.
3. Cut Edge. Refers to the edge where the product is trimmed.
4. Flat Stitched Registration. There are two folding methods: one is folding the first
two signatures separately, and pile the folded signatures together. The other is piling the
first two signatures, and folds the two signatures together.

Figure 2-278

The relative information about page number in the template will not be loaded to job.
System requires you to assign page numbers again. You only need to assign the page
numbers of the first two signatures. System will generate the other page numbers.
5. Come-and-Go. After printing, folding, binding and cutting, two identical products will
be generated from one signature. See the following figure at the left.

Figure 2-279

6. Cut-and-Stack. The Cut-and-Stack is used primarily for jobs printed on on-demand

output devices to produce different parts of a job simultaneously. The sheets are cut and
one side is stacked on the other for a complete book. See the above figure at the right.
7. Tiling. If the press sheet is larger than the device’s media size, TPL Editor divides the
press sheet into tiles that can be stripped together.
8. Signature Collation Mark. The marks added on a signature to avoid errors in
assembling.

Figure 2-280

259
 User Guide

Chapter 6 Composer
Composer is an effective use of independent pages, composing several different small
jobs on a single press sheet, and optimizing the use of film or media, with an aim to lower
cost and improve the efficiency.

6.1 Quick Start

This section introduces you briefly to the usage of the Composer module.

6.1.1 Preparation
As an independent processor node in job or workflow, Composer always stands alone,
disconnected with any other node fore-and-aft. It accepts files processed after the node
such as PDF Generator, Margin Adjustment, PDF Merger, and PDF Tools. Before you start,
you need to manually submit the pages to the node.

Figure 2-281

Steps to get readiness:

1. Open or create a job.
2. Add the nodes, ensuring that the job contains at least a PDF Generator and Composer
node.

260
26
 Using ElecRoc Client

3. Choose source files, and submit them to PDF Generator.

4. Choose the page files that the PDF Generator has generated, and manually drag them
to the Composer node as input files.
In case that you need to choose the input files from the nodes other than PDF Generator,
e.g. Margin Adjustment, switch to these nodes and choose from their output file queues.
Or you can also check the toolbar icon Pages , then choose from the listed page files.
After you submit the input pages, ElecRoc will automatically open the composer window
(also can be opened by double-clicking the Composer node). The input pages you
submitted are listed under the Page tab at the left of the window. By default, they are
displayed in thumbnails. You can click the icon at the upper-right of the thumbnails
to change to the list view.

6.1.2 Create Signature

The steps are as follows:
1. Double-click the blank area at the right of the window, or choose from the main menu
File > New Signature, to open the New Signature window.

Figure 2-282

2. Input signature name in the Signature Name edit box.

3. Define a sheet.
1) Choose an option from the two options From Paper and From Plate, located at the
upper-left corner. Here we take From Plate as example, i.e. to create a sheet based on
a plate. Such sheet can contain punch area, punch marks, center marks, and side guide
marks.
2) Choose a method from the Printing Method dropdown list.
3) Specify the sheet size from the Plate dropdown list. You can customize this size.

261
 User Guide

4) Specify the paper size from the Paper dropdown list. Here you can also customize the
size. The paper size is usually less than the plate size.
4. Click OK.
The new signature then appears in the ganging window.

Figure 2-283

6.1.3 Add Pages

Switch to the Page tab, choose the pages to be ganged (with Ctrl or Shift key you can
choose more than one page one time), and then press down the left mouse button, drag
them to the blank area on the sheet.

262
26
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-284

In the default ganging mode, i.e. manual ganging, after having been added to the sheet,
the pages may scatter, or even overlap with each other. In such case, you may need to
perform some ganging operations as follows:

1. Page positioning
Choose one or more pages (click in any blank area on the sheet to cancel the selection),
and drag them to proper location and then release the mouse button. In this way, you can
re-position the pages quickly.

Figure 2-285

263
 User Guide

Note: When moving the pages, ElecRoc can capture the pages to the borders of the plate
and paper, i.e. when the pages approach the plate or paper border, they will be captured
automatically to the border. If you don’t need this capacity, you can disable it by
un-checking the menu item Tools > Capture plate and paper.
The page position can also be defined with the coordinates in the property panel, located
at the bottom of the window.

Figure 2-286

2. Rotate the pages

In the property panel, as shown in the above figure, by using the icons , , , or by
choosing from the main menu Object > Rotate, you can rotate the pages.

Figure 2-287

3. Align the pages

If you want to align the pages, you can press down the Ctrl key to choose multiple pages,
and then click the toolbar icons , , , , , , or .
By default, the pages are aligned with the first chosen page, but you can also specify
other reference page with which the pages are aligned. When you have chosen multiple
pages, click one of them once again to make it the new reference page. The anchor points
on its borders then turn dark cyan.

264
26
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-288

Note: After you have aligned multiple pages with one page, you can further use the
toolbar icon to team them into a group. And then, you can also use the toolbar icon
to center the group on the sheet.

4. Configure properties of page content

Choose a single page, and then choose the Content tab on the property panel. Here you
can configure the properties related to the page content.

Figure 2-289

1) Position the content on the page. You can change the position through the nine-point
diagram. By default it is centered, i.e. if the page size reduces, the edges of the content
may be cut off; if the page size increases, blank spaces may be added to the edges.

Figure 2-290

2) Rotate the content. By default, the content is rotated along with the page, as shown in
the middle. By clicking the four rotation icons under the Content tab, you can separately
control the orientation of the content, which may be different from that of the page, as
shown at the right.

265
 User Guide

Figure 2-291

3) Scale the content. You can input the scaling percentages in the Horizontal and
Vertical boxes, or click the toolbar icon to open an independent setup window.

Figure 2-292

6.1.4 Add Marks

Choose the Mark tab at the left of the composer window (if your monitor resolution is
not big enough, click the symbol below the Paper tab to find out the Mark tab),
and then choose a mark, drag it to proper position on the sheet.

Figure 2-293

266
26
 Using ElecRoc Client

Mark properties, including position, direction, line width, line length, block size, can be
re-defined through the parameters on the property panel.

6.1.5 Ganging on Back Side

When your sheet is composed of both the front and back sides, if you add a page or mark
to any side, both the Front and Back boxes under the Template tab of the property
panel will be checked, and in this case, a relevant blank page or mark will be created on
the reverse side. Therefore, after the ganging on the front side is done, an identical
ganging consisting of blank pages and marks will appear on the back side.

Figure 2-294

Switch to the Page tab, and drag other pages to these blank pages one by one.

Figure 2-295

By this way, you can greatly improve the ganging efficiency on the back side. You can
disable this relevance by un-checking the Back boxes of all the front-side pages or marks.
In this case, there would be no relevant blank page or mark appears on the back side.

267
 User Guide

6.1.6 Submit Signature

Click the toolbar icon to open the following dialog box. Check the signature sheet(s)
you want to submit, and then click OK.

Figure 2-296

ElecRoc pops up message to inform that the operation is successfully. Close the message
and switch to the job window, then you can see the generated surface(s) in the output file
queue under the Composer node.
The ganged surface(s) can then be sent for further process by nodes like mono or color
printer, pre-RIP Proof, Rasterizer (then can be further sent to post-RIP proof, 1 Bit TIFF
Export), PDF Merger (merged file can be further processed as standard PDF file by PDF
Export), and etc.

6.2 Create Signature

6.2.1 About Signature
A pane on the ganging window is designed for you to view, manage, or perform other
related operations to the signatures. It can be expanded when you click the Signature
tab at the left edge of the window.

268
26
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-297
Here shows all the signatures you have created. The signature-related operations can be
performed with the right-click menu items, or the menu items popped-up when the
icon is clicked. Take the item Sheet Info as example, if you choose it, you will then
open an independent window, learning the information such as printing method, plate
size, paper size, file type, color mode, and so on.

6.2.2 Create New Signature

You can create a new signature by way of:
 Choose from the main menu File > New Signature;
 Use the key combination Alt + T;
 Click the toolbar icon ;
 Right-click on the Signature pane or the top blank part of the signature editing
area and choose New Signature;
 Open the Preference menu and choose New Signature;
 When no signature or template is opened in the composer window, double-click
the signature editing area;
 If you have already opened a signature or template, right-click the blank area
above the signature editing area and choose New Signature. If you
double-click at this moment, you can create a signature based on the latest
signature settings.

6.2.3 Signature Properties

The setup window for creating a new signature is as shown in the below, most of the
parameters are about the signature’s property.

269
 User Guide

Figure 2-298

1. From Paper
From Paper means that the sheet is in the general sense, usually output on the paper. As
shown above, choose From Paper at the upper-left corner of the window. In this case,
you will create a signature based on a paper defined by the Paper parameters, i.e. the
width and height of the paper become the width and height of the signature. Such
signature appears as follows in the ganging window and the job’s surface preview
window.

Figure 2-299
Choose a paper type from the Paper dropdown list in the New Signature window. This
list provides a variety of optional papers. The paper properties, including manufacturer,
color of paper white, paper thickness, width and height, are displayed in the below once
you have chosen a paper, but not editable, you can switch to the Paper tab (at the left of
the composer window) to modify the paper properties, if needed.
If the optional papers do not meet your actual need, you can choose the option Custom,
and then input specific paper size in the then activated Width and Height boxes. You can
click the button to exchange the width and height. Manufacturer, Paper White and
Paper Thickness are optional parameters, with which you can input related descriptive
information, if needed.

270
27
 Using ElecRoc Client

2. From Plate
Your signature can directly base on the plate, i.e. you can make the sheet size equal the
plate size, and on the sheet, reserve a punch area, add the punch marks, center marks,
the side guide marks. In the New Signature window, choose From Plate at the
upper-left corner.

Figure 2-300

Parameters then can be divided into two parts, Plate Property and Paper Properties.
You need to specify a plate by way of the Plate Property parameters, at this moment,
the Paper can be viewed as the area available for the ganging on the plate. Such
signature appears as follows in the composer window and the job’s preview window.

Figure 2-301

In the composer window, the largest area (in a light gray background, by default)
represents the signature based on the Plate Property settings. It consists of a punch
area, the punch marks, the center marks, the side guide marks, and the paper. The

271
 User Guide

default background color for the punch area is slightly darker than that for the signature.
The blank area without any default background color is defined by the Paper Properties
parameters, representing the area available for the ganging, and usually smaller than
the plate. The background colors for the plate, punch area, and the paper can all be
customized. The background colors are displayed in the composer window, only for ease
in the ganging operations; they will not be output on the finally generated signature.
The plate and paper properties include:
 Plate properties
Plate: Choose a plate type from the Plate dropdown list. This list provides some
commonly-used plate sizes. The plate properties, including device type, width, height,
punch area, side guide, punch and center marks, are displayed in the below once you
have chosen a plate, but not editable, you can switch to the Plate tab (at the left of the
composer window) to re-define the plate properties, if needed.
If there is no suitable plate for your demand, you can choose Custom, to activate the
Plate Property and Sheet Marks parameters, including:
Device Type: Optional, here you can input any related descriptive information.
Width, Height: Here you can input specific plate size. The button enables you to
exchange the width and height.
Punch Area: If you need to punch in the later-on plate making, you can reserve a special
area on the sheet for the punching. This parameter controls the width of the punch area.
Its position is determined by the Benchmarks parameter in the below, it may be at the
left, right, top or bottom side of the plate. If you don’t need the punch area, you can set
the value to 0.
Punch Mark: ElecRoc adds a punch mark at the center of the punch area.

Figure 2-302

Center mark: If checked, ElecRoc adds a kind of line marks at the center of the four
paper sides. Here you can also define the line width and length for this mark.
Side Guide: If checked, it adds a mark as onto the sheet, for the side guide on the
printing press to precisely position the paper. Note that this setting may be of no effect in
case that the press model does not install the side guide. Checking it, you can further
define the length, width, line width, position of the mark, the sheet side(s) on which it
appear, and the separations on which it will be output. The Left and Right boxes control
which side(s) of the sheet it appears on. The separation options include C, M, Y, K and
Spot Color. E.g. if you do not want the mark to appear on the spot color separation, you

272
27
 Using ElecRoc Client

can let the Spot Color box unchecked.

Benchmarks: It controls the position of the side guide mark. There are four options: top,
bottom, left, and right, as shown in the below. In the caption such as left/top, the former
refers to the position of the punch area, the latter the position of the side guide mark.

left/ top right/ bottom up/ left bottom/ right

Figure 2-303

 Paper properties
The Paper and Paper Properties settings are the same as that mentioned in the above
section on how to create a signature based on a paper.
Paper Position: It refers to the paper’s position on the plate. The default position is
centering, i.e. the top and bottom margins are equal, and the left and right margins are
equal, too. In this case, the four margins are calculated automatically by ElecRoc based
on the plate and paper sizes. If you uncheck the Center box, you can activate the four
margin edit boxes, in which you can input custom values. Note that, the sum of the top
and bottom margins, as well as that of the left and right margins, limited by the plate and
paper sizes, are fixed. Therefore, if the top margin is changed, the bottom margin will
change accordingly, so do the left and right margins.

3. Printing Method
By way of the Printing Method dropdown list in the New Signature window, you can
create signatures that support various printing methods. Five printing methods are
supported: single-sided, sheetwise, work and turn, work and tumble, and perfector.

Single-sided Sheetwise Work and Turn Work and Tumble Perfector

Figure 2-304

6.2.4 Signature Operations

The signature-relevant operations include:

1. Open/Close Signature
Under the Signature tab at the left of the window, you can double-click any of them to
open it in the signature editing area. If you want to open an outside signature, please
click the toolbar icon , or choose from the main menu File > Open, and then find out
your signature from the pop-up dialog box and open it.
More than one signature can be opened in the editing area. When a signature is opened,
a tab named with the signature name will appear at the top of the editing area. You can

273
 User Guide

click the tabs to switch between the signatures.

You can click the icon in front of the tab, or double-click the tab, or right-click on blank
area and choose Close, Close Other, Close All, to close the opened signature(s).

2. Edit Signature
You need to perform a series of editing operations, such as configuring signature
properties, adding pages, adding layout, and adding marks.
1) Configure signature
The signature properties, including the plate and paper size and other properties can be
re-defined on the property panel once you choose the signature.
2) Add pages and marks
Pages and marks are to be added onto the signature to form a surface. You can add pages
and marks, configure their properties, perform operations such as alignment, rotation,
zooming, so as to gang them exactly as you need.
3) Add layout and blank pages
The layout is a group of blank pages orderly-arranged in a specific layout. You can add a
layout or separately blank pages into each signature, and then drag real pages onto the
layout or blank pages to complete the ganging.

3. Save Signature
Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the main menu File > Save, to save the
signature in current job. In this way, you will not lose the signature data even if you close
the composer window, the job, or ElecRoc client.
Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the main menu File > Save as, and you can save
the current signature with another name and destination.
If you close the composer window without saving your signature, ElecRoc will pop up
message suggesting you to save it.

4. Submit Signature
After you have finished the ganging of the pages on your signature, you can submit the
signature to the current job. Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the main menu
File > Submit Signature to open the Submit Signature dialog box. Check the
signatures you want to submit, and specify the signature preview resolution, and then
click OK.

274
27
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-305

The dialog box lists all the signatures existing in the composer window, those checked by
default are opened ones. If you check Only display the current opened signature, it
lists only those that have been opened. The buttons Select All and Clear enable you to
select or unselect all the signatures one time. The valid range for the preview resolution
is 10~144 DPI. If you have enabled the settings through the main menu Edit >
Preference > General Parameters > Signature Checking, it can examine the sheets
and label the error ones. Details on the error, such as the surface is a blank, are displayed
at the bottom of the dialog box when you choose an error sheet. ElecRoc supports you to
submit blank signature sheets, but it will pop up message for you to confirm such
submission in advance.
The submission starts once you click OK, and a progress bar then appears to show the
progress. During the progress, you can click Cancel to stop the submission. It pops up
message informing the result when the submission is completed.

Figure 2-306

Switch to the job window, and you will then see the submitted surfaces in the output file
queue under the Composer node.

275
 User Guide

5. Copy, Delete and Clear

Choose a signature under the Signature tab, and then right-click to open a short-cut
menu. By using the items herein, you can copy, delete and clear signature.
Copy a signature: Copy the selected signature to form a new one.
Delete Signature: Delete the selected signature(s).
Clear Signature: Delete all the signatures under the tab.
The above menu items can also be gained by clicking the Preference icon at the
upper-right of the signature list.

6.3 Add Pages

6.3.1 Ganging Modes
The interactive manual ganging is the main ganging mode, but in order to improve the
ganging efficiency, ElecRoc provides also the automatic ganging. The two modes can be
combined for use.

1. Manual Ganging
In this case, the Manual Ganging icon in the toolbar is checked. It is the default
mode. Under this mode, you can make various interactive operations and configurations
to the pages added on the sheet, such as positioning, rotation, and alignment.

2. Automatic Ganging
This mode automatically gangs the pages as per your specified page space and margin,
so as to save your ganging time and improve the efficiency.

Figure 2-307

Check the toolbar icon or to gang pages automatically. The two icons represent two
sub-modes, re-ganging and additional ganging. A setup window then appears when
you check any of the two icons. In this window, you can specify the space between pages
and the margin. Keep the window opened when you have specified the two settings, and
then add pages to the sheet. The newly-added pages will then be automatically ganged
as per the specified space and margin.
1) Re-ganging (check )
Each time when you add new pages, it always automatically gangs all the pages on the

276
27
 Using ElecRoc Client

sheet. Under this mode, pages will be arranged towards the lower-left corner of the sheet
as close as possible. The setup window is shown as follows:

Figure 2-308

Page Space: It is the space between any two abutting pages in the horizontal and
vertical directions. It may be the space between the trim boxes of the two pages, or that
between the media boxes. The unit for the space can be mm, inch or point.
Page Margin: It is the margin between the page and the paper edge.
Rotate 90: If checked, newly-added pages will be rotated 90 degrees before the
automatic ganging.
Allow Replacement: If checked, page replacement happens when you drag new pages
onto the existing pages.
New Arrange: Arrange all pages on the sheet as per the specified space and margin.
2) Additional ganging (check )
Each time when you add new pages, it only automatically gangs the new pages, i.e. the
existing pages on the sheet remain unchanged. The parameters are the same as those
mentioned above.
E.g. suppose we need to gang an A4 page and an A3 page, each time we add only one
page, and A4 is prior to A3. In the “re-ganging” mode, as shown at the left, ElecRoc
re-calculate the positions of all the pages, even if A3 is added later, it may be placed in
front of A4, at the lower-leftmost corner. In the “additional ganging” mode, as shown at
the right, ElecRoc only arranges the newly-added pages each time, A3 is added later, so
it is placed behind A4.

Figure 2-309

277
 User Guide

6.3.2 Add Pages

To add pages to the sheet, you need only to choose the pages at the left of the window,
and then drag them to the sheet.

1. Page Sources
At the left of the ganging window, you can choose the pages to be ganged under the
Page tab.
Here lists all the pages you have submitted to the Composer node. In case that you
submit pages once again while the composer window is opened, please manually refresh
so that you can see the newly-submitted pages under this tab in time.
By default, the pages are shown in form of the thumbnail images. You can click the icon
at the upper-right of the pane to switch to the list view.

Figure 2-310

Note: The composite and pre-separation pages cannot be ganged on a same sheet.
Choose a page, right-click and choose Page Info, and you can then see if the page is a
composite or a pre-separation one.

2. Page Sequence
Under the manual or automatic ganging mode, if you choose multiple pages one time and
drag them to the sheet, their default page numbers on the sheet are dependent on their
sequence in the page list.
Methods to adjust the page sequence are as follows:
1) Under the list view, available under the Page tab:

278
27
 Using ElecRoc Client

 Click column head in the table to sort it in ascending/descending order;

 Choose one or more pages, and then click the icons / to adjust;
 Choose one or more pages, and then use the commands Up, Down, Move to
top, Move to bottom, and Move to, from the right-click menu or the
Preference menu.
2) Under the thumbnail view, available under the Page tab:
 Choose one or more pages, and then click the icons / , or use the following
commands from the right-click menu or the Preference menu.
Up: To move the selected page up one row in the table.
Down: To move the selected page down one row in the table.
Move to top: To move the selected page to the top row of the table.
Move to bottom: To move the selected page to the bottom row of the table.
Move to: To move the selected page to a specified row of the table.
Note: The page sequence will be reset according to their sequence in the input file queue
under the Composer node, when you reboot the composer window.

3. Intelligent Page Selection

For your convenience to choose multiple pages one time for ganging, both the
Preference menu and the right-click menu, under the Page tab, provide the
following four commands.
Select All: To select all the pages in the page list one time.
Select odd page: To select all the odd pages in the page list one time.
Select even page: To select all the even pages in the page list one time.
Reverse Select: To select all the unselected pages in the page list one time.

4. Add Blank Page

ElecRoc supports you to add blank page to the sheet. Click the toolbar icon , or choose
from the main menu Resource > New blank page to open the following dialog. Input
the page numbers, the width and height of each page, and then click OK.

Figure 2-311

279
 User Guide

6.3.3 Page Positioning

The page position can be defined in any of the following ways:
 Use mouse to drag freely;
 Enable the capturing capacity;
 Configure parameters on the property panel;
 Use the moving/nudging capacity.

1. Drag Page
As the simplest way, you can directly choose the page and then drag and move it freely
on the sheet. When you move the page in this way, you can refer to the rulers or the
pop-up coordinates at the lower-left corner to determine the adequate position.

2. Capture Page
You may notice that while the page is being moved, it may automatically be captured to
some specific positions, such as the plate borders and the grid lines. ElecRoc provides the
capacity to capture the page to auxiliary tools or other positions, so that you can position
the page on the sheet more easily and precisely.
1) Capture to plate and paper
When the object approaches to the borders of the plate or the paper, or the middle lines,
it will be aligned with them closely and automatically.

Figure 2-312

2) Capture to grid
Choose in the main menu Tools > Show Grid, to show the grid on the sheet, and
meanwhile, choose in the main menu Tools > Capture Grid. Now, when you move the
page close to the grid lines, you will see two crossed register lines in red on the sheet,
and the page will be automatically captured to the exact position where the grid line is.

280
28
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-313

The space between any two grid cells can be defined by way of the main menu Tools >
Grid Spacing. And the color of the grid lines can also be defined by way of the main
menu Edit > Preference > Color Settings.
3) Capture to guides
You can add horizontal or vertical guiding lines to the sheet. When the page approaches
to the line, it will be automatically captured to the position where the line is. As the grid
lines do, the guiding lines bring ease in page positioning.
1. Show guides. Choose from the main menu Tools > Show Guides.
2. Add guides. Place the cursor over the ruler, and then press down the left mouse
button and drag toward the sheet editing area, and then release the mouse button at
proper place. A setup dialog box appears. Input the precise coordinates, and then click
OK.
If you click the dashed cross at the upper-left of the sheet editing area (at the left of
the horizontal ruler, and the top of the vertical ruler), and then press down the mouse and
drag to the editing area, you can add two cross guides at the same time.

Figure 2-314

281
 User Guide

3. Capture to the guides. Choose from the main menu Tools > Capture Guides.
When you drag the page and make any edge of it approach to a guide line, the page will
be automatically captured to the position where the guide line is located.

Figure 2-315

4) Capture to other positions

You can also capture the page to other pages or marks. Such capacity is enabled if you
check items Capture page and other layout elements and Capture Mark, under the
main menu Tools.

3. Position Coordinates
You can use the coordinates to precisely define the page position.
1) Define the coordinate system
The default coordinate system is originated at the lower-left corner of the sheet. In
practice, you can choose another origin to re-build the coordinate system. Click the
toolbar icon . The editing area then becomes entirely grayed. Move the cursor on the
sheet, and you will see two cross lines, their crossing is the origin of the new system.
If you press down the Ctrl or Alt key meanwhile, you can choose to use one of the
commonly-used coordinate systems built on the plate or plate element.

Press down Ctrl Press down Alt

Figure 2-316

282
28
 Using ElecRoc Client

If you don’t press down the Ctrl or Alt key, when you move the cursor alone to proper
position and click the left mouse button, you will open a setup dialog box. The Origin
Location refers to the coordinates of the new origin on the default coordinate system.
Coordinate Axis refers to the directions of the X and Y axes.

Figure 2-317

2) Define the coordinates

The Position parameter on the property panel controls the exact position of your page
on the sheet. The coordinates define the position of actual page content, irrespective of
whether it contains bleed or not.
Nine anchor points: They represent nine anchor points on the page. Except the central
point, the rest eight points are all located on the borders. Your chosen point is displayed
in red on the page. The X and Y are just the coordinates of this anchor point on the
coordinate system.

4. Move/Nudge Page
1) Move the page
To move a page, you can choose the page and then click the toolbar icon or choose
from the main menu Edit > Move, to open a setup dialog box. Input the distance you
want to move in the horizontal and vertical directions, and then click OK. You can input
negative values.

283
 User Guide

Figure 2-318

2) Nudge the page

Choose the page and then press the arrow keys to nudge the page. When you click the
key once, you move the page one time. The page is moved in the direction indicated by
the arrow key, at a distance specified by the main menu Edit > Preference >
Appearance Settings > Offset Step.

5. Lock/Unlock
After you have determined the page position, you can lock it, so as to prevent it from
being unintentionally moved. You can lock a page in any of the following ways:
 Click the toolbar icon ;
 Right-click and choose Lock;
 Choose from the main menu Object > Lock;
 Use shortcut keys Ctrl + L.
Being locked, a symbol appears at the upper-right corner of the page. The icon, the
menu item, and the shortcut keys used for unlocking the page are , Unlock and Ctrl +
Shift + L.

6.3.4 Page Properties

The property panel located below the sheet editing area can show the properties of a
page when you choose this page. The two tabs divide properties into two groups,
Template and Content.

Figure 2-319

284
28
 Using ElecRoc Client

1. Template Page
Template page is a kind of pages used for modeling. It does not contain any real content,
but it does define the position of the page on the sheet, the space size of the page on the
sheet, the rotating direction, whether it contains the front and/or back side, the bleeding
size, whether it is knocked out, whether it contains cutline marks, and the position and
scaling for the content it will contain, and the page number, and etc.
For your convenience to create ganging template, each time after you create a sheet and
drag real pages into it, ElecRoc will automatically base on the properties like size and
position of the real pages to generate corresponding template pages, so that you can
extract a template from these pages easily, if needed. Therefore, by default, the
properties of the template page are entirely the same as those of the real page.

2. Rotate
You can choose any of the following methods to rotate the template page.
 Under the Template tab on the property panel, choose the Rotate arrows , ,
or , your chosen arrow is then shown in highlight;
 Choose the icons , or in the toolbar;
 Choose from the main menu Object > Rotate > Rotate 180, or Rotate 90
(Clockwise), or Rotate 90 (Counterclockwise);
 Use shortcut keys, press down Alt, and meanwhile press an arrow key.
By default, the rotating direction of the page content is the same as that of the template
page. But you may also specify a different content direction. To do so, switch to the
Content tab, and choose a different Rotate arrow.

3. Front and Back

When the printing method is set to Sheetwise, or Work and Turn, or Work and
Tumble, or Perfector, and you add a page or mark onto the sheet or onto any side of
the sheet, by default, both the Front and Back boxes on the property panel will be
checked, and a relevant blank page or mark will appear on the opposite or reverse side.
Its properties such as size, position and direction are the same as the added page or
mark or keep relevance with each other.
You can uncheck any of the two boxes to delete the page or mark on the converse side.

4. Size
The size of the template page may be not equal to the size of the page content. If the
content size is smaller than the page size, and meanwhile the content is not scaled, then
part of the content may be cut off after the output. If the content size is larger than the
page size, and still the content is not scaled, then there would be much space around the
content.
By default, the size of the template page is equal to that of the page content. If needed,
you may also modify the size of the template page.
 Choose the page and move the cursor to any anchor point on the page border,
turning the cursor to an arrow like , and then press down the left mouse
button and drag it. In this way, you can adjust the page size freely;
 Under the Template tab on the property panel, input proper Size values.

5. Bleeding

285
 User Guide

The Bleeding parameter controls the size of the bleed box of the template page.
1) Show bleed box: Choose from the main menu View > Show bleeding box;
2) Color of the bleed box: The main menu Edit > Preference > Color Settings >
Bleeding Box.
3) Default bleeding: The main menu Edit > Preference > General Parameters >
Default Bleeding.

6. Cut Line
It includes external cutline and internal cutline. If checked, ElecRoc will add
corresponding cut line marks at the four corners of the page. The default line width and
length of the marks are determined by main menu Edit > Preference > Mark
Parameter > Cut Line. After you have added this mark, you can change the line width
and length from the property panel, if needed.

7. Knock out
If not checked, after the surface has been screened by PDF Rasterizer, at the overlapping
area between two pages, the content from the lower page will be covered, as shown at
the left. If checked, the content from the lower page will appear at the transparent
overlapping areas.

Figure 2-320

6.3.5 Page Content

You can also configure the properties of the page content in the ganging, mainly through
the parameters under the Content tab on the property panel.

Figure 2-321

1. Page Position
It refers to the position of the page content on the page size defined by the template page.
The default position is at the center of the page. You can choose other position from the
nine-point diagram, and the then activated Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset edit
boxes enable you to input appropriate offset values.
Lock front and back: In case that the printing method is set to a method other than

286
28
 Using ElecRoc Client

Single-sided, this option can then control the positional relevance between the contents
on the front and back sides. E.g. in Sheetwise, if the content on the front side moves
leftward, then the content on the back side will automatically move rightward, with same
offset value, vice versa.

2. Rotate
You can control the direction of the page content on the template page through the four
arrows.

3. Zoom
Here refers to the scaling ratio of the page content to its original size.
 Input the percentages in the Horizontal and Vertical edit boxes on the
property panel;
 Click the toolbar icon ;
 Choose from the main menu Object > Zoom.
When you choose the latter two methods to scale the page content, you will open an
independent setup window. In this window, you will not only see information on the page
name and size, but also choose more flexible scaling options.

Figure 2-322

287
 User Guide

No Zoom: To cancel the scaling setting, i.e. to restore the content to its original size.
Content scaled to fit the template: To automatically scale the content according to
the size of the template page, making the content fully fill in the page.
Custom Zoom: You can customize the scaling percentages in the horizontal and vertical
directions, or you can specify the width and height of the content after the scaling. If you
check Same proportion scaling, the scaling percentages in the horizontal and vertical
directions will remain the same.

4. Page Clipper
Choose a page and use any of the following methods to open the Page Clipper window.
 Click the toolbar icon ;
 Choose from the main menu Edit > Page Clipper;
 Right-click and choose Page Clipper.

Figure 2-323

What you need to do is to define a suitable crop box. The page content outside of the crop
box is cut off at last. To adjust the size and position of the crop box, you can freely drag
the box or its anchor point, or you can also input the precise coordinates, width and
height. The toolbar at the top also provides some control icons for you to define the
position and size with ease.
Click the toolbar icon when you have defined a proper crop box. For more information,
refer to the section 4.3.2 Page Clipper.

288
28
 Using ElecRoc Client

5. Front & Back Content Swap

ElecRoc supports you to swap the content between the front and back pages.
On the front or back side of the sheet, choose the page(s) and then click the toolbar
icon , or choose the main menu Edit > Front Back swap, and then you can do the
content swapping.

6. Page Swap
ElecRoc supports you to swap the content between any two pages.
On the sheet, choose any two pages and then click the toolbar icon , or choose the
main menu Edit > Swap, and then you can do the content swapping.

7. Manual Swap
ElecRoc supports you to manually swap the content between two pages.
Choose the toolbar icon , and then drag a page onto another page, and you will see the
cursor turning to , release the mouse button and then you do the content swapping.

8. Fit Page
This function can re-set the page size according to the content size. It is usually applied
to the case when the content size becomes different from that of the page.
To do so, choose the page and then click the toolbar icon or choose the main menu
Object > Fit.

6.3.6 Page Operations

1. Layer Structure
You need to know about the up and down relations in case that two or more pages are
overlapping each other. ElecRoc views each page as a unique layer. And the upper layer
always overlaps the lower one. By default, ElecRoc judges if a layer is old or new by the
time it is created, the newer layer always overlaps the older one, i.e. the newer layer is
in the upper, the older one is in the lower. This sequence can be customized.
The layer sequence and classification can be viewed in the Layer Structure pane.
Choose from the main menu View > Layer Structure to display this pane.

289
 User Guide

Figure 2-324

To change the layer position in the sequence, choose the page, and then do any of the
following:
 Click the toolbar icons , , , ;
 Choose from the main menu Object > Arrangement > Bring to front, or
Send to back, or Bring forward, or Send backward.

2. Efficient step & repeat

Copy repeatedly one single page so as to produce multiple pages arranged according to
certain sequence and page space.
Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the main menu Edit > Efficient step and
repeat, to get a floating setup dialog box, with the cursor turning to .

Figure 2-325

And then, choose the page, press down the left mouse button and drag it on the sheet.
You will then see new pages being formed on the sheet around the base page. Release
the mouse when it has produced the number of pages you want to produce.

290
29
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-326

Parameters related include:

Benchmarks: Trim box to trim box refers to use the distance between the trim boxes
of the two pages as the page space, while Media box to media box refers to that
between the media boxes of the two pages.
Space: The page space between any two pages in the horizontal and vertical directions.
Group: To combine the base and new pages into a group after the step and repeat.
Locked Page: To lock the base and new pages after the step and repeat.
External/Internal CutLine: To include cutline marks on all the new pages after the
step and repeat.
Only Front: The cutline marks only appear on the pages in the front side of the sheet.
Bypassing page: To bypass the existing page on the sheet. I.e. at the place where an
existing page is located, it does not produce any new page.
Bypassing mark: To bypass the existing mark on the sheet.
Bypassing group: To bypass the existing group on the sheet.

3. Smart step & repeat

Choose from the main menu Edit > Smart Step and Repeat, and you will open a setup
window as shown in the below, so as to perform a smart step & repeat operation.

291
 User Guide

Figure 2-327

More options become available, compared to the rapid step & repeat setup window.
Direction of step and repeat: Starting from one corner, step and repeat toward the
opposite corner. Thus there are 4 directions. By default, ElecRoc can automatically
choose a proper direction, but if needed, you can choose any other direction.
Fill the entire paper: To generate multiple pages till they fill the entire paper.
Page Arrange: To generate a specified number of pages in both the horizontal and
vertical directions, as defined here.
Fill Area: To generate multiple pages till they fill the area as specified here.
Center Page: To center the base page and generated pages on the sheet.

4. Alignment
After you have added multiple pages into the sheet, you may need to align them.
1) Selection of multiple pages
To choose or select more than one page (or page object) at one time, you can do any of
the following:
 Press down the Ctrl key at the same time;

292
29
 Using ElecRoc Client

 Press down the left mouse button on any blank area inside or outside the sheet,
and then drag it in any direction to form a rectangle. In this way you can choose
all the pages inside the rectangle.
After you have chosen multiple pages, you can perform not only the page alignment, but
also the operations like moving, cutting, copying/pasting, deleting, rotating, and
configuring the bleed, the size, and etc.
2) Align pages
You can align pages in any of the following ways:
 Click the toolbar icons , , , , , , ;
 Choose the menu items corresponding to the above icons: Object >
Alignment > Vertical align top/ Vertical align center/ Vertical align
bottom/ Horizontal align left/ Horizontal align center/ Horizontal align
right, and Object > Center > Horizontal and vertical/ Horizontal/
Vertical.
The default benchmark is the firstly selected page, but this can be re-defined manually.
After you have chosen multiple pages, click one of them once again to make it the
benchmark page. The anchor points on the benchmark page are shown in dark, while
those on the rest pages are in white.
The alignment is applied to all page objects, including pages, marks, and groups.

5. Grouping
You can combine multiple pages or marks as one group. The relative positions of the
objects each other within the group are fixed, so that they can be ganged as a whole.
1. Choose the pages you want to group.
2. Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the main menu Object > Group.
To break the group, you can choose the group and then click the toolbar icon , or choose
from the main menu Object > Ungroup.

6. Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Hold, Delete, Delete Contents

ElecRoc supports some basic and commonly-used operations on the pages such as
cutting, copying, pasting, and deleting. In fact, these operations are also applied to the
page groups and marks on the sheet. Besides, ElecRoc also supports two other
operations on the pages, pasting hold and deleting content.
Paste Hold: The new page and the original one will be located at the same position after
the pasting, visually overlapping each other.
Delete Contents: Delete the content of the page, making the page a blank one.
These operations can be performed in many ways:
 Choose the page and then click the toolbar icons , , , , ;
 Right-click and choose Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Hold, Delete, Delete
Contents;
 Choose from the main menu Edit > Cut/ Copy/ Paste/ Paste Hold/ Delete/
Delete Contents;
 Shortcut keys. Cut: Ctrl+X; Copy: Ctrl+C; Paste: Ctrl+Shift+V; Paste Hold:
Ctrl+V; Delete: Delete; Delete Contents: Ctrl+Delete.

293
 User Guide

6.4 Add Marks

You can add a wide range of marks to the sheet.

6.4.1 Mark Type

The marks that can be added to the sheet include:
1) Plate marks. On the sheet based on the plate, you can add punch marks , the side
guide marks such as , and center marks. For details, refer to From Plate in section
6.2.3.
2) Cutline marks. You can add the cutline marks such as to the four corners of any
page on the sheet. Refer to Cut Line in section 6.3.4 for details.
3) Default layout marks. Whenever you create an imposition, by default ElecRoc will
automatically add some marks, including cut lines (e.g. ), fold marks ( or ), cross
marks , registration marks ( or ), CMYK marks (e.g. ), and text
marks (e.g. ). For details, refer to Default
Layout Marks in section 6.5.3 and Mark Parameter in section 6.6.7.
4) Smart marks. It’s a kind of dynamic mark that can move smartly along with other
sheet object. The cutline marks, the most of the static marks, and the custom marks, can
be added as smart marks into your sheet. Their positions on the sheet are based on and
associated with specific sheet object, such as plate, paper, page, and layout. Once these
base objects move, they move as well. In this way, you do NOT need to re-set the marks
in cases that the pages on the sheet are to be changed. This provides great convenience
for you to create imposer template.
5) Static marks. ElecRoc provides 17 built-in marks available for you to manually add to
the sheet. They include cross reverse mark , internal target mark , oval target mark ,
cross mark , external target mark , line mark , vertical line mark , solid target
mark , rectangular reverse mark , T mark , three-fold mark , CMYK proof bar
(three ones , and ), color bar , step scale , and text mark .
6) Custom marks. You can add custom marks into ElecRoc system, for use in ganging. For
details on how to add custom marks into ElecRoc, refer to the section 6.6.4 Define Marks.

6.4.2 Smart Marks

As shown in the following figure, the bar mark located at the lower-left corner of
each page is a smart mark. As an example, it will always appear at the lower-left corner
of each page, whenever you move the layout, or modify the number of pages, or change
the page size, or even the page space.

294
29
 Using ElecRoc Client

1 3

Figure 2-328

Method to add smart mark: as shown above, ①, at the left of the window, expand
Mark > Smart Mark and define smart mark here; ②, choose the defined smart mark,
drag it into the sheet; at this point you have finished the adding operation; ③, for
convenience to choose the added smart mark for further operation, you can open the
Layer Structure panel (from main menu View > Layer Structure) to choose the
mark.

1. Mark Directory
In order to improve the usability and efficiency, ElecRoc enables you to create smart
mark template and manage the templates by way of directory. As the default directory
and the root directory, the directory Smart Mark can be used straight to store your smart
marks. And if needed, you can create sub-directory under it: choose Smart Mark,
right-click and then choose Create Directory. User-defined sub-directory can be
deleted or renamed via right-click menu items, if needed.

2. Define Smart Mark

The mark setting defined here is sort of a parameter template for your smart mark,
aiming to provide easiness for repetitive use.
Choose a directory, right-click and choose New, and then choose a mark type. The
mark’s property setup window then appears. Define each of the parameters, and then
click Save to save the setting under your chosen directory. If you click Save and apply,
you can not only save the setting, but also add the mark into the current sheet.

295
 User Guide

Figure 2-329
Here we introduce only the property parameters specific to the smart marks. As to other
parameters, please refer to the section 6.4.4 “Mark Properties”.
Name: The name for the mark property setting.
Type: The specific mark type, for example, the bar mark contains 5 specific types.
The position of the smart mark is dynamic and associated. It’s a relative position, and
thus needs to be defined by way of some reference variables.
Base: Please choose a sheet object or sheet location from the Base dropdown list, only
on which you can further define the exact position for the mark. The base could be plate,
paper, imposition, imposition bleed, page, page bleed, gutters, and margin. For example,
if you choose the page as base, the smart mark will then appear at certain position on
each page; if you choose imposition, the smart mark will then appear at certain position
on the layout. The bleed in page bleed or imposition bleed means to use the bleed box of
the page or imposition as the base.
Base diagram: The base position is further divided into 9 smaller points, top, bottom,
left, right, center, upper-left, lower-left, upper-right, and lower-right. The smart mark
will be located at one point of them.
Target diagram: The selected base point can be further divided into 9 directions. The
following figure shows a smart rectangle mark’s positions when the base is page and the
base point is lower-left, but the target direction is respectively set to lower-left, bottom,
and lower-right.

296
29
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-330
X, Y: When you have defined the exact position by way of the above three parameters,
you can still make the mark move horizontally and vertically by way of the X and Y edit
boxes, if needed. A positive X value means to move towards the right, while a positive Y
value means to move upwards. Negative values mean to move in reverse directions.

3. Add
You can add a smart mark if you click the button Save and apply in the mark’s property
setup window.
You can also add the smart mark after you have defined the mark, by choosing the mark
and then dragging it to any place on the sheet.
By using right-click menu items, you can also add smart mark after you have defined the
mark: choose the mark, right-click and choose Add to. The sub-option current sheet
means to add the mark into current sheet, while the sub-option all sheets means to add
the mark into all the sheets of the current template.

4. Edit, Delete
To edit an added smart mark: we recommend you to open the Layer Structure panel
when you are using the smart marks, see the figure ① in the below. This panel lists all
the smart marks that have been added onto the sheet. Choose a mark, right-click and
choose Edit, to open its property setup window. Re-define the parameters and then click
Save.

1
2

Figure 2-331
To edit a smart mark parameter template: at the location as shown in above figure ②
you can also edit the smart marks, by way of right-click menu items. In this way, you can
re-define the properties of the mark template, for repetitive use.
Delete a mark: The right-click menu item Delete enables you to delete an unneeded
smart mark. The already-added smart mark on your sheet can also be deleted by using
the Delete key on your keyboard.

5. Import, Export, Copy

ElecRoc supports you to import and export the smart mark templates. This operation can
be completed with the right-click menu items.

297
 User Guide

6.4.3 System and Custom Marks

The way to add the static and custom marks is as follows. Click the toolbar icon , or
check the Mark tab at the left of the composer window to expand the optional static or
custom marks. Then choose one mark and then directly drag it to the right sheet editing
area, and release the mouse at proper position.
Note: The custom marks are from PDF pages, thus are in two types, composite and
pre-separation. ElecRoc does not support you to combine these two types of marks onto
one same sheet.

6.4.4 Mark Properties

You can define the mark properties through the parameters on the property panel. But
the properties for various marks are different. E.g. the property panel for the mark is
shown as follows.

Figure 2-332

While that for the CMYK proof bar 3 turns to:

Figure 2-333

The property parameters for the static mark include:

 Position
It refers to the position of the mark on the sheet coordinate system.
 Rotate
The orientation of the mark on the sheet.
 Front, Back
They control if the mark appears on the front side, or the back side, or both sides.
 Line width, Line height
The line width and height of the mark. The default line width and height can be defined
from the main menu Edit > Preference > Mark Parameter > Other Mark.
 Color
This parameter is available only for the line mark , vertical line mark , and step scale
mark . Optional colors include black (cmyk or mono), cyan, magenta, yellow, red,
green, and blue. Besides, you can also use custom color.
Customize mark color: If you choose Custom, you can customize a color in CMYK
mode.
 Only on black

298
29
 Using ElecRoc Client

This option is available for such marks as , , , , , , and . If checked,

the mark will be displayed and output only on the black separation.
 Bar mark features
The following parameters are specific to the CMYK proof bars and color bars.
Color block size: Each color bar is composed of multiple same-sized square blocks. This
parameter controls just the side length of such blocks. In this way, it controls the size of
the whole color bar.
Throughout the layout: If checked, the bar is repeated backwards throughout the
layout, starting from the place where the bar is located.
Spot Color: If checked, it adds the spot color block(s) at the end of the color bar. The
spot colors are those contained in the current sheet.
Insert 50% color blocks: This option is available only for the CMYK proof bar 3. If
checked, it adds the 50% K, C, M and Y blocks, and if the Spot Color option is checked
at the same time, it also adds 50% spot color block(s).
 Text mark features
Width, Height: The text size is controlled by Height. After you have defined the height,
you should define a width big enough to wholly display the text.
Comments: You can randomly input any text, or you can also add variables such as
surface name, time and date, which separately refer to the name of the current sheet,
the current time, and the current date.
Surface: Two options, Front/Back and A/B, are available for you to indicate the front
plate and back plate. Choose the style you prefer. Take the option Front/Back as example,
if the Comments parameter has contained the variable Surface, at the time being
output, the comments appearing on the front side of the your sheet will then contain the
text Front, while the back side contains the text Back.
Font: Font for the comments, Song Typeface, Boldface, Tahoma, Batang, or MingLiu.
And if needed, you can check Bold to make the comments boldfaced.
Swap: If checked, the text Front/Back or A/B in the mark will be swapped each other.
Sheet ID: The ID of the sheet. You can customize the first ID, and control if to number
in sequence algorithm. When the Comments parameter has contained the variable
Sheet ID, at the time being output, the comments appearing on the sheet will then
contain the ID defined here.
Binding > Signature ID: If checked, when the Comments parameter contains the
variable Signature ID, the ID will be bound with the signature specified in the dropdown
list below.
Vertical text: If checked, the characters will be arranged vertically.

6.4.5 Edit Marks

The mark-related operations, such as moving, copying, pasting, deleting, grouping, are
the same as those related to the page. For details, refer to the introductions above.

299
 User Guide

6.5 Use Ganging Template

You can gain powerful ganging and folding capacities approximate to the imposer.

6.5.1 Extract Template

You can extract the sheet setting, as well as the properties of the pages on the sheet, to
form a ganging template, for repetitive uses. Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the
main menu File > Extract Template to open the following setup dialog box. Choose a
template directory and input the template name, and then click OK.

Figure 2-334

The icons , , in the dialog box are used separately to create, delete and rename
the template directory.

6.5.2 Create Template

Instead of extracting a template, you can separately create a new template, especially a
one containing a layout, through a special user interface. Generally, you need to go
through the following operations.

1. Choose Directory
This directory is designed for classification and management of the ganging templates.
Choose the Template tab at the left of the ganging window to expand the directory
structure. The Ganging Template is the root directory, under which you can directly
store your ganging template.
ElecRoc supports you to create a directory. First, choose an existing directory, e.g. the
root directory, as the superior directory of the new one. Then, click the Preference
icon or right-click, and choose Create Directory. And then, input the directory name
in the pop-up dialog box, and click OK.

300
30
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-335

2. Create Template
Steps for creating a template are as follows:
1. Choose a template directory. As mentioned above, please choose one directory under
the Template tab, and if needed, you can create a new one. The default is the root
directory, i.e. the Ganging Template.
2. Do any of the following:
 Click the toolbar icon ;
 Right-click and choose New Template;
 Open the Preference menu and choose New Template;
 Choose from the main menu Resource > New Template.
3. Now you will open the New Template window. This window is very similar to the New
Signature window. Please define the template name, printing method, plate size, paper
size, and other properties, and then click OK.

Figure 2-336
4. The newly-created template then appears in the ganging window.

301
 User Guide

Figure 2-337

At the left, you see the name has been added to the template directory, while at the right
ElecRoc spreads the editing interface.

3. Edit Template
It is basically a blank template after you have completed the above steps. Therefore, you
may need to perform further a series of editing operations, such as configuring the sheet
properties, creating a layout, adding pages, and adding marks.
1) Sheet properties
If your sheet is based on a plate, you can see the size and other properties of the plate
on the property panel once you choose it, and you can re-define all of its properties.
Same as the plate, the size and other properties of the paper can also be re-defined.
2) Add a layout
The layout here refers to a group of pages orderly arranged in a specific layout. For
details, refer to the section 6.5.3 Create Layout.
3) Add pages
Add blank page: Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the main menu Resource >
New blank page.
From real pages: Choose pages to be ganged from the Page tab at the left of the
ganging window, and then drag them to the sheet. You can base on these real pages to

302
30
 Using ElecRoc Client

form the template pages.

For page-related operations and configuration of the page properties, refer to relevant
introductions in section 6.4 Add Pages.
4) Add marks
To add a mark, choose a mark under the Mark tab at the left of the ganging window,
and then drag it to the sheet. After you have added a mark, you can re-define its
properties on the property panel.

4. Save Template
Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the main menu File > Save.

6.5.3 Create Layout

To create a layout in your template, do as follow: click the toolbar icon , or choose from
the main menu Resource > New Layout, to open the following setup window, define
the parameters as needed, and then click OK.

Figure 2-338

Note: You can also directly create a layout on the sheet of your signature.

1. Layout Properties

303
 User Guide

Rows Number: The rows number of the pages in the layout on the front side. That on
the back side is the same, if the template contains the back side.
Columns Number: The columns number of the pages in the layout on the front side.
That on the back side is the same, if any.
E.g. you can set to 3 rows and 2 columns, which indicates that the layout would contain
3×2=6 pages on the front side, i.e. 3 rows of pages and each row contains 2, or 2
columns of pages and each column contains 3. If the template has the back side, it
contains 6 pages as well on the back.
Alignment: Available in 4 most popular page alignment modes, up, down, head to head,
and foot to foot.
Rotate: To rotate the page and page content. Options include 0o, 90o, 180o, and 270o
counter-clockwise.
Offset: This setting controls the layout position on the template sheet. By default it is at
the center. When you use the nine-point diagram to choose other position, you can use
the X and Y to define the horizontal and vertical offsets related to the anchor point.
Lock: If checked, the layout’s position on the sheet will be locked. A locked layout cannot
be deleted or dragged in any direction on the sheet. And a symbol will appear at the
upper-right corner of a locked layout.

2. Page Properties
The properties include the page size and the orientation. The Size dropdown list provides
some commonly-used standard sizes for you to choose from. You can also choose
Custom to specify any other page size.

3. Margin
Page space: The space between two pages, as shown in the below by the area enclosed
by red dashed lines, available in two directions, horizontal and vertical.

Figure 2-339

304
30
 Using ElecRoc Client

The top space horizontally is shown as a1, i.e. the distance from the middle of the
horizontal page space to the upper page. The bottom space horizontally is shown as a2,
i.e. the distance from the middle of the horizontal page space to the lower page.
The left space vertically is shown as b1, i.e. the distance from the middle of the
horizontal page space to the leftward page. The right space vertically is shown as b2, i.e.
the distance from the middle of the horizontal page space to the rightward page.
Layout margin: The blank space bordering the layout on the sheet, as shown by the
area enclosed by green dashed lines.
The top margin is shown as c1, i.e. the distance between the top side and the page. The
bottom margin is shown as c2, i.e. the distance between the bottom side and the page.
The left margin is shown as d1, i.e. the distance between the left side and the page. The
right margin is shown as d2, i.e. the distance between the right side and the page.

4. Preview
At the bottom of the New Layout window shows a thumbnail image of the layout. If you
press down the mouse button on the thumbnail, you will get a zoomed-in thumbnail
image floating on the window, as shown in the below. At this moment, you can drag the
mouse to zoom in any other position on the layout.

Figure 2-340

305
 User Guide

5. Default Layout Marks

You may see some marks on the layout when you zoom in the thumbnail image. These
marks are automatically added by ElecRoc, and they may include cutline marks, fold
marks, cross marks, registration marks, CMYK marks, text marks, and other marks.
Choose from the main menu Edit > Preference > Mark Parameter to configure what
marks by default will be added when you create a layout.
Only the black: If checked, the default marks will be displayed and output only on the
black separation.

6.5.4 Configure the Layout

After you have created the layout, you can continue to configure its properties.

1. Layout Properties
 How to select a layout
Move the cursor over any border of the layout, wait till it turns to and then click the
mouse. Or press down the left mouse button at any blank area on the plate, then drag to
form a rectangle, ensuring the rectangle cover at least one page, and then release the
mouse button.
 The property panel for a layout
The property panel shows the layout-related properties once you have selected the
layout. Through these parameters, you can view and re-define the layout properties.

Figure 2-341

 Layout-related operations
1) Make use of the capturing capacities to change the layout position by drag-and-drop;
2) Use the toolbar icons , , , , , , , , , , , or corresponding
commands from the main menu or right-click menu, to perform such operations to the
layout as cutting, copying, pasting, deleting, moving, centering, rotating, ungrouping,
and locking.
Note that, it is no longer a layout after being ungrouped, and all its pages would then
become independent from each other.
3) As one group object, when being selected together with other sheet objects, the layout
can be in alignment with them, by way of the toolbar icons , , , , , , , or
corresponding menu items.
4) Click the toolbar icons , , , , or corresponding menu items, to adjust the
sequence of the layout as a layer related to other layers.

2. Page Properties
After you have created a layout, you can still re-define part of the page properties.
 Define page number

306
30
 Using ElecRoc Client

Choose a page and expand the Content tab on the property panel, and then input the
page numbers in the Front and Back edit boxes.
Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the main menu Edit > Set page number to
open a setup dialog box. Input the page numbers for both the front and back sides, and
then click on some page to apply the input numbers to the page. The numbers in the
dialog box will increase incrementally after the clicking.

Figure 2-342
 Configure content properties
Properties of the page content are controlled by the parameters under the Content tab
on the property panel. They include the offset, rotation, and the locking of the front and
back sides. Refer to related introductions in section 6.4 for details.

3. Other Objects
Here mainly refer to the marks and page space.
 Mark
1) You can add cutline marks to the page.
2) Choose one added mark, default mark or cutline mark, on the layout, and then you can
view and re-define its properties on the property panel, including line width, length,
whether it is present on the front or back sides, whether it is present only on the black
separation, and whether it is shown.
 Space
Also called margins, include the horizontal and vertical page space between pages, and
the space between the page and layout borders. When being chosen, its properties, such
as left margin and right margin, are shown on the property panel as well. Through them,
you can re-define the space size.

6.5.5 Manage Templates

1. Template Directory
The directory is used for classification and management on the ganging templates.
Choosing the Template tab, you expand the directory structure. The Ganging
Template is the root directory.
Choose a directory, and then click the Preference icon or right-click to get a menu, in
which you can obtain the directory-related operating commands.
 Create a directory
Choose Create Directory. In the pop-up dialog box, input the directory name, and then
click OK, to create a new directory.

307
 User Guide

 Directory management
Delete a directory: Choose Delete and then click OK in the follow-up confirm dialog
box.
Rename a directory: Choose Rename and then input the new name in the follow-up
dialog box and click OK.

2. Copy, Delete, Rename template

After you have chosen one template, you can use the commands from the Preference
menu or the right-click menu such as Copy Template, Delete Template and Rename
Template to copy, delete and rename the chosen template.

3. Export/Import template
The right-click menu item Export Template enables you to export the
currently-selected template out of ElecRoc, while the Import Template item enables
you to import a template into ElecRoc, under the currently selected directory.
By using the Explorer (main menu Resource > Explorer), you can also export the
ganging templates out of ElecRoc system to your specified location, or import outside
ganging templates into ElecRoc system.

6.5.6 Apply the Template

The steps to apply a ganging template are as follows.
1. Open the template in the composer window. The templates are located under the
Template tab, and can be opened by double-click.
2. Submit pages to the template.
Switch to the Page tab, choose multiple pages and drag them onto any blank page of
the template, such as the no. 1 page. Release the mouse button, and then ElecRoc will
automatically place your pages into the blank pages according to the page sequence
under the Page tab and the page number defined in the template.
Therefore, please check up the page sequence under the Page tab before the ganging,
and if needed, you can use the right-click menu items or the Preference menu items,
such as Up and Down, to change the page sequence.
3. Submit signature.

308
30
 Using ElecRoc Client

6.6 More Features

For more flexibility and convenience, and higher efficiency, ElecRoc ganging also provides
you with the following functions and features.

6.6.1 About the User Interface

1. The Composer Window
Main Menu

Toolbar

Resource Management Editing area

pane

Layer Structure

Property panel

Navigator

Status bar
Figure 2-343

As shown above, the composer window is composed of the following parts:

Main menu: Provides operational commands related to the ganging for you to use.
Toolbar: Consists of multiple icons or buttons that can substitute for some
commonly-used commands, for you to quickly perform the operations.
The resource management pane: The pane located at the left of the window is
designed for you to manage the ganging-related resources, such as pages, signatures,
templates and marks. They are grouped into eight tabs, each with a unique operating
interface.
The editing area: The body of the ganging window is an area special for you to edit your
signature and sheet, or perform various ganging operations.
Property panel: Lists the property parameters of your selected sheet or selected object
on the sheet for you to configure.

309
 User Guide

Layer Structure pane: a floating pane, displayed after selection, listing the layer
structure of current sheet. In layer structure, each sheet object is considered as a layer.
Navigator pane: a floating pane, displayed after selection, showing the thumbnail
image of the current sheet for you to navigate.
Status bar: Displays the plate size, paper size, unit, number of the selected objects, and
the cursor position. In addition, it contains two buttons at the rightmost, which can be
used to control the display of the front and/or back sides and the display percentage.
You can use the mouse dragging to adjust the sizes of the resource management pane,
the editing area, and the property panel. But when you re-open the ganging window,
their sizes restore to a default setting. When you have expanded any tab of the resource
management pane, you can hide the tab and the pane by clicking the tab once again. The
property panel can be displayed or hidden by clicking the buttons / . The signature
editing area can hold more than one opened signature or template, each one with a tab
locating on the top, named with the signature or template name. You can click these tabs
to easily switch between them.

2. Toolbar icons
 The position of the icons in the toolbar
The icons in the toolbar are classified into several groups, separated by the symbol .
Press down the left mouse button at the blank area between the icons within a group,
then drag forward or backward and drop at any other , you can move the group of icons
to the place where you drop the mouse button.
 Show/hide toolbar icons
Choose from the main menu Edit > Preference, and then choose Custom Toolbar
from the pop-up window.
The window lists all the toolbar icons that can be displayed and used and how they are
grouped. Expand each group of icons. A tick in front indicates to show, while a cross in
front indicates to hide. If needed, you can cross the icons that are less used or not used.

310
31
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-344

For your convenience, ElecRoc provides buttons such as Unfold, Fold, Select All, Clear,
and Reset Default. By default, all the icons are shown in the toolbar.
 The toolbar right-click menu
You can right-click on the blank area in the toolbar to get a shortcut menu, and then use
the options to control if to show or hide a whole group of icons. If you check Lock
Toolbars, then you cannot move the groups of icons. The Custom option enables you to
separately control if to show or hide each of the icons.

Figure 2-345

3. Display of the front and back sides

The controller at the bottom of the ganging window

311
 User Guide

controls the display of the front and back sides on the editing area. If you choose or ,
only one side (front or back) is displayed, and if you choose , both sides are displayed.
Transparency: This option is applied to the sheet that contain both the front and back
sides. It refers to the transparency of the front side on the back side, or that of the back
side on the front side.

4. Display proportion
The sheet display proportion can be adjusted in the following ways:
1) Use the Zoom tool . Choose this toolbar icon. The cursor turns to after you
choose.
 Press down the left mouse button and drag the mouse, to form a rectangle in
dashed-line on the sheet. The content inside the rectangle will be zoomed in on
the editing area in the possibly biggest proportion.
 Scroll up and down with the mouse wheel;
2) Use the toolbar icons , , , and . The icon zooms in, the icon zooms
out, and each click on these two icons zooms in/out in a fixed scaling factor, which can be
defined with the Preference parameter Appearance Settings > Zoom Step. The
icon zooms to display the whole sheet in fitting proportion, and the icon zooms to
display the currently-selected object in fitting proportion. The object may be the sheet,
the layout, a page, or a mark. The icon zooms to a specified display proportion. Click
it, and you can choose from the optional proportions, such as 2:1, 1:1, 1:2, or you can
choose Custom to specify other proportion.
ElecRoc also provides menu commands corresponding to the above icons, under the
View menu.
3) Press down the Ctrl key and meanwhile scroll the mouse wheel to-and-fro to zoom in
and out the view. The cursor turns to if you press down the Alt key. At this time, you
can zoom in and out the view as you do with the Zoom tool .
4) Use the zoom controller at the lower-rightmost of the ganging window “Zoom: 61%
”. Here you can not only know the current zoom proportion, but also
can click the icons and to zoom out and in incrementally (5% each click), or adjust
the sliding bar to zoom in and out.

5. Sheet Navigation
For your convenience to browse the sheet when the view has been zoomed in, i.e. only
part of the sheet content is displayed in the editing area, ElecRoc provides you with the
following 4 optional capacities.
 Use the mouse wheel to scroll the sheet up and down;
 Drag the horizontal or vertical scroll bar;
 Choose the toolbar icon , and then you can press down the left mouse button
to drag the sheet freely;
 Make use of the Surface pane.
Choose from the main menu View > Navigator to display the Navigator pane.

312
31
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-346

In this area, ElecRoc displays the thumbnail images of the front and back sides of the
sheet. When the zoom proportion increases to a certain extent, you will see a red
rectangle box on the thumbnail image (the bigger the proportion, the smaller the box
would be). The content inside the box are just the zoomed-in content in the editing area.
Therefore, if you move the red box by clicking anywhere outside it on the thumbnail
image, or if you drag and drop the box directly, you can subsequently change the content
currently displayed in the editing area. In this way, by clicking or dragging on the
thumbnail image, you can easily zoom in and browse the sheet in the editing area.

6. Layer Structure
ElecRoc introduces the concept of the layer. Each object on the sheet is considered by
default as a unique layer. From the Layer Structure pane, you can adjust the sequence of
the layers, to correctly deal with some issues come from the case when the objects
overlap each other.

7. Sheet Object
ElecRoc provides such commands under the View menu as Show preview image,
Show file name, Display Page, Show Marks, Show bleeding box, Show trim box,
and Show layout box, for you to control whether to show the sheet object or element
including preview image, file name, page number, mark, bleed box, trim box, layout box,
and etc. by default, all of them are shown on the ganging window.

8. Other Display
By using the commands Simple View and Operator View under the View menu, you
can hide the property panel and the resource management pane from the program
window, and by using the commands Show Guides and Show Grid under the Tools
menu, you can control whether to show or hide the guide or grid on the window.

313
 User Guide

6.6.2 Define Papers

You can create or define the paper options that are available for selection in creating a
sheet.

Figure 2-347

The operations related to defining a paper are all performed under the Paper tab. By
using the commands from the right-click menu or the Preference menu, you can
finish such common operations as creating, editing, copying, and deleting.
As shown in the above figure, each paper has six properties, among which the Name,
Height and Width are compulsory. The button enables you to exchange the width
and height. The Manufacturer, Paper White, and Paper Thickness are optional
properties. If needed, you can input related descriptions.
Now that you have defined the papers, you can quickly define the sheet size and save the
time to set the paper properties, by choosing the pre-defined paper options from the
Paper dropdown list, at the time when you open the New Signature window to create
a signature, or expand the property panel to edit the sheet.

314
31
 Using ElecRoc Client

6.6.3 Define Plates

The purpose, method of operation, and the application of the plates, are basically similar
to the papers mentioned above. The difference lies in that you need to define more
properties as to the plates.

Figure 2-348

 Punch area
If you need to punch in the later-on plate making, you can reserve an area on the sheet
special for the punching. Punch Area controls the width of the punch area. Its position
is determined by the Benchmarks parameter, it may be at the left, right, top or bottom
side of the plate. If you don’t need this area, you can set the value to 0.
 Punch marks
ElecRoc can add a punch mark at the center of the punch area.

Figure 2-349

 Side guide
ElecRoc can add the marks such as onto the sheet, for the side guide on the printing
press to position the paper, in case the press model installs the side guide.

315
 User Guide

Checking it, you can further define the length, width, line width, position of the mark, the
sheet side(s) on which it appear, and the separations on which it will be output. The Left
and Right boxes control which side(s) of the sheet it appears on. The separation options
include C, M, Y, K and Spot Color. E.g. if you do not want the mark to appear on the spot
color separation, you can let the Spot Color box unchecked. The Benchmarks box
provides four options, representing the mark position, shown as follows.

Figure 2-350
 Center marks
A line mark appears at the center of the four sides on the paper, if checked.
 Other parameter
Device Type: Optional property. You can input related description here.

6.6.4 Define Marks

Marks here refer to the user-defined marks. Steps for adding custom marks into ElecRoc
are as follows:
1. Use third-party software to make the mark, and save it as a file that can be supported
by ElecRoc, e.g. PDF, PS, TIFF, PRN, and etc.
2. Enter in ElecRoc’s job window and submit the mark file to PDF Generator. After the
process is completed, choose the generated PDF page, right-click and choose Add as
Mark.
Note: After PDF Generator’s process, the mark file can be further processed by nodes
like PDF Tools and Page Clipper. Under such node or when the toolbar icon Pages is
selected, you can still use the right-click menu item Add as Mark to perform the
operation.
3. Input the name of the custom mark, and then click OK.
4. Return to the composer window. Expand the Custom Mark list under the Mark tab,

316
31
 Using ElecRoc Client

right-click and choose Refresh, and then you will see the newly-added mark.

6.6.5 Auxiliary Tools

We mentioned previously how to position pages by help of the auxiliary tools in section
6.3.3. There are two auxiliary tools for the ganging, grid and guide.

1. Grid
 Show the grid
When you have enabled the menu item Tools > Show Grid, you can see regularly
spaced horizontal and vertical dashed lines on the sheet, forming a multitude of equal
squares. Meanwhile if you have enabled another menu item Tools > Capture Grid, then
when you move a sheet object close to any grid line, you can see two crossed red lines
appearing and the object being captured to the place where the grid line is located. If you
don’t want to use the grid as a reference for positioning, please disable the two menu
items above.
 Define the grid spacing
Choose from the main menu Tools > Grid Spacing. The grid is composed of many
identical squares. The spacing actually refers to the side length of such square. The value
by default is 50 mm, with a range from 10~1000 mm.

Figure 2-351

2. Guide
 Show the guide
Choose from the main menu Tools > Show Guides. The display color of the guide lines
can be defined from the main menu Edit > Preference > Color Settings.
 Capture to the guide
Choose from the main menu Tools > Capture Guides. When you drag a sheet object
close to a guide line, ElecRoc will automatically capture the object to the place where the
guide line is located.
 Track the guide
Choose from the main menu Tools > Track Guides. In this case, if you move the guide
line, you will move the objects captured to the guide line at the same time.
 Add a guide
1. Do any of the following:
 Double-click anywhere on the horizontal or vertical ruler;
 Place the cursor on the ruler, and then press down the left mouse button and
drag towards the sheet editing area;

317
 User Guide

 Click the toolbar icon ;

 Choose from the main menu Tools > Add Guides.
2. The Add Guides dialog box appears. Choose the direction, horizontal or vertical, and
input the exact coordinate, and then click OK.
 Move a guide
Place the cursor on the guide line, the cursor then turning to an arrow-like shape, such
as , and then press down the left mouse button and drag the mouse. In this way you
can move the guide line anywhere easily. If you press the Ctrl key meanwhile, you can
move the guide line to one of the commonly-used positions on the sheet. You can also
double-click the guide line to re-locate it.
 Lock the guides
Choose from the main menu Tools > Lock Guides. The locked guide line can no longer
be moved randomly. To unlock, please cancel the selection of this menu item.
 Delete/Clear guides
You can delete a guide line by simply dragging it outside of the sheet editing area. Or if
needed, you can also click the toolbar icon to clear all the guide lines.

6.6.6 Resource Explorer

ElecRoc enables you to export such resources as papers, plates, templates, and smart
marks out of ElecRoc system by way of the resource explorer.
Choose from the main menu Resource > Explorer to open the operating interface. The
left of the window lists the four resource categories, paper, plate, template, and smart
mark, and at the right it shows all the resources of a selected category.

Figure 2-352

Check the resources you want to export, and then click Export. And in the follow-up

318
31
 Using ElecRoc Client

dialog box, specify the name and destination for your exported resources.
You can also click the Import button in the explorer to import paper, plate, template and
smart mark resources into ElecRoc system.

6.6.7 Preference
Here refers to the ganging-related parameters that can be defined according to your
preference. Choose from the main menu Edit > Preference to enter in the setup
interface, which contains five group of parameters.

Figure 2-353

1. General Parameters
 Alignment
It refers to the benchmark for the page alignment. Pages can be aligned with each other
based on the trim box or the media box.
 Signature Checking
ElecRoc enables you to check up the signature at the time you submit it to ElecRoc

319
 User Guide

workflow, and if finding out error, it labels the error sheet in red, and shows detailed error
information once you choose the error sheet.
Settings here control the items to be checked, including is it a blank layout, is it
exceeding the plate, and is it exceeding the paper.
 Other
Small page and template alignment: It controls the default position of the page
content on the template page, i.e. the default positioning setting under the Content tab
of the property panel, when you choose a page or template page.
Default Bleeding: The default bleeding setting of the page on the sheet.
Knock Out: Controls if the Knock out option is enabled by default for each newly-added
page. If checked, when you add a page to the sheet, or when you add a layout to the
template, the property parameter Template > Knock out for the page in the sheet or
layout will be checked by default.
External/Internal CutLine: Controls if by default the External/Internal CutLine
options are enabled for each newly-added page, not available to layout page. If checked,
when you add a page to the sheet, the property parameter Template > External
/Internal CutLine for the page will be checked by default. The default setup of the
External/Internal CutLine options for the layout page is controlled by the parameter
Preference > Mark Parameter > Cut Line.

2. Mark Parameter
Here you can define the default marks that would be added automatically when you
create a layout. These marks include:

Category sample Location

Cut Line the four corners of the layout
middle points on the four sides of
Fold mark Single line , three lines
the layout
Cross mark Center of the layout
Registration External target mark , solid target middle points on the four sides of
mark mark the layout
CMYK mark the top of the layout
Text mark the bottom of the layout
Table -13

Under the Mark Parameter tab, you can control if the above marks are automatically
added when you create a new layout. A tick means to add the corresponding mark.
Moreover, you can define the default line width, height, and the specific type.

320
32
 Using ElecRoc Client

Figure 2-354

Other Mark: They are the marks you manually add to the sheet. Here you can define the
default line width and height for such mark.
Only the black: If checked, the default marks above will be displayed and output only
on the black separation.

3. Appearance Settings

Figure 2-355

321
 User Guide

Offset Step: The moving distance of each nudge when you use the arrow keys (、、
、) to nudge the selected object on the sheet.
Grid Spacing: The spacing between any two grid lines.
Sub Grid: After you have redefined the grid by using the main menu item Tools > Grid
Spacing, you can use this parameter to further form a sub grid in each square of the old
grid. The parameter here controls the number of the sub squares in horizontal (or vertical)
direction.
Undo Step: The times to perform the Undo operations.
Zoom Step: The scaling factor for each click on the toolbar icons , , or on the zoom
controls at the lower-right corner of the window. The default value is 5%.

4. Color Settings
You can define the display color of many objects, including the page’s bleeding box and
trim box, group object’s border, guides, grid, workspace background, plate, punch area,
and paper.
In the Preference > Color Settings window, if you want to change the display color for
some object, click the color block corresponding to the object to open a color setup dialog
box. In this dialog box, you can choose a new color from samples or in the HSB or RGB
mode. The preview area at the bottom of the dialog box displays the display effects.

Figure 2-356

5. Custom Toolbar
Settings here control what toolbar icons are shown in the composer window. For details,
refer to section 6.6.1.

322
32
 Appendixes

Part 3 Appendixes

Appendix A: Working Principle of ElecRoc

In Founder ElecRoc, the objects that need to be processed include PS files, single page
PDFs and signatures. The engine for processing these data objects is called Processor.
Actually, the content we submitted to processor is a control file, which describes the data
features of the objects. We call this control file Job Ticket. Therefore, processor is also
called Job Ticket Processor (JTP).
Each job ticket processor will take certain processing on some or all the pages of a job.
According to processing objects and functions, job ticket processors are divided into PDF
Generator, Imposer, Printer, Proof and Output processors, and etc.
Besides job ticket processors, Founder ElecRoc has a control center. By using database
with large capacity and high function, the control center provides a job ticket interpreting
system, serves as the storage center and works with the controller efficiently. The
workflow is handed down by job tickets. First job ticket interpreter obtains the workflow
of a certain job by explaining job ticket files of this job, and then arranges the job to be
processed to go through each job ticket processor.
The job ticket processors in Founder ElecRoc run in parallel with each other. Thus, the
workflow can process multiple jobs or multiple files in a job at the same time. In this way,
system is able to optimize the workload efficiently.
In Founder ElecRoc, it’s not necessary to install all processors in one server. Theoretically,
the processors can run on any computer in the local area network. That means Founder
ElecRoc is a distributed workflow management system.
Normally there are two methods to improve the performance of the system. One is to use
a PC server or a workstation with advanced configuration; the other is to set up a
distributed workflow system by adding more inexpensive computers.
The first way involves higher investment and puts greater demands on users. Computer
with special parts running with advanced operating system is difficult to maintain and the
users usually have to be specially trained.
The second way employs the distributed system, which enables cheaper computers to
take important task. If a job has 100 pages, the processing time of one page on a
common PC is one minute; while on a high-performance server it is 20 seconds. If you
use three computers to generate dot matrix at the same time, the total time is about 33
minutes, closing to that on a high-performance server. However, the total price of these
three computers is much lower. The advantage of the distributed system is distributing
many time-taking operations to different computer and fulfilling the complicated work
with cheaper hardware devices.
To make full use of the distributed system, Founder ElecRoc allows its inner processing
module - RIP (contained in PDF Generator and each output processor) - to run many
objects at the same time.

323
 User Guide

Appendix B: Open Formats of ElecRoc

Founder ElecRoc employed three open document formats: JDF, PDF and TIFF.
JDF is the acronym of Job Definition Format, which is published by CIP4 organization on
April 10, 2001. JDF is a job description file based on XML. Different from other electronic
format, JDF not only describes the parameters to be processed of a job, but also
describes the workflow of a job. In another word, JDF is able to provide a whole set of
controlling system for printing workflow without any additional support. Besides that,
JDF has the ability of monitoring and tracking a job. Taking the advantage of JDF, Founder
ElecRoc surpasses its competitors for its excellent workflow management capability.
JDF is a technical standard co-created by scores of the largest device and solution
providers in printing industry. It is independent from any particular manufacturer and
more and more manufacturers begin to take JDF as the standard for communicating with
each other. The emergence of JDF connects the separate processes in previous printing
industry seamlessly together. Founder ElecRoc is the first output workflow product that
employs JDF in the world.
PDF has been widely accepted in the industry. Its smart and powerful description ability,
especially the high compatibility and stability are recognized universally. However, when
it comes to the application of PDF, the answers will be uncertain. Some people even
regard PDF only as a file format in electronic publishing. The development of Founder
ElecRoc once again proves that PDF is a very suitable page description format in both
lower-level printing and the highest-level commercial printing industry. Besides the high
quality, PDF also brings a brand new prepress working fashion. As PDF can be previewed
immediately, a user no longer needs to check his work after proofing. He can convert his
work into PDF, and check on the PDF. This greatly improves the efficiency of printing and
publishing.
The final file submitted by Founder ElecRoc to output device is in TIFF format. The TIFF
file is a dot matrix after rasterizing and can take exposure by any device drive. Founder
ElecRoc recommends its option Founder EagleBlaster that drives various types of
imagesetters and CTP. There is an interface between ElecRoc and EagleBlaster,
transmitting information about the status of their devices and operations.

324
32
 Appendixes

Appendix C: Acrobat Plug-Ins

ElecRoc provides three plug-ins designed to be used in Adobe Acrobat. With them, you
can gain the preflight positioning, zone trap, and free screen capabilities.

C.1 Install Acrobat Plug-ins

The methods to install the plug-ins in PC and Mac are different.

C.1.1 For ElecRoc Client in Mac

1. Open the ElecRoc install DVD and enter into the install directory \Tools\Acrobat
plug_ins\MAC\, find out and copy the folder PFPosition.acroplugin (for preflight plug-in),
ElecrocTrapPlugIn.acroplugin (for trap plug-in), and/or XScreenPI.acroplugin (for screen
plug-in), see① in the following figure.
2. Now open Adobe Acrobat’s Plug-ins folder (for instance, right-click Adobe Acrobat Pro
on the desktop and choose Show Package Contents, see②, and then in the follow-up
window choose Contents > Plug-ins, see③), paste the folder(s) you have copied above.

2
3

Figure 4-1
Note: Please restart your Acrobat in case that you are running it during the installation.
For the screen plug-in, after the installation, please open the file config.ini under the
Acrobat directory Plug-ins\XScreenPI.acroplugin\Elecroc\, (for Acrobat XI, the folder
should be Plug-ins\XScreenPI.acroplugin\Contents\Elecroc\,) and input the ElecRoc
server name or IP address, the client login user name and password (if any) you login

325
 User Guide

ElecRoc, behind "Server=", "UserName=" and "Password=".

Figure 4-2

C.1.2 For ElecRoc Client in PC

Run the install program AcrobatPluginSetup.exe under the install directory
\Tools\Acrobat plug_ins\PC. During the installation, pay attention to:
1. At the time when you choose the destination location, make sure that the path at
Destination Folder is the correct one for your Acrobat.

Figure 4-3

2. At the time when you choose the setup type, note that Complete means to install all
the three plug-ins, while Custom indicates that you can customize the plug-ins to be
installed.

326
32
 Appendixes

Figure 4-4

3. In case that you choose Custom, then you can choose what plug-in to be installed in
the follow-up dialog box. The one(s) being ticked will be installed.

Figure 4-5

327
 User Guide

The other steps during the installation are very simple, please follow the instructions and
click Next step by step to perform.

C.2 Preflight Plug-in

This plug-in requires that the version number of your Acrobat cannot be lower than 9. It
provides the preflight positioning capability.
Note: If your ElecRoc Client is running on Mac computer, before you use the preflight
plug-in, please choose from the Client main menu Tools > Preferences > Net Config, to
provide a user with whom you can access the ElecRoc server machine from the current
MAC computer (refer to section 1.3.2 System Preferences in Part 2 for details). ElecRoc
pops up a hint in case that you haven’t made this configuration.

Figure 4-6

Figure 4-7

328
32
 Appendixes

Under the Preflight node in the job workflow, after the preflight check, right-click a
checked page (any page in case of multiple-page mode) and choose Preflight
Navigator, to open the file in Acrobat. And then you can use the plug-in to locate the
objects with Error, Warning or Notification in the file.
The user interface, a floating panel, is opened by default. You can also open it manually
by choosing from the main menu Founder Plug-Ins > ElecRoc Preflight >
Positioning. Another item under the same menu is Settings, designed for you to
configure the language, the type and width of the lines constituting the rectangle that
label the object. You can choose Tools > Customize Toolbars > Advanced Editing
Toolbar to add these two items into the toolbar, which are shown as / .

C.2.1 Positioning
The Positioning panel is shown as follows. If you check the Individual Browser option,
you can open one more panel named Browser.

Figure 4-8

329
 User Guide

1. Show preflight results

The top of the positioning panel shows a summary of the preflight result. The result is
classified into three types, Error, Warning, and Notification. The numbers behind them
indicate the quantity of the corresponding objects in the file.
Check Results. The errors, warnings and notifications are then displayed in the below.
They are further sorted by check entries, with a number behind showing the quantity of
the objects returned for each check.
Double-click a check entry (the blank circle in front turns to solid). One or all the objects
returned for that entry will then be highlighted on the page, in a rectangle of solid or
dashed line. The colors of the line for error, warning and notification are separately red,
pink and blue.
In the Highlight dropdown list, if you choose One, you highlight the objects for a same
check entry one by one, and in this case, you can click the buttons |<, <<, <>, >>, >|
in the below to switch among the objects. The button <> is used to locate a specified
object that can be input in the edit box. If you choose Page, you highlight all the objects
on one page each time, and at this moment, you can click the buttons |<, <<,
<>, >>, >| in the below to switch among the pages in case that the check file is
multiple-paged.
The Information area shows the detailed information about the highlighted object. It
may include the object type, width and height, color space, bit per component (BPC),
encoding, color value, and etc. specific to the object type.
The individual Browser panel contains an additional Rules setting area. Using the
buttons |<, <<, <>, >>, >| in this area, you can switch among the entries.

330
33
 Appendixes

Figure 4-9

2. Show preflight rules

Check Rules. You can view the checklist defined for the current Preflight node.

C.2.2 Setting

331
 User Guide

Figure 4-10

Language: English or Simplified Chinese.

Line Type: The lines constituting the rectangle that highlights the object may be one of
the two types, dash or solid.
Line Width: Four levels of line width, 4 represents the thickest while 1 the thinnest.
The setting takes effect after you reboot the Acrobat.

C.3 Trap Plug-in

This plug-in is available for ElecRoc Client running on both Mac and PC platforms. It
requires Adobe Acrobat 9 or higher version being installed on your client computer.
But note that, for use on Mac Client, please choose from the Client main menu Tools >
Preferences > Net Config before you use it, so as to provide a user with whom you can
access the ElecRoc server machine from the current MAC computer (refer to section 1.3.2
System Preferences in Part 2 for details).

Founder Trap plug-in

Figure 4-11

C.3.1 View Traps

You can use the plug-in to view the trap result produced by the Trap node. Open the
output file by Trap (right-click the file in the output file queue and choose Download >

332
33
 Appendixes

Open), and you can then use the two toolbar icons as follows to display the trap result,
or expand the Layers panel and check Founder Trapping Layer.

Figure 4-12

View Traps : To display the trap result on the page, as the dark green areas shown in
the above (middle).
View Trap Highlights : To highlight the trap result on the page, as the red areas
shown in the above (right). The highlight color can be defined in the Trap Preferences
window (Founder Plug-Ins > ElecRoc Trap > Trap Preferences).

C.3.2 Trap Zones

The trap zone here differs from the trap area in Chapter 6 of Part 2. The trap area refers
to the specific location where the trapping happens, i.e. the overlapping area between
two abutting trap objects. Here the trap zone refers to any section of the page area. You
can define more than one zone on one page, and each zone may contain one or more
color objects. The size of the zone can be customized freely, and the zones can overlap
with each other.
The zone is designed for you to define a set of trap settings that are applied to all the
page objects within the zone. In this way, you can specify a multitude of zones on one
page with great flexibility and freedom, and define various trap settings as needed for
them, so as to realize diverse trap effects.
The zones are in two types, the global zone refers to the whole page area, and the global
trap setting, i.e. the setting defined for the global zone, is applied to all the objects on the
page; a local zone refers to a section of the page area. In case that the global zone and
local zones co-exist on a page, the global trap setting is then applied to the page objects
outside the local zones.

Figure 4-13

Note: If you have define trap settings for the PDF file with a help of this plug-in, you need
to properly configure the processor parameters Area trapping in job, Global trapping
in job and Ink settings in job, when you submit the file to ElecRoc’s Trap processor.

1. Zone Tools

333
 User Guide

The ElecRoc Trap toolbar in Acrobat is shown as follows.

Figure 4-14

The zone tools include the Rectangular Zone tool and the Pointer tool . Their icons
are located at the leftmost of the toolbar.
The Rectangular Zone tool is designed for you to add zones on the page. Check the
icon . The cursor turns to . Then press down the left mouse button and drag the
mouse in any direction, and you can draw a rectangular of any size on the PDF page. A
zone is produced once you release the mouse button. The zones are named as Zone 1-1,
Zone 1-2, Zone N-n…; N is page number, and n is the zone number on each page.
The Pointer tool is used to choose the zone(s) on the page, so that you can further
perform such operations as re-positioning, size adjustment and property configuration.
Check the icon , and then directly click on the zone. Being selected, the zone border
turns bold in appearance.
Choose a zone, and you can then perform the following configurations or operations.
Position: By simply dragging the zone, you can move it to anyplace on the page.
Size: Place the cursor at any corner of the rectangular zone, turning it to an arrow e.g. ,
and then press down the left mouse button and drag the mouse, and in this way you can
enlarge or reduce the zone in any direction and in any size.
Delete: If you want to delete an unneeded zone, choose it and press the Delete key.
Enable Zone: Each zone contains a little box at its lower-right corner. By default, it is
ticked, meaning that the trap setting defined for this zone is of effect. If you click it and
turn it to a subtraction sign, the setting will then be disabled.

2. Zone Display
It is the following icons that control if and how the defined zones are displayed in Acrobat.
View Zones : To display all the local zones on the page.
View Global Trap Zones : To display the global zone on the page, if any.
View Zones Fill : To fill the local and global zones with a specific color. The fill color,
and the transparency of the fill color, can be defined in the Trap Preferences window.
View All : To check all the three icons above, i.e. to display all the zones and trap result
that can be displayed.
View None : To display none of the zones or trap result.
The commands corresponding to above icons are available under the Founder
Plug-Ins > ElecRoc Trap menu.

3. Arrange Zones
In case that the zones overlap each other, the objects within the overlapping area are
subject to the trap setting defined for the upmost zone.
Choose a zone, click the toolbar icon Bring Forward or Send Backward , and you
can adjust the zone’s up-and-down relation in case of overlapping with other zone.

4. Manage Zones

334
33
 Appendixes

Choose the toolbar icon Trap Spotting Zones to enter in the zone manage window.
The left column lists all the page numbers of the current PDF file, and the zone quantity
that each of the pages contains. The number in blankets represents the zone quantity. All
shows the sum of the zones from all the file pages. The quantity remains empty if no zone
exists on one page.
The right column lists all the zones contained in a selected page. A tick in front
indicates that the zone is enabled. This sign disappears if you disable the zone.
Delete: To delete your selected zone(s).
Disable/Enable: To disable or enable your selected zone(s).
Add Global: To add the global zone.
Go To: To locate the selected zone on the page.
/ : To change the zone’s up-and-down location.

Figure 4-15

C.3.3 Trap Setting

Choose a zone and then click the toolbar icon Trap Settings . In the follow-up window,
you can configure the trap setting applied to the zone.

335
 User Guide

Figure 4-16

The parameters in this window have been introduced previously in Chapter 6 of Part 2.
The settings for all the zones may be different from each other. The Enable option
controls if to enable the setting defined for current zone.
Click the Set… button to activate a dropdown menu, which provides three commands.
Open: To open a parameter template.
Save: To save the current trap setting as a parameter template for repeated use.
Revert: To return to the factory setting.

C.3.4 Trap Preferences

From the Acrobat main menu, choose Founder Plug-Ins > ElecRoc Trap > Trap
Preferences.

336
33
 Appendixes

Figure 4-17

Default Parameter: The default trap setting for each newly-added zone. The default is
the factory setting named as Initial. It supports you to use the templates saved at the
time you configure the zone trap settings. Specify first the directory where the templates
are located in the Folder box, and then choose the template you want to use from the
Default Parameter dropdown list.
Spot Policy: Choose Keep to maintain the spot colors. If you choose Remove, the spot
colors in the file would not be included in the Ink Settings window.
Global Zone to: To what boundary of the page the global zone spreads, Trim Box, Media
Box, Crop Box, Art Box or Bleed Box.
Zone Area Color: Here you can define the colors filled in the global and local zones, and
the color filled when the trap result is highlighted. Colors hare are all for the display
purpose only. Click a color block to open the color setup dialog box, from which you can
change the color. Zone Fill refers to the transparency of the fill color that can be adjusted
by way of the sliding button.

C.3.5 Ink Settings

Click the toolbar icon to open the Ink Settings window.
This window lists the color separations in your file, and if you set the Spot Policy to
Keep, it lists the spot colors as well, if any. It also lists the ink densities and ink types.
Types of the four process colors are not editable, but those of the spot colors can be
changed. The spot color ink densities are calculated based on the spot color values and
the CMYK densities. You can change the densities and types as needed, and after that, it
saves the settings as an ink profile named as default.

337
 User Guide

Figure 4-18
Settings here can be applied into job workflow if you enable ElecRoc Trap processor’s
parameter Ink settings in job.

C.4 Screen Plug-in

Zone screening is developed to enhance Founder ElecRoc’s local screen capability. It
enables the screening towards particular objects in the file, including texts, images,
graphs, and shadings. This feature is provided as a plug-in that can be integrated into
Adobe Acrobat version 8 or 9, available for both the Windows and Mac platforms.

C.4.1 Use Zone screening

The method to use the plug-in in ElecRoc workflow is as follows.
1. Double-click the PDF Rasterizer node in job workflow to open the parameter setup
window. Check the option Zone Screen First under the Screen tab.
2. From the output file queue under the PDF processor (before Imposer, Composer, and
PDF Rasterizer, such as PDF Generator, PDF Tools), use the right-click menu item
Download > Open to open up the PDF page file in Adobe Acrobat.
3. Use the plug-in to define screen settings for the particular objects in the file. For details,
refer to the next section.
4. Save and close the PDF file.
5. Now you can submit the PDF file to the Imposer and PDF Rasterizer nodes. The PDF
Rasterizer will screen the file as per the screen settings made by the Acrobat plug-in.

338
33
 Appendixes

Note: As to the objects in the file that you haven’t defined screen settings with the
plug-in, ElecRoc will screen as per the screen settings made to the PDF Rasterizer node.

C.4.2 Use the Plug-in

1. Choose Objects
The object refers to any object of the four object types contained in the file: text, image,
graph, or shading. To choose one or more objects from the file, you need to use any of the
two icons ( / ) in the toolbar.

Figure 4-19

: Check it, and you can choose an object by way of a simple click on it with your left
mouse button. If you want to choose more than one object, use the Ctrl or Shift key.

: When checked, it enables you to choose the object(s) within a rectangle area. You
can hold down the left mouse button on the file page and move freely to form the
rectangle. You can also use the Ctrl or Shift key in this case to choose more objects.
Note: The toolbar can be displayed or hidden with the right-click menu item Founder
Free Screening in the toolbar blank area.
The objects being chosen are highlighted with a border, whose line color, line shape and
width can be customized by way of the Preference parameters.

339
 User Guide

Figure 4-20

You can learn the information about your chosen objects by right-clicking and choosing
Properties. The pop-up window can then show the object-related information including
the path’s fill & stroke color spaces and colors, the shading’s color space and type, the
text’s fill & stroke color spaces, colors, font name, font type, and the image’s width,
height, bits per channel, color space, and etc.
If you choose an object from the object list, the plug-in will highlight it on the page for
your reference.

Figure 4-21

Note: For multiple-paged file that has same object repeatedly appearing on some of the
pages, if you zoom out to show these pages, and then choose one object, the same
objects on other pages will be highlighted as well. And in this case, if you define screen
settings for one object, the settings take effect on the same objects on other pages, too.

340
34
 Appendixes

And when you open multiple files that contain a same object, if you choose one object in
a file, the same objects in other files will also be highlighted.

2. Define screen setting for object(s)

To define the screen setting for your chosen object(s), perform as follows:

1. Click the toolbar icon or choose the right-click menu item New Object or Group
Setting after you have chosen one or more objects on the page.
A dialog box shown as follows appears.

Figure 4-22
The main body of the dialog box is a table. It lists all the objects you have chosen before
you open the dialog box. From the list, you see which page the objects come from, their
types, and their status. In case that an object has been defined the screen setting, its
status would be labeled as Modified. And the bottom of the dialog box can show more
information about the object, as long as you choose it in the list.
2. Tick the object(s), give an identity name, and then click Setting.
You can tick at one time not only one object, but also a group of objects. By default, all
the undefined objects are ticked. The initial identity name, if you have chosen only one
object before you open the above dialog box, appears as Object1, Object2, and
Object3 … and if you have chosen a group of objects, appears as Group1, Group2, and
Group3 …. However, as to this name, you can replace it with anyone else if you want.
3. Now the screen parameter setup window pops up.

341
 User Guide

Figure 4-23
Please define the screen parameters and specify proper curves, as you do in defining the
PDF Rasterizer’s screen setting. The options in the four Curve dropdown lists are from
ElecRoc server database, and can be updated manually with the button Connect to the
server and update in the Preference window (by clicking the toolbar icon ).
Separation Use Default Params: If checked, spot colors contained in currently-chosen
objects will be screened as you define for the “Default spot” color in the table below. And
in this case, the spot colors (if any) are not displayed in the table. If not checked, the
table displays the spot colors (if any) for you to separately define their screen settings.
To save the screen settings you have made, click Apply or OK.
Buttons at the bottom function as:
ReSet: To reset all the screen settings to the factory settings.
OK: To save the screen settings you made, and close the setup window.
Cancel: To cancel your screen settings, and close the window.
Apply: To save your screen settings.
4. If you need, you can choose part of the objects from the list and then click New to
create a new object group, and then define the screen settings for this group of objects.

342
34
 Appendixes

Figure 4-24

5. Click OK to save your settings and exit.

3. Add object to group

Click the toolbar icon or choose the right-click menu item Add to Group after you
have chosen one or more objects on the page.

Figure 4-25
Choose a group and then click OK. The screen settings defined already for the group will
then take effect on your currently-chosen objects.
Before you click OK, you can click View to see the detailed screen settings that have
been defined for the group.

4. Screen Manager

343
 User Guide

You can modify or delete the defined screen settings for the objects or group objects, and
edit what objects belong to a group.

Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the menu Founder Plug-Ins > Free Screen >
Screen Manager.

Figure 4-26

To modify the screen settings for an object or group, choose the object or group from the
left table, and then make changes as needed in the parameter setup area at the right.
After this, click Apply or OK to save the modification.
To delete the screen settings for an object or group, choose the object or group, and then
click Delete.
Click Edit when you have chosen a group in the left table.
You can rename the group in the Group name edit box. The table below lists all the
objects that are belonging to the group. If needed, you can choose some of them, and
then click the Delete button to delete them out of the group.
If you choose some of the objects and then click New Group, you can create a new
group. The Inherits option controls if the screen settings for the new group inherit that
for the current group. If checked, they keep the same; if not checked, the default factory
screen settings are then applied to the new object group.

344
34
 Appendixes

Figure 4-27

5. Preference
Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the menu Founder Plug-Ins > Free Screen >
Screen Preferences.

345
 User Guide

Figure 4-28

Here you can define the properties of the border that is used for highlighting your chosen
object(s) on the page.
The properties include line color, line shape, and line width. Click the color thumbnail to
open a color palette, from which you can choose or customize another color. The line
shape can be solid or dashed, and the width can be 1~6 pixels.
Connect to the server and update: By clicking this button, you can manually retrieve
the latest screen-related data from ElecRoc server, mainly i.e. the available curve
options.

346
34
 Appendixes

Appendix D: Tools and Options

D.1 1 Bit Tiff to PDF
Using the 1 Bit Tiff to PDF tool, you can convert multiple 1 bit tiff files representing the
various separations of a same page file, into a single PDF file.

D.1.1 Install the tool

The 1 Bit Tiff to PDF tool is delivered for use together with Founder ElecRoc system. But
as a standalone program, you need to perform a separate and manual installation, on a
computer in the LAN where you have deployed ElecRoc system.
Recommended configuration: Pentium 4, 1 GB of RAM, 20 GB free disk space, 15’’
color monitor, CD-ROM drive, network connectivity.
Operating system: Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Follow the steps below to install (on Windows XP as example).
1. Double-click the file setup.exe to run the install program. The install program starts
collecting system related information, and after this, it displays the welcome window.

Figure 4-29

2. Click Next. The install program shows the license agreement. Accept the terms and
click Next to continue.

347
 User Guide

Figure 4-30

3. Input the user name and company name, and click Next.

Figure 4-31

4. The install program prompts you to specify a destination. You can use the default folder,

348
34
 Appendixes

or specify another with the Change button. And then, click Next.

Figure 4-32

5. Choose ElecRoc 6 and then click Next.

Figure 4-33

349
 User Guide

6. Specify the program folder.

Figure 4-34

7. The program prompts that it’s ready to begin the installation. Click Install.

Figure 4-35

350
35
 Appendixes

8. It starts the installation. The bar shows the progress.

Figure 4-36

9. When the bar reaches 100%, it shows that the installation is completed. Click Finish.

Figure 4-37

351
 User Guide

D.1.2 About the tiff files

This tool accepts the 1 bit tiff files from Founder ElecRoc. In ElecRoc, you can use the 1
Bit TIFF Export processor to generate 1 bit tiff files under a specified directory. The output
directory can be defined in the processor’s parameter setup window.

1 2

Figure 4-38

1. An ElecRoc workflow containing the processor 1 Bit Tiff Export;

2. The 1 Bit Tiff Export processor parameter setup window.
Note: The 1 Bit Tiff Export processor can name the output tiff files in 3 modes, by way of
the 3 parameters, Simple display name, Full display name, and Rename as. Please
note that, when you choose Rename as, the output tiff files must be in such a format:
<JobName>_<Resolution>_<FullSepName> for the 1 Bit Tiff to PDF tool to accept.

D.1.3 Start the tool

Double-click the shortcut icon for the tool on the desktop, or choose Start > All
Programs > Founder > 1 Bit TIFF to PDF > 1 Bit TIFF to PDF, to start the tool.

352
35
 Appendixes

Figure 4-39

D.1.4 Submit tiff files

There are two ways for you to submit the tiff files to this tool.

1. Use the Open command

Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the menu File > Open…. In the follow-up dialog
box, locate the tiff files and open them.
The opened files are then shown in the upper-right queue of the main window, i.e. the
Waiting… queue.

Figure 4-40

Note: In case that the till file name contains characters such as *, which is not supported
by this tool, you need to manually delete such characters.

2. Use a hot folder

Define a hot folder and put the tiff files into the folder. The tool can automatically detect
and process the tiff files entered into the hot folder.

353
 User Guide

To define a hot folder, perform as follows:

1. Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the menu File > Add Hot Folder.

Figure 4-41
Input the name for your hot folder setting, and click OK.
2. The setup window for your hot folder appears. Configure the parameters as needed,
and then click OK.

Figure 4-42

354
35
 Appendixes

You need to specify the input and output folders.

Input Folder: The folder where the tool receives the tiff files. After you put the tiff files
into this folder, the tool can then automatically and regularly detect them, and process
them upon the detection. If you check Include Subfolders, the tool can search for the
tiff files in the subfolders (if any). In practice, for example, you can specify the output
directory of ElecRoc’s 1 Bit Tiff Export processor as the input folder.
PDF Output: The folder where the tool generates, i.e. outputs the PDF files.
Resolution: The resolution of the final generated PDF files. If you want the resolution to
be same as that of the input tiff files, check Original Resolution. If not, you can choose
a resolution from the dropdown list or enter a custom one, ranging from 72 to 1440 dpi.
Submit Jobs: The multiple tiff files screened from a same file may not arrive to the input
folder simultaneously. In this case, you can check The jobs will be submitted when
waiting time exceeds, and specify a time value, when no tiff files arrives within the
specified time period (10 seconds), the tool will stop waiting and submit the files, even if
some of the tiff files may have not arrived. Or you can check The jobs will be
submitted when planes number equals to, and specify a number value, when the
number of the arrived tiff files equals to the specified number, the tool will also stop
waiting and submit the files, even if some files may not have arrived.
You may specify other relevant parameters, if needed.
Interval: The time interval at which the tool regularly detects in the folder.
Finished File is Deleted or Moved to: If you check Deleted, the tiff files in the input
folder will be deleted after the generation of the PDF file. If you check Moved to, you can
specify a destination and the tiff files will then be moved to this destination.
Click OK when you have defined the above parameters.
3. You will then see the hot folder setting in the left queue of the main window. Check it
to run the hot folder.

Figure 4-43
Note: When a hot folder is not running, i.e. unchecked, you can use the right-click menu
items Modify and Delete to modify its setting or delete it.
4. By clicking, make sure that the button in the upper-right queue (i.e. the Waiting…
queue), has turned from to . Now you can put tiff files under the hot folder, and the
tiff files will soon enter into the file queue of the tool.

Figure 4-44

355
 User Guide

D.1.5 Output PDF file

1. Before the output
The submitted jobs are listed in the Waiting… queue. The separations it contains are
indicated at the end of the job name, such as (K|C|M|Y|S). “S” indicates spot color.
Right-click a waiting job and you can get a shortcut menu. The menu items and their
functions are as follows.
About Job: To view the detailed information about the job, including job name, submit
type, time, tiff files it contains, color names, and job status.
Setting: To define the output setting.
Retry: To output once again in case that the output is failed. For instance, if your job
contains a spot color tiff file but you haven’t defined the spot color in advance, it would
turn back the job (showing the job as No Setting) at the time of being output. In such
case, you can define the spot color, and then choose this menu item to re-output the job.
Delete Selected Item: To delete the selected job in the queue.
Clear All Items: To delete all the jobs in the queue.

2. Output setting
Right-click the job and choose Setting.

Figure 4-45

Under the PDF Setting tab:

PDF Name: If you choose Keep, the name of the generated PDF file keeps the same as
that of the input tiff files. You can also choose Custom to define a custom file name.
Resolution: Here you can separately define the resolution. Otherwise, it remains the
resolution setting as defined in the hot folder or that defined by choosing from the menu
Preferences > System Preferences > PDF Setting.

356
35
 Appendixes

PDF Output: Here you can also separately define the output folder.
If PDF file(s) exists: In case that a PDF file with same name exists in the output folder,
if you choose Skip, a prefix will be added to the name of the newly-generated PDF file;
and if you choose Overwrite, the existing file will be overwritten by the newer one.

Figure 4-46

Under the Spot Setting tab:

If the job contains spot color separation, you need to define the values of the spot color,
so that the tool can correctly output the spot color.
Choose a spot color (if any), and manually enter the cmyk values, and then click Add.
You can also define the spot colors by choosing Preferences > System Preferences >
Spot Setting.

3. Output
Click the button in the lower-right queue, i.e. the Processed… queue, turning it to .
And the tool then starts generating the PDF files.

357
 User Guide

Figure 4-47

4. After the output

Switch to the output folder, and now you can see and open the generated PDF files.

Figure 4-48

358
35
 Appendixes

In Adobe Reader or Acrobat, when you have opened the generated PDF file, choose from
the main menu Advanced > Print Production > Output Preview to show all the
separations of the file. If you don’t check Output Preview, by default, it shows only one
of the separations.
In the Processed… queue, you can use right-click menu items Delete Selected Item
or Clear All Items to delete the finished jobs from the queue.

D.1.6 System Preferences

Click the toolbar icon , or choose from the menu Preferences > System Preferences.
1) Under the System Setting tab:
Maximum Jobs for Processing: The maximum number of jobs in the two job queues.
Warning Free Space: To issue warning when the free disk space in the partition where
the tool is installed is less than the value specified here.
Information Window Buffer: The size of the buffer that stores the messages in the
information window.

Figure 4-49

2) Under the Spot Setting tab:

359
 User Guide

Figure 4-50

Here you can define the spot colors for all the jobs, so that they can be properly output.
Moreover, here you can import spot colors as system spot colors. But before this, you
need to manually copy the spot color file (e.g. .sts file) into the System Spots directory
(e.g. c:\Program Files\Founder\1 Bit TIFF to PDF\System Spots). To import system spot
colors, choose System Spot Color, and click Load, and then choose the system spot
color in the follow-up dialog box.
System Spot Color First: When checked, if two colors from the Custom Spot Color
and the System Spot Color lists have a same name, the system one will be used first,
otherwise the custom one first.
3) For settings under the PDF Setting tab, refer to the previous section.

D.2 Load Balancing Tool

This tool is designed to distribute the workload for PDF Rasterizer and Proof processors,
so as to avoid any overload on them.
On the computer where you have installed the PDF Rasterizer or Proof processor,
double-click the file LoadBalanceTool.exe under the install directory \Tools\Load
Balancing Tool\ to start up the tool.

360
36
 Appendixes

Figure 4-51

For the PDF Rasterizer processor:

1. Stop PDF Rasterizer on ElecRoc Server.
2. Run this tool, and input the ID of PDF Rasterizer in the Processor’s ID edit box.
3. Specify a proper load balancing number.
On the premise that your computer CPU has enough cores, with this tool, your computer
can simultaneously start the specified number of PDF rasterizing processes. And
moreover, it can distribute the multiple jobs submitted to your PDF Rasterizer processor
to these synchronously running processes, improving the processing efficiency.
4. Click Apply.
5. Start PDF Rasterizer.
For the Proof processor:

361
 User Guide

1. Stop Pre-RIP Proof or Post-RIP Proof on ElecRoc Server.

2. Run this tool, and input the ID of the Proof processor in the Processor’s ID edit box.
3. Click Device Querying, the proof devices installed on current computer will be listed.
4. Check the device that your proof processor is connecting, and the devices of that same
model, if any. ElecRoc can then distribute the multiple jobs submitted to your proof
processor across these devices.
5. Click Apply.
6. Start your Proof processor.

D.3 Unzip Manager

With ElecRoc’s remote 3D preview capability, you can email your PDF pages as a single or
a series of .zip files to a remote receiver for preview purpose. After receiving these .zip
files, the remote user can use this tool to unzip them, so as to realize the 3D preview.
1. Double-click the file UnZipManager.exe under the install directory
\Tools\UnZipManager\ to start up the tool.

Figure 4-52

362
36
 Appendixes

Note: To use this tool, you need to install .NET Framework 3.5 or later version in your
computer.
2. Specify the target path. After the unzipping, a PhotoBook.exe file and related resource
files and folders will be generated under this path.
3. Click Browse to locate the .zip files. You can open multiple .zip files, and if needed,
click Up or Down to change their sequences, which effect the sequences of the PDF
pages in the final preview.
4. Click OK.
5. Now you can visit the target path, and click the file PhotoBook.exe to start the preview.

363
 User Guide

Appendix E: Glossary of Terms

Prepress
In press industry, the prepress refers to the work before printing. That involves every
procedure during processing a document generated by layout application prior to its
going to the press to be printed.
PostScript
PostScript is shortened as PS. It is a page description language developed by Adobe in US.
PS is the universally accepted page description standard in printing industry. So far its
latest version is PostScript 3.
PDF
PDF is the acronym of Portable Document Format, which is a document description
format rather than a language. The latest version is PDF 1.5 based on PS 3 technology
which possesses the same description ability as PostScript 3 and fully meets the
requirements of printing. PDF is Cross Platform, Navigational, Ultra-Printable,
Ultra-Viewable and Smaller than other conventional document formats.
TIFF
In prepress environment, TIFF is a widely used format for storing image data.
EPS
EPS is acronym for Encapsulate PostScript, which is a standard file format for importing
and exporting PostScript files. In many applications, image and text information can be
output in the form of EPS. The purpose of an EPS file is to be included in other pages,
scaled and moved etc. like an image, but the contents of the EPS cannot be modified. EPS
is the subset of PostScript, and is used for describing page contents.
Normalizing
To convert some documents that are not single-page PDF format into documents of PDF.
Without particular requirements, the converted PDF documents will have the same
printing results as the original documents. The particular requirements refer to
requirements such as lowering the image resolution, etc.
NORM
NORM is the acronym of Normalizing Once, RIP Many. A job must first be normalized. The
converted PDF has nothing to do with devices. Ripping will be processed for each output
operation to ensure printing quality.
Imposition
In producing a publication with multiple pages, each page is imposed on one sheet
following a special order. When the sheet is printed out, it will be folded to represent the
intention of designer.
OPI
OPI is the acronym of Open Prepress Interface. In graphic design, if the size of some
image is too large, user can replace the large image with a smaller one, and in the
process before printing, replace the smaller image with the original one to have a good
printing effect. The process of replacing the smaller image with the large image is OPI.
Trapping

364
36
 Appendixes

Trapping is a way to compensate for mis-registration, and it’s also a criterion that many
people use to judge "quality" printing. Trapping is the intentional overlapping of colors
that adjoin each other to prevent the stock or substrate from showing through when
maintaining tight register is difficult or impossible.
RIP
Abbreviation for raster image processing, a hardware and/or software system that
translates page description command into bitmaps for output to a laser printer or
imagesetter.
Color Management
In prepress environment, color management refers to the transformation from user color
space to device color space.
Proofing
Proofing is to preview the effect of the printing material to ensure the effect of the final
products. Proofing includes sheet proofing, imposition proofing and color proofing. Sheet
proofing is for checking the content on a sheet, such as fonts, figures and images;
Imposition proofing is for checking the result of imposition; Color proofing is for checking
the color effect on a sheet.
Print
In prepress environment, printing is a special form of sheet proofing.
Output
In printing industry, output refers to the final output, which sends the raster image to
output devices. Different output devices generate different results. The output of
imagesetter is film, while that of CTP is plate.
Output Device
Output device refers to the device for final output.
Client
Client is the program that uses the functions provided by ElecRoc Server to process a job.
A user can accomplish all works related to a workflow through Client. Client may be
installed in a PC or Mac that is in the same domain or group with Server. Founder ElecRoc
allows more than one Client working at the same time.
Server
Server refers to the service programs on one PC or a group of PC with high configuration.
These PCs are networked in a local area network. Server is able to accomplish the
prepress output operation of the jobs that are submitted by users. Server has the
Internet service function, which enables each Client to communicate with server. Server
also has a SQL database, which, on one hand, controls the operations of jobs, on the
other hand, saves all the operation information and provides reports for users’ work.
Job Ticket (JT)
Job ticket is a document that describes the process mode and settings of one or a series
of operations. Job ticket is global and has nothing to do with a particular job. A job ticket
can serve many jobs at the same time.
Job Ticket Processor (JTP)
Job ticket processors provide prepress processing functions. In Founder ElecRoc system,

365
 User Guide

there are many processors, such as PDF Generator, Imposition, Proofer and Output.
File
A file is the minimum data processing unit. The following types of files can be accepted by
Founder ElecRoc workflow management system: PS, PDF, EPS, PRN, etc.
Job
Job is an aggregation of files that will be processed by system. All the operations are
about job. In general, each one of the files in a job has relationship with each other. For
example, all the files belong to the same transaction.
In Founder ElecRoc system, a job is the object of various processes. All the works are
about jobs.
Process
Submitting the data of a job to a JT forms a process. A process is only aimed at the data
of one job, while the data of one job can be processed by many processes.
Page
After normalizing, the page description document is divided into single pages. A page is
a PDF document.
Sheet
The large piece of paper used for printing is a sheet. The Sheet in ElecRoc TPLEditor is the
front side and back side of a signature.
Signature
One side of a sheet is a signature.
Section
To fold the signature according to the page number and content to form a section.
Sections need to be assembled and bound to form a book.
DPI
Dots Per Inch describes the resolution of device. DPI refers to precision of laser beam.
The higher the resolution, the thinner the laser beams. In printing the resolution of
information on the output of a print job is a measure of the density of that information
and is measured as dots or lines per linear measure.

366
36